Anderson Manufacturing AV-9000 Recording Equipment User Manual

Instruction
Manual
Anderson Instrument Co., Inc.
156 Auriesville Rd.
Fultonville, NY 12072
ANDERSON
Phone: 518-922-5315
800-833-0081
Fax:
Rev. G
Doc. AIC-3677
518-922-8997
AV-9000 Recorder/
Recording Controller
AV-9000 Manual Revision Log
Revision
Edition 1
Edition 1 Rev A
Date
6/16/95
7/14/95
Edition 1 Rev B 8/10/95
Description
Released
Revised Pages: 4,5, 1-1 thru 1-5, 2-8, 4-3, 4-5,
4-6, 4-9 thru 4-11, 4-17, 4-37, 4-39, 4-40, 4-42,
4-48, 4-50, 4-57, 4-100, 4-101, 7-1 thru 7-3, 10-1,
11-1, C-2, C-3, C-5 thru C-7, C-10, C-11, C-13;
Added Pages: D-1 thru D-4 and E-1 thru E-2.
Revised Pages: 2-9 thru 2-13, 3-16, 4-13, 4-29,
11-2 thru 11-7, B-1 thru B-2, C-4, C-10 and E-1
thru E-3.
Edition 1 Rev C 11/6/95
Revised Pages: 5, 1-3, 1-5, 2-6, 2-15, 3-5, 3-6,
3-35, 4-8, 4-17, 4-26, 4-45, 4-79 thru 4-101, 6-9
thru 6-14, 8-1, 10-1 thru 10-2, 11-4, 11-6, A-1, A4, E-1 thru E-3;
Added Pages: 10-3 thru 10-5, 11-7 thru 11-8, A-6
thru A-7, D-7;
Deleted Pages: 4-102.
Edition 1 Rev D 4/15/96
Revised Pages: 1,3,5, 1-3 thru 1-6, 2-1, 2-3, 2-4,
2-6, 2-8, 2-15, 2-16, 3-3 thru 3-8, 3-10, 3-11, 3-19
thru 3-21, 3-24, 3-28, 3-29, 3-36 thru 3-39, 4-1
thru 4-3, 4-6 thru 4-13, 4-15, 4-17, 4-18, 4-23,
4-24, 4-26, 4-30, 4-31, 3-35, 4-58, 4-59, 4-62,
4-63, 4-65 thru 4-67, 4-71, 4-73, 4-74, 4-77 thru
4-99, 5-2, 6-1, 6-6, 6-12, 6-13, 8-4, 9-3 thru 9-8,
10-4, 11-5, thru 11-8, A-2, B-2, E-2.
Added Pages: 8-5, 9-7, 9-8, A-8.
Deleted Pages: 4-100, 4-101.
Edition 1 Rev E 9/18/96
Revised Pages: 1, 2-2, 4-23 thru 4-24, 4-58 thru
4-59, 4-63, 4-65, 4-67, 4-73 thru 4-74, 4-80, 4-87,
4-91, 4-95 thru 4-96, 11-1 thru 11-4, C5, C14,
D-3.
Edition 2 Rev F 4/1/97
Revised Pages: 1-1, 1-3, 1-4, 1-5, 2-16, 3-13,
3-16,3-17, 3-23, 3-29, 3-33, 3-44, 4-2, 4-17, 4-20,
4-21, 4-22, 4-23, 4-24, 4-34, 4-36, 4-38, 4-39,
4-41,4-42, 4-45, 4-54, 4-58, 4-59, 4-63, 4-65,
4-66, 4-67, 4-68, 4-69, 4-73, 4-74, 4-75, 4-77,
4-78, 4-80, 4-87, 4-91, 4-93, 4-94, 5-1, 6-6, 6-12,
6-13, 8-2, 8-3, 8-4, 8-5, 9-2, 9-6.
Added Pages: 3-24, 3-25, 3-36, 3-37, 3-43, SEC13
Edition 3 Rev G 7/1/98
Revised Pages: 9-2 thru 9-22
Added Pages: SEC 14
Prefix & Table of Contents
1
Edition 3
Rev G
AV-9000 Manual Prefix
MANUAL ORGANIZATION
This manual is organized in twelve major sections:
Section 1
Section 2
Section 3
Section 4
Section 5
Section 6
Section 7
Section 8
Section 9
Section 10
Section 11
Section 12
Section 13
Section 14
Introduction and General Information
Installation and Wiring
The Basics of Recorder Operation
Configuration
Display Programming
Chart Prompts
Alarm Settings
Action Time Settings
Enables & Passwords
Test
Calibration
Appendix
Controllers
Profilers
All users should be familiar with the first three sections of this manual before beginning to operate the recorder.
Operators are then advised to cover the Display Programming, Chart Prompts and Alarm Setting sections.
Configurators should be familiar with all information, particularly the details in the Configuration Programming
section.
ANDERSON TECHNICAL AND APPLICATION SUPPORT
Please have your recorder model number AND serial number available before calling for technical and application
support. Support is available from:
The Anderson Instrument Company, Inc.
156 Auriesville Road
Fultonville, New York 12072
1-800-833-0081 or 1-518-922-5315
Fax: 1-800-726-6733 or 1-518-922-8997
Prefix & Table of Contents
2
Edition 3
Rev G
Table of Contents
SECTION 1 - INTRODUCTION AND GENERAL INFORMATION
1.1
Unpacking
1.2
Installation of Pen Cartridge Assembly
1.3
Order Matrix/Model Number
1.4
Specifications
1.5
Warranty Statement
PAGE
1-1
1-1
1-2
1-3
1-4
1-7
SECTION 2 - INSTALLATION AND WIRING
2.1
Mounting
2.2
Preparation for Wiring
2.3
Wiring Connections - Inputs
2.3.1
Shipped Configuration/Jumper Positioning
2.3.2
Sensor Break
2.3.2
AC Power Connections
2.3.4
Thermocouple Connections
2.3.5
RTD Connections
2.3.6
Voltage Connections
2.3.7
Current Connections
2.3.8
Switch Input Connections
2.4
Wiring Connections - Outputs
2.4.1
SPDT Relay
2.4.2
Solid State Relay Driver (SSRD)
2.4.3
Current Output
2.4.4
24 VDC Transmitter Power Supply
2.4.5
Communications
2-1
2-1
2-3
2-6
2-7
2-7
2-8
2-9
2-10
2-11
2-12
2-13
2-14
2-14
2.14
2-15
2-15
2-16
SECTION 3 - THE BASICS OF RECORDER OPERATION
3.1
Power Up
3.2
Instrument Modes
3.2.1
Normal Display
3.2.2
Display Prompts
3.2.3
Chart Prompts
3.2.4
System Prompts
3.3
Keypad Functions
3.3.1
DISPLAY key
3.3.2
CHART key
3.3.3
SCROLL key
3.3.4
ARROW key
3.3.5
RESET key
3.3.6
ESCAPE key, MODIFY key, ENTER key
3.3.7
Special keys
3.4
Changing Parameter Setting - Modify
3.4.1
Changing Values
3.4.2
Changing Text
3.4.3
Changing Choices
3.4.4
Copy/Initialize
3.4.5
Passwords
3.4.6
Enables
3.5
The Display
3.6
General
3.7
Display Details
3.8
Chart Details
3-1
3-1
3-1
3-1
3-1
3-1
3-1
3-2
3-2
3-2
3-2
3-2
3-2
3-2
3-2
3-3
3-3
3-3
3-3
3-4
3-4
3-4
3-4
3-4
3-5
3-7
Prefix & Table of Contents
3
Edition 3
Rev G
3.8.1
3.9
3.10
Chart Printing Interruptions
3.8.2
New Chart Printing Requirements
3.8.3
Example Chart
3.8.4
Sequence of Events
Getting Started
Quick Start Procedure
PAGE
3-8
3-9
3-9
3-12
3-13
3-14
SECTION 4 - CONFIGURATION
4.1
Entering Configuration
4.1.1
Inputs
4.1.2
Constants
4.1.3
Custom Curves
4.1.4
Derived Variables
4.1.5
Process Variables
4.1.6
Recorders
4.1.7
Totalizers
4.1.8
Timers
4.1.9
LEDs
4.1.10 Relays
4.1.11 Current Outputs
4.1.12 Instrument Settings
4.1.13 Derived Actuators
4.1.14 Operator Inputs
4.1.15 Operator Messages
4.1.16 Chart Messages
4.1.17 Simulated Variables
4-1
4-1
4-1
4-14
4-15
4-18
4-32
4-43
4-52
4-61
4-64
4-66
4-69
4-72
4-78
4-81
4-85
4-89
4-95
SECTION 5 - DISPLAY PROGRAMMING
5-1
SECTION 6 - CHART PROMPTS
6.1
Change Chart
6.2
Chart Configuration
6-1
6-1
6-2
SECTION 7 - ALARM SETTINGS
7-1
SECTION 8 - ACTION TIME SETTINGS
8-1
SECTION 9 - ENABLES & PASSWORDS
9-1
SECTION 10 - TEST
10-1
SECTION 11 - CALIBRATION
11-1
SECTION 12 - APPENDIX
A - Board Layouts
B - Ranges
C - Reference
D - Examples
E - Accuracy Tables
A-1
B-1
C-1
D-1
E-1
Prefix & Table of Contents
4
Edition 3
Rev G
SECTION 13 - CONTROLLERS
13.1
Entering Controllers
13.2
Control Setpoints
13.3
Control State Access
13.4
Tuning Parameters
PAGE
13-1
13-3
13-18
13-22
13-31
SECTION 14 - PROFILERS
14.1
Profile Entry
14.2
Profile Settings
14.3
Profile Control
14-1
14-1
14-4
14-7
Figures and Tables
Figure 1-1
Figure 2-1A
Figure 2-1B
Figure 2-2
Figure 2-3
Figure 2-4
Figure 2-5
Figure 2-6A
Figure 2-6B
Figure 2-7
Figure 2-8
Figure 2-9
Figure 2-10
Figure 2-11
Figure 2-12
Figure 2-13
Figure 2-14
Figure 2-15
Figure 2-16
Figure 2-17
Figure 3-1
Figure 3-2
Figure 11-1
Pen Cartridge Installation
Mounting Dimensions
Dimensional Drawing
Noise Suppression
Noise Suppression
Board and Terminal Locations
Shipped Jumper Positions
AC Power Connections, 115/230
AC Power Connection, Universal
TC Connections
RTD Connections
Voltage Connections
Current Connections
Switch Input Connections
SPDT Relay Output
SSR Driver Ouptut
Current Output
Transmitter Power Supply
RS-485 Communications
RS-232 Communications
Keypad
Example Chart
Jumper Positions for Calibration
1-2
2-1
2-2
2-4
2-4
2-6
2-7
2-8
2-8
2-9
2-10
2-11
2-12
2-13
2-14
2-14
2-15
2-15
2-16
2-16
3-2
3-12
11-3
Figure A-1
Figure A-2
Figure A-3
Figure A-4
Figure A-5
Figure A-6
Figure A-7
Figure A-8
Power Supply Board
Mother Board
Relay/SSR Board
Input Board
Motor Driver Board
Current Ouptut Board
Transmitter Power Supply
Communication Board
A-1
A-2
A-3
A-4
A-5
A-6
A-7
A-8
Table 2-1
Table 3-1
Table 3-2
Table 10-1
Table 11-1
Table 11-2
Table 11-3
Board ID Jumpers
Configure Chart Parameters
Recorder Parameters
Available Tests
Calibration Routines
Range Select
Input Board Jumper Positions
2-7
3-10
10-1
10-1
11-1
11-2
11-3
Prefix & Table of Contents
5
Edition 3
Rev G
Section 1 - Introduction and General Information
This instrument is a microprocessor based circular chart recorder capable of measuring, displaying, and recording
from a variety of inputs. Applications include temperature, level, pressure, flow, and others. The instrument can
be specified as either a one, two, three, or four pen model.
The standard process sensor inputs (up to 8 total inputs) are user configurable to directly connect to and convert
thermocouple, RTD, millivolt, volt, milliamp or contact closure inputs. Thermocouple and RTD linearization, as
well as thermocouple cold junction compensation, are performed automatically. Up to four individually isolated 24
VDC regulated transmitter power supplies are available for transmitter inputs, each providing up to 25 mADC.
Using the optional math capability, mass flow, BTUs, relative humidity, and other derived variables can be calculated, as well as simple math functions performed and custom curve conversions. Optional totalization is available for input values or derived variables. Any recorder value can be treated as a process value, to provide
alarming and special display capability.
Up to 4 variables can be recorded as analog trend lines on chart sizes of 10, 11, or 12 inches in diameter. The
trend lines can be the result of instantaneous values, connecting the values, drag pen, average values, or connecting the average values. The trend lines can be scaled and positioned on the chart in zones. Trend scales,
units, and a trend tag can be printed in the same color as time lines.
Dates, times, batch numbers, operator IDs, process values, scales and alarm messages can all be printed on the
chart in color.
Definitions for a large number of "Terms and Concepts" described in this manual are included in Appendix C.
1.1 UNPACKING
Remove the instrument and pen cartridge assembly from the shipping container and inspect for any damage due
to shipment. If any damage is noticed due to transit, report and file a claim with the carrier. Write the model
number and serial number in spaces provided on Page 1-3 of this manual for future reference. The model
number and serial number are found on the label on the case, viewed when platen is open.
!
CAUTION: READ THIS MANUAL
THE INTERNATIONAL HAZARD SYMBOL IS FOUND ADJACENT TO THE
LOWER PLATEN HOLD DOWN SCREW. IT IS IMPORTANT TO READ
THIS MANUAL BEFORE INSTALLING OR COMMISSIONING THE UNIT.
Section 1
1-1
Edition 3
Rev G
1.2 INSTALLATION OF PEN CARTRIDGE ASSEMBLY
Remove the pen cartridge assembly from its shipping container. With mounting tab on the bottom, slide the pen
cartridge assembly (item 2 on Figure 1-1) into the print actuator (item 1 on Figure 1-1).
FIGURE 1-1
PLASTIC CHART SHIELD
(DO NOT REMOVE)
INSTALL PEN
CARTRIDGE (2)
PRINT ACTUATOR
TRAVERSE CABLE
PRINT ACTUATOR (1)
1
Edition 3
Rev G
2
3
4
5
6
7
1-2
8
Section 1
1.3 ORDER MATRIX / MODEL NUMBER
AV- 9
1
2
TYPE
Recorder Only
Recorder/Controller
2
4
PENS/COLORS
Two Trend, Two Colors**
Four Trend Pens, Four Colors
1
2
3
4
6
8
UNIVERSAL INPUTS
One Input
Two Inputs
Three Inputs
Four Inputs
Six Inputs
Eight Inputs
0
FIXED CHARACTER
0
2
4
6
8
RELAY OUTPUTS
None
Two Relays
Four Relays
Six Relays
Eight Relays
0
FIXED CHARACTER
0
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
4-20 mA OUTPUTS (isolated)*
None
One 4-20 mA Output (int. pwr.)
Two 4-20 mA Outputs (int. pwr.)
Three 4-20 mA Outputs (int. pwr.)
Four 4-20 mA Outputs (int. pwr.)
Two 4-20 mA Outputs (ext. pwr.)
Four 4-20 mA Outputs (ext. pwr.)
Four 4-20 mA Outputs (2-int. pwr./2-ext. pwr.)
NOTE:
0
0
0 33
3
CASE TYPE & MOUNTING
NEMA4X Wall/Panel Mount
3
ENCLOSURE OPTIONS
Plastic Window
0
MEMORY CARD/COMS
None
0
1
2
3
MATH/TOTALIZER
None
Math
Totalizer
Math & Totalizer
0
1
2
3
4
24V TRANSMITTER POWER SUPPLY
None
One Supply
Two Supplies
Three Supplies
Four Supplies
*
One 4-20mA output
required for each
controller function
** Pens/colors are added
to the instrument in the
following order: red,
then green, then blue,
and then black.
Additional charts may be ordered separately (100 per box)
12”/100 Rings
#00215216
Warranty: The AV-9000 is backed by a comprehensive 2 year warranty.
Operation Manual: One operation manual is supplied with each unit.
Replacement Pen Cartridges
Pen Colors
Part Number
60500802
Green, Red
60500803
Blue, Green, Red
60500804
Blue, Green, Red, Black
MODEL NUMBER
SERIAL NUMBER
Section 1
1-3
Edition 2
Rev F
1.4 SPECIFICATIONS
DESCRIPTION
The instrument is the first circular chart recorder with the ability to record trend data and print alphanumeric in four colors. It uses unique “ring only” charts and has the ability to zone and scale trend data.
These capabilities not only provide the best trend data readability, but also instant association with the
corresponding scales. Whether it’s basic application of recording inputs, to a demanding application
requiring derived variables, logic functions, totalization, or other capabilities, the instrument can be
supplied with the necessary level of sophistication, while maintaining an uncomplicated operator interface.
MODELS
The instrument is available in versions for trend recording of one to four values. The number of colors
can equal the number of trended values, or all four colors can be provided. The latter option provides
the greatest color flexibility and makes it easier to add trend capability to the instrument in the field. The
instrument can have up to eight inputs, and inputs are not directly associated with trend pens. The
instrument can trend any combination of inputs, averages, derived variables, logic states, even totals. A
full compliment of options provides the flexibility to handle virtually any type of application.
FEATURES
• Color Chart
• 1,2,3, and 4 trend pen versions
• All versions with optional four color capability
• 10", 11", or 12" charts
• Linear scales and radial time lines
• Trend zoning and dual zone capability
• Up to 8 universal inputs
• 40 character, vacuum fluorescent display
• Simultaneous display approach for flexibility
• Building block approach for flexibility
• Math and equations for actuators
• Logic equations for actuators
• 9 digit totalizes
• Chart messages
• Operator inputs
• Operator messages
• Real time clock
• Time and date printed on charts
CONFIGURATION
A multilevel prompting scheme provides rapid access to all configuration data. By model number and
selective enabling the software displays only those configuration sections needed. The 40 character,
vacuum fluorescent display provides true English language prompts. The 15 keypad makes moving
through the prompts and modifying the parameters intuitive. Multiple choice selections and use of the
“quick select keys” simplifies the programming of many parameters. Copy functions make configuring
similar sets of parameters even faster. Two methods of modifying character strings simplifies the entry
of English tags and units. The instrument even displays the proper jumper placement for the installer.
The instrument can virtually be configured without looking at the manual.
Section 1
1-4
Edition 2
Rev F
OPERATOR INTERFACE
Beyond the configuration capability, the display, keypad, and prompting system provide superior real time data presentation.
The display of each instrument value is configurable and three display formats are available, providing a range from fully
detailed displays with 20 character tags, alarm indications, values, and units, to four process values displayed simultaneously.
Separate keys are used to access the display, chart, and configuration related areas. By selective enabling and password
protection, access to various operational areas of the instrument can be limited or controlled. Some keys can also be configured to provide special functions, such as resetting totalizers. The operator interface has been designed to make daily operation
as simple as possible. Changing charts, for example, requires only three keystrokes.
CONSTRUCTION
The instrument is housed in a structural foam moulded enclosure which can be panel or surface mounted. Mounting brackets
are included. Its design allows it to fit into the smallest panel cutout of competitive products, while it covers the largest cutout
of others. Glass and plastic windows are available, along with a cover lock. The standard enclosure carries a NEMA3 rating,
with an optional NEMA4X available.
OPTIONS
The instrument is available with a full compliment of options. Up to eight isolated universal inputs are available with each being
configurable to any of the available input types. Up to four isolated transmitter power supplies can be added. Up to four inputs
or derived variables can be assigned as "process variables", allowing up to four alarms for each. Alarms can be process high or
low, or rate rising or falling. The alarming capability is standard, but the hardware outputs are optional. Up to eight on/off
outputs are available, either relay or solid state relay driver outputs. Besides alarms, any of over eighty other digital values/
states can be used to actuate on/off outputs. Up to two non-isolated analog outputs or up to 4 isolated analog outputs are
available. Any of over twenty values can be used to drive analog outputs (i.e. inputs, derived variables, etc.) Other options
include PC based configuration software and a communications interface.
FIELD UPGRADES
All of items listed in the Options section are easily installed in the field. Typically it involves just adding boards, but possibly
PROMs may need to be changed as well. To add totalizers or the math package, only PROMS must be changed. If the four
color option was purchased, only PROMS need to be changed to expand trend capability, otherwise, a relative costly pen arm
assembly must be replaced as well.
Section 1
1-5
Edition 3
Rev G
INPUTS
Input Types
Thermocouple
RTD
Voltage DC
Current DC
Contact Closure
Impedance
RTD Excitation Current
Types J, K, T, R, S, E, B, N, G, D, C, Ni/Ni-Moly, and Platinel II.
Platinum 100, 2 or 3 wire
.00385 coefficient DIN 43760/IEC 751
.00392 coefficient USA
.00392 coefficient SAMA
Nickel 100, 2 or 3 wire
0 to 25mV, 0 to 100 mVDC, 0 to 1 VDC, 0 to 10 VDC
0 to 20mA, 4 to 20mA
Internal 50 ohm shunt resistor
Open/closed switch sensing without external voltages or resistors
25mV, 100mV, 1 Volt: > 10 meg ohms
10 Volt: > 50 K ohms
mA: 50 ohms
1 mA
INPUT PERFORMANCE
Measurement Error
Cold Junction Compensation Error
Cold Junction Compensation Rejection
Linearization Error
Ambient Temperature Error
Factory Calibration Error
Isolation
Common Mode Rejection
Normal Mode Rejection
Scan Rate
Edition 3
Rev G
± .025% of measurement span reference accuracy
± 0.2°C @ 25 degrees C
0.04°/degree C deviation from 25 degrees C
TCs: ± 0 .25°C typical, ± 0.5°C worst case with exceptions
RTDs: ± 0.1°C typical, ± 0.3°C worst case
± 0 .01% of span per degree C deviation from 25 degrees C
Refer to the Accuracy Table
500 VDC/350 VAC
120 dB min.
100 dB min. @ 60 Hz or greater
The input scan rate is programmable and dependant on the number of active
inputs present. The total scans per second for the instrument is 16 scans/
second, and the instrument can have up to 8 inputs configured.
1-6
Section 1
ACCURACY TABLES
2
LIN.
ACC'Y
°C
3
FACTORY
CAL
°C
4
REF+LIN
+CAL
°C
5
DEVIATION
ACC'Y
°C
6
RESOL
°C
1
REF
ACC'Y
°C
J
WIDE
0/1200
-200/0
0.43
0.63
0.20
0.08
0.32
0.56
0.95
1.28
0.12
0.02
0.066
0.097
J
NARROW
0/400
-200/0
0.11
0.16
0.05
0.08
0.33
0.56
0.50
0.80
0.04
0.02
0.017
0.024
K
WIDE
0/1370
-250/0
0.62
1.05
0.26
0.30
0.40
0.78
1.28
2.13
0.14
0.03
0.095
0.159
K
NARROW
0/500
-250/0
0.15
0.26
0.08
0.30
0.39
0.78
0.62
1.35
0.05
0.03
0.023
0.040
E
WIDE
0/1000
-250/0
0.33
0.66
0.19
0.42
0.28
0.62
0.80
1.71
0.10
0.03
0.050
0.101
E
NARROW
0/300
-250/0
0.09
0.17
0.19
0.42
0.29
0.62
0.57
1.21
0.03
0.03
0.014
0.025
N
WIDE
0/1300
-250/0
0.68
1.44
0.21
0.60
0.42
0.93
1.32
2.97
0.13
0.03
0.104
0.220
N
NARROW
0/600
-200/0
-250/-200
0.18
0.31
0.93
0.11
0.20
0.60
0.44
0.81
2.15
0.73
1.32
3.68
0.06
0.02
0.01
0.028
0.048
0.142
TC
TYPE
See Note:
RANGE
°C/bit
To achieve stated results, the following thermocouples must be used with the INPUT TYPE/RANGE set to TC NARROW
Section 1
G
1800/2300
800/1800
500/800
300/500
0/300
1.59
1.23
1.38
1.79
3.65
0.54
0.43
0.25
0.25
0.58
0.79
0.64
0.70
0.87
1.61
2.92
2.30
2.33
2.91
5.84
0.05
0.10
0.03
0.02
0.03
0.243
0.188
0.210
0.274
0.557
C
1800/2300
1200/1800
300/1200
0/300
2.14
1.62
1.33
1.54
0.54
0.43
0.28
0.12
1.01
0.80
0.68
0.77
3.68
2.85
2.29
2.43
0.05
0.06
0.09
0.03
0.326
0.247
0.202
0.235
D
1800/2300
300/1800
0/300
1.88
1.32
1.75
0.38
0.40
0.26
0.90
0.68
0.85
3.26
2.40
2.86
0.05
0.15
0.03
0.287
0.201
0.267
NNM
450/1370
0/450
0.44
0.56
0.33
0.13
0.33
0.37
1.10
1.06
0.09
0.05
0.067
0.085
Platinel II
1000/1400
500/1000
0/500
0.72
0.59
0.62
0.28
0.20
0.10
0.44
0.38
0.40
1.44
1.17
1.12
0.04
0.05
0.05
0.110
0.089
0.095
1-7
Edition 3
Rev G
ACCURACY TABLES CONT.
To achieve stated results, the following thermocouples must be used with the INPUT TYPE/RANGE set to TC NARROW
2
LIN.
ACC'Y
°C
3
FACTORY
CAL
°C
4
REF+LIN
+CAL
°C
5
DEVIATION
ACC'Y
°C
6
RESOL
°C
1
REF
ACC'Y
°C
T
0/400
-200/0
-250/-220
0.12
0.23
0.73
0.09
0.19
0.36
0.34
0.70
1.90
0.55
1.12
2.98
0.04
0.02
0.00
0.018
0.036
0.111
R
800/1700
200/800
0.43
0.58
0.19
0.25
0.83
1.08
1.45
1.90
0.09
0.06
0.065
0.088
S
250/1750
0.56
0.25
1.05
1.87
0.15
0.086
B
200/1800
0.74
0.31
1.34
2.39
0.16
0.113
2
LIN.
ACC'Y
°C
3
FACTORY
CAL
°C
4
REF+LIN
+CAL
°C
5
DEVIATION
ACC'Y
°C
6
RESOL
°C
1
REF
ACC'Y
°C
385
DIN
-160/480
-200/-160
0.16
0.14
0.03
0.20
0.13
0.12
0.33
0.46
0.06
0.00
0.025
0.022
392
USA
-100/450
0.16
0.03
0.13
0.32
0.05
0.025
392
SAMA
-200/560
0.29
0.13
0.24
0.66
0.06
0.044
100 ohm
Nickel
-40/200
0.09
0.05
0.07
0.21
0.02
0.013
TC
TYPE
RTD
TYPE
Edition 3
Rev G
See Note:
RANGE
See Note:
RANGE
1-8
°C/bit
°C/bit
Section 1
ACCURACY TABLES CONT.
3
FACTORY
CAL
uV
4
REF+LIN
+CAL
uV
5
DEVIATION
ACC'Y
uV
6
RESOL
mV
1
REF
ACC'Y
uV
10V
0/10000
2500
1000
3500
1000
381
1V
0/1000
250
100
350
100.0
38.1
100mV
0/100
25
20
45
10.0
3.81
25mV
0/25
6
20
26
2.5
0.954
See Note:
SPAN
3
FACTORY
CAL
uA
4
REF+CAL
uA
5
DEVIATION
ACC'Y
uA/°C
6
RESOL.
mA
1
REF.
ACC'Y
uA
4/20
0/20
5
5
2
2
7
7
2.0
2.0
0.763
0.763
INPUT
TYPE
INPUT
TYPE
mA
See Note:
SPAN
°C/bit
uA/bit
NOTES: The table attempts to show the effect of each significant factor which contributes to the overall measurement error. See the
enumerated items below for more specific explanations of each column of data.
1. Reference Acc'y based on 0.025% (250ppm) of input voltage span.
2. Linearization Acc'y is based on conformance to NIST Monograph 175 (based on the ITS-90) for letter-designated thermocouple types,
or other industry standards for non letter-designated type TCs and all RTDs.
3. Factory Cal is defined by limits of repeatability in a manufacturing environment per the table for zero and span calibrations, and ±
0.15°C for thermocouple cold junction calibrations.
4. The REF + LIN + CAL column represents the total "static" error allowed for an instrument as produced by the manufacturing process.
5. Deviation Acc'y is derived from a temperature coefficient of 0.01%/°C or ± 100ppm/°C expressed in units of the corresponding range.
6. Resolution on thermocouples and RTDs is derived as a function of the input voltage range and dV/dT.
Section 1
1-9
Edition 3
Rev G
OTHER INPUT SPECIFICATIONS
Processing
Value Cutoff
Sensor Fault Detection
Sensor Break
Transmitter Power Supplies
Square root and exponential functions for linear inputs
None, at value, to zero below value, to zero near zero
Sensor break on all TCs, RTDs, 1 volt, 1 to 5 volt, 4-20mA, and millivolt inputs
Sensor high and low on all inputs, 5% above or below range
Upscale or downscale
Up to four isolated 25mA @ 24VDC supplies available
RECORDING
Pen Type
Pen Colors
Chart Size
Chart Drive
Chart Rotation
Recorded Values
Recording Methods
Action on New Chart
Chart Messages
Disposable 4 pen fiber tip marker assembly
Red, green, blue, and black
10", 11", 12" (12" are 11.875" actual size)
DC stepper motor
6 to 9999 hours per revolution
Any of over 20 values can be trended/recorded
Drag pen simulation, instantaneous value, connect the values, average value,
connect the averages
Print scales, print range list, begin normal recording
Twelve
RECORDING PERFORMANCE
Chart Recording Accuracy
Chart Rotation Accuracy
0.3% of chart span reference accuracy
± 0.2 minutes for a 24 hour rotation, assuming all backlash removed
OPERATOR INTERFACE
Display
Status Indicators
Keypad
Display Formats
Display Modes
Operator Messages
Operator Inputs
Two line, 40 character vacuum fluorescent display with .21 inch (5 mm)
high characters
Eight user configurable, red LED status indicators
Fifteen keys for programming and unit operation
Three, refer to manual
Automatic or manual sequencing
Twelve
Twelve
ALARMS
Number
Type
Hysteresis
Up to four alarms for each of four process variables
Process high or low, rate rising or falling
Fully adjustable
ON/OFF OUTPUTS
On/Off Output Actuators
Relays
Solid State Relay Driver
Pulsed Outputs
Edition 3
Rev G
Any of over 100 digital values/states can be used to actuate on/off outputs
(e.g. alarms, time/dates, timers, etc.)
SPDT, contacts rated 5 amps resistive at 115 VAC,
2.5 amps resistive at 230 VAC - 1/8 HP at 230 VAC (single phase), 250 VA at 115/230 VAC.
Open collector output, can provide 40mA at 3 VDC or 20mA at 4VDC
Short circuit current is limited to 100 mA
50ms pulse when used with totalizer pulsed outputs
1-10
Section 1
CURRENT OUTPUTS
Drivers
Output Span
Resolution
Accuracy
Compliance
Any of over 20 values can be used to drive analog outputs (e.g. inputs, derived
variables, etc.)
0 to 20mA or 4 to 20mA, nominal
12 bits based on a 0 to 25.6mA span
± 0.1% of 20mA span reference accuracy
650 ohm load
TOTALIZERS
Number
Digits
Types
Presets
Pulsed Outputs
Four are included in the option
Nine, displayable with and without commas
Continuous, preload count down, and pulse counting
One per totalizer
Fully configurable
COMPUTING CAPABILITIES
Derived Variables
Math functions
Built-In Equations
Other Functions
Custom Curves
RH Calculation
Twelve
Add, subtract, multiply, divide, average, exponential, log 10, log e, power 10, power e
Linear, polynomial, C to F, F to C, linear mass flow, DP mass flow, BTU, RH, Fo, ZrO2.
High select, low select, high peak, low peak, track and hold, 1 of 2 selector,
convert actuator
Four 21 point curves, usable in multiple calculations
Typically accurate to better than 1%
Clamps calculated value @ -10% and +110%
LOGIC CAPABILITIES
Actuators
Derived Actuators
Logic Operators
Timers
Time/Date Combination Actuators
Over 100 digital values are accessible
Twenty four combinations of 24 items
NOT, OR, AND, parentheses
Four
Six
POWER REQUIREMENTS
Line Voltage
Power Consumption
Universal power supply, 85 min to 265 max. VAC 50/60Hz
60 VA maximum
CONSTRUCTION
Enclosure
NEMA Rating
Conduit Openings
Mounting
Overall Dimensions
Gasketed cover, case, and windows. Structural foam case and cover with
plastic or glass window areas. Door lock available.
NEMA 3 standard, NEMA 4X optional
Four openings standard, 2 additional as required
Panel, wall, or optional pipe mounting
14.12 inches wide x 16.77 inches high x 7.75 inches deep
(358.65mm wide x 425.96mm high x 196.85mm deep)
(CONTINUED ON NEXT PAGE)
Section 1
1-11
Edition 3
Rev G
CONSTRUCTION (cont.)
Panel Cutout
Panel Depth
Panel Protrusion
Weight
12.7 inches wide x 12.7 inches high
(322.58mm wide x 322.58mm high)
5.25 inches (133.35 mm)
2.5 inches (63.5mm)
25 lbs maximum
ENVIRONMENTAL AND OPERATING CONDITIONS
Operating Temperature
Storage Temperature
Humidity
Vibration
Mounting Position
Reference Conditions
0 to 50°C (32 to 122°F)
-40 to 65°C (-40 to 149°F)
10 to 90% RH, non-condensing
0.3 to 100 Hz @ 0.2g
Up to 30° forward or backward tilt from vertical
Up to 10° side tilt from vertical
25°C ± 2°C and 60% RH ± 5% RH
OTHER SPECIFICATIONS
Clock Accuracy
Battery Backup
Simulated Variables
1 minute/month typically, 4 minutes/month worst case
5 years minimum life, 10 years typically
Four function generators
DIGITAL COMMUNICATIONS
Type
Protocol
Network Control
Bit Rate
Parity
Address
RS-232C/RS-485 serial communications port. Half-duplex.
ModBus RTU
Can be configured as either the master or a slave
User configurable 1200, 2400, 4800, or 9600 bit per second
Odd, even or none
User configurable 1 to 247
GENERAL REFERENCE DATA
Data Backup
Warranty
EEPROM for input board calibration data
EEPROM for motherboard calibration data
Battery backed SRAM for configuration data
Two years
APPROVALS AND COMPLIANCE
Safety
Immunity/Susceptibility
Emissions
Hazardous Locations
UL Approved for USA - UL 1092, UL 916, and QUXY - File E67237
UL Certified for Canada - CSA Spec 142 - File E67237
CE - Complies with EN 50082-1
CE - Complies with EN 55011
ETL Listed Class I and II, Division 2 and Class III, Division 1 and 2,
Reference No. 5604?2
* ModBus is a trademark of MODICON, Inc.
Edition 3
Rev G
1-12
Section 1
1.5 WARRANTY AND RETURN STATEMENT
The products are sold by the factory under the warranties set forth in the following paragraphs. Such
warranties are extended only with respect to a purchase of these products, as new merchandise, directly
from the factory or from a factory distributor, representative or reseller, and are extended only to the first
buyer thereof who purchase them other than from the purpose of resale.
Warranty
These products are warranted to be free from functional defects in materials and workmanship at the
time the products leave the factory and to conform at that time to the specifications set forth in the
relevant factory instruction manual or manuals, sheet or sheets, for such products for a period of two
years.
THERE ARE NO EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES WHICH EXTEND BEYOND THE
WARRANTIES HEREIN AND ABOVE SET FORTH. ANDERSON MAKES NO WARRANTY OF
MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE WITH RESPECT TO THE
PRODUCTS.
Limitations
The factory shall not be liable for any incidental damages, consequential damages, special damages, or
any other damages, costs or expenses excepting only the cost or expense of repair or replacement as
describes above.
Products must be installed and maintained in accordance with the factory instructions. Users are responsible for the suitability of the products to their application. There is no warranty against damage resulting
from corrosion, misapplication, improper specifications or other operating condition beyond our control.
Claims against carriers for damage in transit must be filed by the buyer.
This warranty is void if the purchaser uses non-factory approved replacement parts and supplies or if the
purchaser attempts to repair the product themselves or through a third party without Anderson authorization.
Returns
The factory’s sole and exclusive obligation and buyer’s sole and exclusive remedy under the above
warranty is limited to repairing or replacing (at the factory’s option), free of charge, the products which
are reported in writing to the factory at its main office.
The factory is to be advised of return requests during normal business hours and such returns are to
include a statement of the observed deficiency. The buyer shall pre-pay shipping charges for products
returned and Anderson or its representatives shall pay for the return of the products to the buyer.
Section 1
1-13
Edition 2
Rev F
Section 2 - Installation and Wiring
Read these instructions carefully before proceeding with installation and operation. Electrical code requirements
and safety standards should be observed. Installation should be performed by qualified personnel.
2.1 MOUNTING (Panel and Surface described below, pipe - to be determined)
Figure 2-1A and 2-1B (below and page 2) shows an installation view and physical dimensions for a panel
mounted instrument. The panel where the instrument will be mounted must provide rigid support for the approximately 25 pound instrument. Adjacent instruments may be mounted within a minimum of 2 inches horizontally
and 1 inch vertically, providing that proper panel support is supplied.
Panel Mounting Hardware Required: (not provided with instrument)
(4) #10 flat head bolts with nuts
(4) lock washers
Panel Mounting
1. Cut panel opening to the dimensions illustrated in Figure 2-1A (below).
2. Pre-drill four 3/16 dia. holes for mounting or use the drill template molded into the case after inserting the
instrument into the panel.
3. Insert the instrument in the panel opening. Firmly fasten the instrument to the panel using the nuts, bolts and
lock washers.
Surface Mounting
Install the mounting brackets, ordered separately, on the vertical sides of instrument housing. Use the brackets to
fasten the instrument to the surface. Hardware recommended - #10-24 SCRs.
FIGURE 2-1A
(MIN. HORZ. SPACING)
6.156"
(156.36mm)
3/16" DIA.
(MIN. VERT. SPACING)
3.600"
(91.44mm)
14.180"
(360.17mm)
12.700"
(322.58mm)
10.000"
(254.00mm)
0.7"
(17.78mm)
12.700"
(322.58mm)
Section 2
2-1
Edition 3
Rev G
FIGURE 2-1B
g
2.12"
(53.85mm)
12.60"
(320.04mm)
17.04"
(432.82mm)
2.044"
(58.93mm)
5.24"
(133.10mm)
EC5
EC1
7.747"
(196.77mm)
EC6
EC2
EC3
EC4
12.600"
(320.04mm)
14.12"
(358.65mm)
Edition 3
Rev G
2-2
Section 2
2.2 PREPARATION FOR WIRING
This product is in conformity with the protection requirements of EU Council Directive 89/336EEC on the approximation of the laws of the Member States relating to electromagnetic compatibility. The factory cannot accept
responsibility for any failure to satisfy the protection requirements resulting from a non-recommended modification
of this product.
Electrical noise is a phenomenon typical of industrial environments. The following are guidelines that must be
followed to minimize the effect of noise upon any instrumentation.
Installation Considerations
Listed below are some of the common sources of electrical noise in the industrial environment:
• Ignition Transformers
• Arc Welders
• Mechanical contact relay(s)
• Solenoids
Before using any instrument near the devices listed, the instructions below should be followed:
1. If the instrument is to be mounted in the same panel as any of the listed devices, separate them by the largest
distance possible. For maximum electrical noise reduction, the noise generating devices should be mounted
in
a separate enclosure.
2. If possible, eliminate mechanical contact relay(s) and replace with solid state relays. If a mechanical relay
being powered by an instrument output device cannot be replaced, a solid state relay can be used to isolate
the instrument.
3. A separate isolation transformer to feed only instrumentation should be considered. The transformer can
isolate the instrument from noise found on the AC power input.
4. If the instrument is being installed on existing equipment, the wiring in the area should be checked to insure
that good practices have been followed.
AC Power Wiring
Earth Ground
The instrument includes noise suppressing components that require an earth ground connection to function. To
verify that a good earth ground is being attached, make a resistance check from the instrument chassis to the
nearest metal water pipe or proven earth ground. This reading should not exceed 100 ohms. Each instrument
should have a dedicated earth ground. Do not chain link multiple instrument ground wires.
Neutral (For 115 VAC)
It is good practice to assure that the AC neutral is at or near ground potential. To verify this, a voltmeter check
between neutral and ground should be performed. On the AC range, the reading should not be more than 50
millivolts. If it is greater than this amount, the secondary of the AC transformer supplying the instrument should
be checked by an electrician. A proper neutral will help ensure maximum performance from the instrument.
Wire Isolation/Segregation
The instrument is designed to promote proper separation of the wiring groups that connect to the instrument. The
AC power wire terminals are located near the bottom of the power supply board. The analog signal terminals are
located near the bottom of the instrument boards. Maintain this separation of the wires to insure the best protection from electrical noise. If the wires need to be run parallel with any other wiring type(s), maintain a minimum 6
inch space between the wires. If wires must cross each other, do so at 90 degrees to minimize the contact with
each other and reduce cross talk. Cross talk is due to the electro magnetic field induced by a wire as current
passes through it.
Section 2
2-3
Edition 3
Rev G
Use of Shielded Cable
Shielded cable helps eliminate electrical noise being induced on the wires. All analog signals should be run with
shielded cable. Connection lead length should be kept as short as possible, keeping the wires protected by the
shielding. The shield should be grounded at one end only. The preferred grounding location is at the sensor,
transmitter or transducer.
Noise Suppression at the Source
Usually, when good wiring practices are followed, no further noise protection is necessary. Sometimes in severe
electrical environments, the amount of noise is so great that it has to be suppressed at the source. Many manufacturers of relays, contactors, etc. supply "surge suppressors" which mount on the noise source.
For those devices that do not have surge suppressors supplied, RC (resistance capacitance) networks and/or
MOV (metal oxide varistors) may be added.
Inductive Coils - MOV's are recommended for transient suppression in inductive coils connected in parallel and as
close as possible to the coil. See Figure 2-2 (below). Additional protection may be provided by adding an RC
network across the MOV.
Contacts - Arcing may occur across contacts when the contact opens and closes. This results in electrical noise
as well as damage to the contacts. Connecting a RC network properly sized can eliminate this arc.
For circuits up to 3 amps, a combination of a 47 ohm resistor and a 0.1 microfarad capacitor (1000 volts) is
recommended. For circuits from 3 to 5 amps, connect 2 of these in parallel. See Figure 2-3 (below).
FIGURE 2-2
C
Inductive
Load
MOV
A.C.
0.5
mfd
1000V
220
ohms
115V 1/4W
230V 1W
R
FIGURE 2-3
MOV
A.C.
Edition 3
Rev G
C
R
2-4
Inductive
Load
Section 2
Sensor Placement (Thermocouple or RTD)
Thermocouple lead resistance should not exceed 300 ohms. If this is exceeded, instrument accuracy could be
affected.
Two wire RTD's should be used only with lead lengths less than 10 feet.
If the temperature probe is to be subjected to corrosive or abrasive conditions, it should be protected by the
appropriate thermowell. The probe should be positioned to reflect true process temperature:
In liquid media - the most agitated area
In air - the best circulated area
Section 2
2-5
Edition 3
Rev G
2.3 WIRING CONNECTIONS - INPUTS
All wiring connections are typically made to the instrument at the time of installation. Connections should be
made at the terminal blocks, one 14 gauge wire maximum, using copper conductors except for thermocouple
inputs. See Figure 2-4 (below) for the terminal block locations. The recommended torque for the AC Mains
connector on the power supply board is 113oz-ins and the recommended torque for all other connectors in the
unit is 85oz-ins.
FIGURE 2-4
TRANSMITTER POWER SUPPLY BOARD
COMMUNICATIONS BOARD
J3
J1
J4
MOTHER BOARD
J5
J6
POWER
SUPPLY
BOARD
Conn J7
2 HIGH
RELAY
BOARD
AC
MAINS
TB1
4 HIGH
INPUT
BOARD
TB1
2 HIGH
4-20
OUTPUT
BOARD
TB2
The instrument case may have numerous conduit openings, EC1 - EC6, depending upon the number of inputs
and outputs specified (EC5 and EC6 are not included on all models). To help minimize electrical noise that may
adversely affect the operation of the instrument, do not run input and/or 4-20mA output connections through the
same conduit entry as relay or power supply connections. See Figure 2-1B (page 2-2) for conduit opening
locations.
Edition 3
Rev G
2-6
Section 2
2.3.1 SHIPPED CONFIGURATION/JUMPER POSITIONING
Each instrument is factory shipped with all parameters set to default values. These defaults are shown in the
"display" box for each parameter in Section 4.
Jumpers are used to condition the sensor inputs. All jumpers are located on the Input Board(s). The instrument is
shipped from the factory with these jumpers configured as follows:
JU1
JU2
JU3
IF FITTED
UPSCALE BREAK
Non-Contact Closure Input
T/C, mV, 0/1V, Switch, mA
JU4
JU5
JU6
IF FITTED
UPSCALE BREAK
Non-Contact Closure Input
T/C, mV, 0/1V, Switch, mA
JU7
JU8
JU11
JU12
JU15
JU16
WIDE SPAN
WIDE SPAN
Non-RTD
Non-RTD
Non-mA
Non-mA
IF FITTED
IF FITTED
There are 2 additional jumpers per Input Board that are used for ID. These must be positioned as shown in Table
2-1 below as per their location inside the instrument. Board 1 is the bottom board.
TABLE 2-1 BOARD ID JUMPERS
Inputs
1, 3, 5, 7
Board Position
JU13
Inputs
2, 4, 6, 8
JU14
Board 1
Board 2
Board 3
Board 4
If any board is removed from the instrument in a multiple stack of boards, it MUST BE installed in the correct
sequence or these jumpers MUST BE moved. If not installed correctly, calibration will be affected.
2.3.2 SENSOR BREAK and OUT-OF-RANGE DETECTION
Sensor break and out-of-range conditions are determined and handled by the software. When either occurs, the
software will drive the input value to +99999 or -99999 based upon whether SENSOR BREAK is software configured for UPSCALE or DOWN SCALE in Input Configuration. Any outputs will react accordingly. Out-of-range is
defined as being more than 5% out of the span established by RANGE LIMIT LOW and RANGE LIMIT HIGH.
For 5 or 10 Volt and Current inputs, the analog signal goes to zero when there is a sensor break, due to voltage
divider or shunt resistors. For sensor break detection to work on these input types, the INPUT RANGE LOW
(analog signal low) and/or RANGE LIMIT LOW (engineering units low) parameters must be set high enough such
that at zero volts/mA, the resultant value will be at least 5% below the span established by RANGE LIMIT LOW
and RANGE LIMIT HIGH.
Section 2
2-7
Edition 3
Rev G
2.3.3 AC POWER CONNECTIONS
WARNING: UNIT SHOULD HAVE A POWER SWITCH OR CIRCUIT BREAKER IN CLOSE PROXIMITY OF
EQUIPMENT AND WITHIN EASY REACH OF THE OPERATOR. THE SWITCH SHALL BE MARKED AS THE
DISCONNECTING DEVICE FOR THE UNIT.
FIGURE 2-6
Connect the line voltage, hot and neutral, to L and N respectively. Connect the ground wire to the terminal
labeled G.
UNIVERSAL POWER SUPPLY
G
N
L
Edition 3
Rev G
~
~
2-8
Section 2
2.3.4 THERMOCOUPLE CONNECTIONS
NOTE: Up to four Input Boards may be present; stacked 4 high. Input Board 1 is the bottom board.
Two versions of Input Board s may be found, see Figure 2-7 and Figure 2-7A.
Input Board 1 is used for Input 1 and, if equipped, Input 2. Input Board 2 is used for Input 3 and Input 4, if
equipped. Input board 3 is for Input 5 and Input 6. Input Board 4 is for Input 7 and Input 8.
Connect the positive (+) leg of the thermocouple to terminal 1 and the negative (-) leg to terminal 2 on the Input
Board(s) to be T/C. Terminal block 1 (TB1) is for Input 1, 3, 5, and 7 and terminal block 2 (TB2) is for Input 2, 4, 6,
and 8.
NOTE: INPUT CONDITIONING JUMPERS MUST BE POSITIONED AS SHOWN FOR A T/C INPUT IN EITHER
FIGURE 2-7 OR 2-7A DEPENDING ON WHICH CIRCUIT BOARD IS FITTED. JUMPERS JU7/JU8 MAY BE
MOVED TO THE NARROW SPAN POSITION FOR BETTER RESOLUTION IF THE MAXIMUM TEMPERATURE DOES NOT EXCEED THE UPPER SPAN LIMIT AS SHOWN IN APPENDIX B, PAGE B-1, AND THE
THERMOCOUPLE BEING USED IS J, K, E, or N ONLY.
FIGURE 2-7
FIGURE 2-7A
INPUT 1, 3, 5, 7
JU7
INPUT 1, 3, 5, 7
JU7
INPUT 2, 4, 6, 8
JU8
INPUT
SPAN
NARROW
T, R, S, B
T/C
NARROW
T, R, S, B
T/C
WIDE
WIDE
NOT USED
NOT USED
JU15
INPUT 2, 4, 6, 8
JU8
INPUT
SPAN
JU16
JU7
JU7
JU3
JU4
JU1
JU6
JU8
JU8
JU6
JU3
JU11
JU2
JU5
TB1
+
1
U6
+ 1
JU12
JU2
JU5
JU15
JU16
TB1
TB2
+
1
U1
+ 1
TB2
NOTE: Terminal Block 1, Terminal 1 is on the RIGHT,
Terminal Block 2, Terminal 1 is on the LEFT.
Section 2
2-9
Edition 3
Rev G
2.3.5 RTD CONNECTIONS
Note: Up to four Input Boards may be present; stacked 4 high. Input Board 1 is the bottom board. Two
versions of Input Board s may be found, see Figure 2-8 and Figure 2-8A.
Input Board 1 is used for Input 1 and, if equipped, Input 2. Input Board 2 is used for Input 3 and Input 4, if
equipped. Input Board 3 is for Input 5 and Input 6. Input Board 4 is for Input 7 and Input 8.
Connect 2 wire RTD inputs to terminals 3 and 4 on the Input Board(s) to be RTD. Install a jumper between
terminals 2 and 3. Terminal block 1 (TB1) is Input 1, 3, 5 and 7 and terminal block 2 (TB2) is Input 2, 4, 6, and 8.
Connect 3 wire RTD inputs to terminals 2, 3 and 4 (common legs on terminals 2 and 3) on the Input Board(s) to
be RTD. Terminal block 1 (TB1) is Input 1, 3, 5, and 7 and terminal block 2 (TB2) is Input 2, 4, 6, and 8.
NOTE: INPUT CONDITIONING JUMPERS MUST BE POSITIONED AS SHOWN FOR AN RTD INPUT IN
EITHER FIGURE 2-8 OR 2-8A DEPENDING ON WHICH CIRCUIT BOARD IS FITTED.
FIGURE 2-8
FIGURE 2-8A
JU15
JU16
JU7
JU7
JU3
JU4
JU1
JU6
JU8
JU8
JU6
JU3
JU11
JU2
JU5
-
+
1
TB1
U6
+ 1
JU12
JU2
JU5
JU15
JU16
TB1
TB2
+
1
U1
+ 1
TB2
3 WIRE RTD
JU15
JU7
JU11
JU3
JU4
JU1
JU2
JU6
JU5
TB1
JU16
+
1
U6
+ 1
JU8
JU12
TB2
JUMPER
(Customer Supplied)
2 WIRE RTD
NOTE: Terminal Block 1, Terminal 1 is on the RIGHT,
Terminal Block 2, Terminal 1 is on the LEFT.
Edition 3
Rev G
2-10
Section 2
2.3.6 VOLTAGE CONNECTIONS
Note: Up to four Input Boards may be present; stacked 4 high. Input Board 1 is the bottom board. Two
versions of Input Board s may be found, see Figure 2-9 and Figure 2-9A.
Input Board 1 is used for Input 1 and, if equipped, Input 2. Input Board 2 is used for Input 3 and Input 4, if
equipped. Input Board 3 is for Input 5 and Input 6. Input Board 4 is for Input 7 and Input 8.
Connect positive (+) leg to terminal 1 and negative (-) leg to terminal 2 on the Input Board(s) to be volt input.
Terminal block 1 (TB1) is Input 1, 3,5 and 7 and terminal block 2 (TB2) is Input 2, 4, 6, and 8.
NOTE: INPUT CONDITIONING JUMPERS MUST BE POSITIONED AS SHOWN FOR VOLT INPUT IN EITHER
FIGURE 2-8 OR 2-8A DEPENDING ON WHICH CIRCUIT BOARD IS FITTED. ALSO NOTE: THERE IS NO
SENSOR BREAK DETECTION FOR ZERO BASED VOLT INPUTS. EXAMPLE: 0-5V.
FIGURE 2-9
FIGURE 2-9A
JU3
JU6
JU3
JU6
0/10V
0/5V
0/10V
0/5V
0/10V
0/5V
0/10V
0/5V
0/1V &mV
0/1V &mV
0/1V &mV
0/1V &mV
INPUT 1, 3, 5, 7
JU7
INPUT 1, 3, 5, 7
JU7
INPUT 2, 4, 6, 8
JU8
INPUT
SPAN
INPUT
SPAN
NARROW
0/25 mV
NARROW
0/25 mV
WIDE
0/100mV
WIDE
0/100mV
LOW
VOLT
LOW
VOLT
JU15
INPUT 2, 4, 6, 8
JU8
JU16
JU7
JU7
JU3
JU4 JU6
JU1
JU8
JU8
JU6
JU3
JU11
JU2
JU5
TB1
+
1
U6
+ 1
JU12
JU2
JU5
JU15
JU16
-
TB2
TB1
+
1
U1
+ 1
TB2
NOTE: Terminal Block 1, Terminal 1 is on the RIGHT,
Terminal Block 2, Terminal 1 is on the LEFT.
Section 2
2-11
Edition 3
Rev G
2.3.7 CURRENT CONNECTIONS
Note: Up to four Input Boards may be present; stacked 4 high. Input Board 1 is the bottom board. Two
versions of Input Board s may be found, see Figure 2-10 and Figure 2-10A.
Input Board 1 is used for Input 1 and, if equipped, Input 2. Input Board 2 is used for Input 3 and Input 4, if
equipped. Input Board 3 is for Input 5 and Input 6. Input Board 4 is for Input 7 and Input 8.
Connect positive (+) leg to terminal 1 and connect negative (-) leg to terminal 2 on the Input Board(s) to be
current input. Terminal block 1 (TB1) is Input 1, 3, 5, and 7 and terminal block 2 (TB2) is Input 2, 4, 6, and 8.
Installation of an appropriate shunt resistor is NOT REQUIRED. Positioning JU15/16 properly connects the
appropriate shunt resistor that is populated on the Input Board.
NOTE: INPUT CONDITIONING JUMPERS MUST BE POSITIONED AS SHOWN FOR CURRENT INPUT IN
EITHER FIGURE 2-8 OR 2-8A DEPENDING ON WHICH CIRCUIT BOARD IS FITTED. ALSO NOTE: THERE
IS NO SENSOR BREAK DETECTION FOR ZERO BASED CURRENT INPUTS. EXAMPLE: 0-20MA.
FIGURE 2-10
FIGURE 2-10A
JU16
JU15
JU7
JU7
JU3
JU4
JU1
JU6
JU8
JU8
JU6
JU3
JU11
JU2
JU5
TB1
+
1
U6
+ 1
JU12
JU2
JU5
JU15
JU16
TB1
TB2
+
1
U1
+ 1
TB2
NOTE: Terminal Block 1, Terminal 1 is on the RIGHT,
Terminal Block 2, Terminal 1 is on the LEFT.
Edition 3
Rev G
2-12
Section 2
2.3.8 SWITCH INPUT CONNECTIONS
Note: Up to four Input Boards may be present; stacked 4 high. Input Board 1 is the bottom board. Two
versions of Input Board s may be found, see Figure 2-10 and Figure 2-10A.
Input Board 1 is used for Input 1 and, if equipped, Input 2. Input Board 2 is used for Input 3 and Input 4, if
equipped. Input Board 3 is for Input 5 and Input 6. Input Board 4 is for Input 7 and Input 8.
Connect one leg to terminal 1 and connect the other leg to terminal 2 on the Input Board(s) to be switch input.
Terminal block 1 (TB1) is Input 1, 3, 5, and 7 and terminal block 2 (TB2) is Input 2, 4, 6, and 8.
NOTE: INPUT CONDITIONING JUMPERS MUST BE POSITIONED AS SHOWN FOR SWITCH INPUT IN
EITHER FIGURE 2-8 OR 2-8A DEPENDING ON WHICH CIRCUIT BOARD IS FITTED.
FIGURE 2-11
FIGURE 2-11A
JU15
JU16
JU7
JU7
JU3
JU4
JU1
JU6
JU8
JU8
JU6
JU3
JU11
JU2
JU5
JU2
JU12
JU5
JU16
JU15
TB1
+
1
U6
+ 1
TB1
TB2
+
1
U1
+ 1
TB2
NOTE: Terminal Block 1, Terminal 1 is on the RIGHT,
Terminal Block 2, Terminal 1 is on the LEFT.
Section 2
2-13
Edition 3
Rev G
2.4 WIRING CONNECTIONS - OUTPUTS
Relay output(s), if provided, may be assigned to any actuator, which includes alarms and/or optional control
capability. Current output(s), if provided, may be assigned to any analog value, which includes derived and
process values for retransmission or control. Assignment of the function is accomplished in Configuration.
2.4.1 SPDT RELAY OUTPUT
Note: Up to two Boards may be present; stacked 2 high. Board 1 is the bottom board.
SPDT and/or SSR driver outputs is/are designated as Relay 1 through Relay 8. Relay 1 through Relay 4 are
located on Board 1 and Relay 5 through Relay 8 (if provided) are located on Board 2. See Figure 2-4, page 2-6.
Connections are made as shown. Terminal connections are made using TB1 thru TB4, Relay 1 thru Relay 4
respectively.
FIGURE 2-12
TB1
TB2
TB3
TB4
N N
C
O C
LOAD
P
O
W
E
R
2.4.2 SSR DRIVER OUTPUT
Note: Up to two Boards may be present; stacked 2 high. Board 1 is the bottom board.
Connections are made as shown. Terminal connections are made using TB1 thru TB4, Relay 1 thru Relay 4
respectively.
FIGURE 2-13
TB1
1
+ -
TB2
TB3
TB4
SSR
+
Edition 3
Rev G
2-14
Section 2
2.4.3 CURRENT OUTPUT
Note: Up to two boards may be present, stacked 2 high. Board 1 is the bottom board. Non-isolated and
isolated outputs are available.
Non-isolated
Non-isolated current outputs are designated as current output 1 through current output 2. Current output 1 is
located on Board 1 and Current Output 2 is located on Board 2.
Connections are made as shown. Terminal connections are made using TB1, terminal 1 is positive and terminal 2
is negative.
FIGURE 2-14
TB1
1
+
2
-
LOAD
-
+
Isolated
Isolated current outputs are designated current output 1 through current output 4. Current output 1, and if specified, current output 2, are located on board 1. Current outputs 3 and 4, if specified, are located on board 2.
Connections are made as shown. Terminal connections are made using TB1 (output 1 and 3), terminal 1 is
positive and terminal 2 is negative, and TB2 (output 2 and 4), terminal 1 is positive and terminal 2 is negative.
FIGURE 2-14B
TB1
1
+
Load
+
Section 2
TB2
2
-
1
+
-
2
-
Load
+
2-15
-
Edition 3
Rev G
2.4.4 24VDC TRANSMITTER POWER SUPPLY
Note: Up to four transmitter power supplies may be present. One transmitter can provide up to 25mA of
current at 24 VDC.
Transmitter outputs are designated as Transmitter Output 1 through Transmitter Output 4. Transmitter Output 1 is
at TB1, Transmitter Output 2 is at TB2, Transmitter Output 3 is at TB3 and Transmitter Output 4 is at TB4.
If an isolated 24 VDC regulated transmitter power supply has been specified, the connections should be made as
shown.
FIGURE 2-15A
TBX
INPUT
1
+
2
2
-
-
+
1
+
2 Wire
Transmitter
-
2.4.5 COMMUNICATIONS
The connections should be made as shown: Terminal block TB1 is used for RS-232 (Figure 2-15B) and terminal
block TB3 is used for RS-485 (Figure 2-15c). Jumpers JP1 and JP3 must be positioned as shown.
FIGURE 2-15B
RS-232
TB1
JP1
JP3
Rx Tx Grnd
Edition 3
Rev G
2-16
Section 2
FIGURE 2-15C
RS-485
TB3
B
JP1
A
JP3
Network
Continuation
(If Applicable)
Towards
Computer
Section 2
2-17
Edition 3
Rev G
Section 3 - The Basics of Recorder Operation
3.1 POWER-UP
After proper installation, the following will occur when power is applied:
• All segments in the vacuum fluorescent display will light, then
• All the display LEDs will light, then
• The instrument tag and the current time and date will appear.
When completed, the instrument begins normal display mode as configured in Display Programming and configuration.
3.2 INSTRUMENT MODES
The instrument incorporates a multilevel prompting scheme. The Display, Chart and Scroll keys are used to gain
access to each of the three prompting sections of the unit. When the instrument is not in one of the prompt
sections, it is considered to be in the Normal Display mode.
3.2.1 NORMAL DISPLAY
The Normal Display is the normal operator mode for the recorder and display. In Normal Display, the instrument
can provide various displays of Instrument Tag/Time/Date, Input Values, Derived Values, Process Values, and
other values that may be added to the Display Sequence in Configuration. In Normal Display the instrument may
be in Sequential (automatic advance) or Continuous (manual advance) display mode.
3.2.2 DISPLAY PROMPTS
The Display Prompts provides access to all display related configuration functions and operator inputs. The
Display Prompts section contains only one level.
3.2.3 CHART PROMPTS
The Chart Prompts provides access to all chart related configuration functions and also the prompts for changing
the chart.
The Chart Prompts section contains two levels. With CHART CONFIGURATION displayed, the Down Arrow key
will access that section of prompts, which will be one level down. While in CHART CONFIGURATION, the Scroll
and Left Arrow keys will move through the parameter choices, and the Up Arrow key will return to the previous
level, which will be one level up.
3.2.4 SYSTEM PROMPTS
The Select System Prompts provides access to alarm settings, enables/passwords, configuration/setup, test,
calibration, etc.
The System Prompts section contains up to two levels. For example, with CONFIGURATION displayed, the
Down Arrow key will access the next level of prompts, where INPUTS can be selected. With INPUTS displayed,
the Down Arrow key will access the next level of prompts, where the input parameters can be accessed. Pressing
the Up Arrow key would return to the previous level, INPUTS, and pressing the Up Arrow key again would return
to the previous level, CONFIGURATION, and pressing the UP Arrow key again would return to the Normal Display
mode.
Section 3
3-1
Edition 3
Rev G
3.3 KEYPAD FUNCTION
FIGURE 3-1
1
2
3
4
5
7
6
8
3.3.1 DISPLAY KEY (DISP)
While in Normal Display, the Display key initiates the Display Prompts and is used to step through the Display
Prompts.
3.3.2 CHART KEY (CHART)
While in Normal Display, the Chart key initiates the Chart Prompts and is used to step through the Chart Prompts.
3.3.3 SCROLL KEY
While in Normal Display, the Scroll key initiates the System Prompts. While in any prompt section, the Scroll key
advances through the choices of other prompt sections or parameters and settings, at the current level. The
Scroll key is also used to move the cursor to the right while in Modify.
3.3.4 ARROW KEYS
• While in Normal Display with the Sequential Display active, the arrow keys will cause no action.
• While in Normal Display with the Continuous Display active, the Up or Down Arrow keys will step backward or
forward through items in the Display Sequence.
• While in any prompt section the Left Arrow and Scroll keys will step backward and forward through the
selections at that level. The selections wrap around at the ends. The Down Arrow key steps down (or forward)
one level. The Up Arrow key steps up (or backward) one level. If the prompting is at the top (or first) level, the
Up Arrow key will return the unit to Normal Display.
• The Arrow keys repeat, when held down, every half second after the first second.
• The unit remembers the path taken through the System and Display prompts. That is, by returning to Normal
Display by successive depressions of the Up Arrow key, the operator can return to the same point by entering
the corresponding prompts section and successive depressions of the Down Arrow key.
3.3.5 RESET KEY (RESET - special key located on lower left)
While in a prompt section, the Reset key returns the unit to Normal Display and resets the path pointers to the
initial conditions.
3.3.6 ESCAPE KEY (ESC), MODIFY KEY (MOD), ENTER KEY (ENTER)
• While a modifiable parameter description and its setting are displayed, pressing the MOD key places the unit in
Modify where the setting can be modified or changed.
• Pressing the ESC key will exit Modify and the original value will be displayed, no change being made to it.
• Pressing the ENTER key will exit Modify and the new value will be displayed and entered into memory.
3.3.7 SPECIAL KEYS (five keys located below the display)
While in the Multiple Choice Selection, the Special keys are used to select 1 of up to 5 choices from a choice line
displayed directly above each key.
Edition 3
Rev G
3-2
Section 3
3.4 CHANGING PARAMETER SETTINGS - MODIFY
There are three types of parameters in the instrument: values (numbers), text strings (groups of characters), and
choices (selections made by picking one of a group of displayed descriptions).
With a modifiable parameter description and its setting displayed, pressing the MOD key places the unit in
Modify where the setting can be modified.
3.4.1 CHANGING VALUES
If the setting is a value (number), the cursor will be positioned on the right-most digit. The LEFT ARROW and
SCROLL keys will move the cursor left or right. The UP and DOWN keys will increment or decrement the value
with rollover and rollunder through all digits to the left of the cursor. Pressing the ESC key exits Modify, no
change being made to the original value. Pressing the ENTER key exits Modify and the new value will be
displayed and entered into memory.
3.4.2 CHANGING TEXT
There are two ways to change or modify text. The first, Character Modify, is accessed by the initial pressing of
the MOD key, and the second, Character Selection, is accessed by pressing the MOD key while being in the
Character Modify mode. Each has its benefits, and you may prefer to use one or both methods, depending on
the modification to be made. Pressing the RESET key after pressing the MOD key will clear all characters from
the curser to the right.
• If the setting is text ( e.g. units, tag, etc.), the text will be left justified and the cursor will be positioned on the
left-most character. The LEFT ARROW and SCROLL keys will move the cursor left or right.
• In Character Modify, the UP and DOWN ARROW keys change the character by scrolling through a list or string
of available characters. The LEFT ARROW and SCROLL keys will move the cursor left and right to allow changing another character. Pressing the MOD key enters Character Selection. Pressing the ESC key exits Modify, no
change being made to the string. Pressing the ENTER key exits Modify and the new string will be displayed and
entered into memory.
• In Character Selection, depressing the MOD key twice will initiate Character Selection. The character to be
changed (on the lower line) will be replaced by the "block" character (all dots lit), and the upper display line will
show a character selection line, instead of the parameter description. The character selection line which contains
the current character will be displayed with the cursor positioned on the current character. The LEFT ARROW
and SCROLL keys will move the cursor left and right on the current character selection line. The UP and DOWN
ARROW keys will change the line of characters displayed for selection. Once the cursor is positioned on the
desired character, pressing the MOD key will store the desired character in the lower line, the "block" character
will move to the next position on the second line, and the character selection line which contains the next character will be displayed with the cursor positioned on that character.
• While in Character Selection, pressing the ESC key exits Character Selection and returns the unit to Character
Modify where selection of another character may be made or pressing the ESC key again exits Modify.
• While in Character Selection, pressing the ENTER key after modifying a character will exit Character Selection
and the new string will be displayed and entered into memory.
3.4.3 CHANGING CHOICES
• If the setting is a YES/NO choice, the YES/NO choice line will be displayed and the current choice will blink.
The LEFT ARROW and SCROLL keys will switch the selection between YES and NO. Selecting the choice and
pressing ENTER will exit Modify and the new setting will be displayed and entered into memory. Some YES/NO
parameter choices are initialized to NO. When changed to YES, the unit may automatically advance to the next
parameter upon depression of the ENTER key.
(Continued on next page)
Section 3
3-3
Edition 3
Rev G
• If the setting is one of a list of choices, the choice line containing the current choice will be displayed and the
current choice will blink. If multiple choices are displayed, the LEFT ARROW or SCROLL keys will move the
selection to the left or right. If all choices are not displayed at once, due to multiple choice lines, the UP ARROW
key will step backward to the previous choice line, or the DOWN ARROW key will step forward to the next choice
line. Pressing the ESC key will exit Modify and the original setting will be displayed, no change being made to it.
Pressing the ENTER key will exit Modify and the new setting will be displayed and entered into memory.
• A choice line may offer 1 through 5 choices. Pressing the Special key located directly below the desired choice,
will select and enter that choice into memory.
3.4.4 COPY/INITIALIZE
A COPY/INITIALIZE capability is available with some parameter sections. If COPY is selected, the unit automatically goes into Modify on its associated value and uses its associated number as an index and copies data from
one set of elements into the current set of elements. If the associated number is set to zero, the factory default
values are stored into the selected set of elements (INITIALIZE). The COPY function applies to all parameter
entries following it until the next non-parameter entry.
3.4.5 PASSWORDS
Where PASSWORDS apply, they are not displayed if the current value of the password is zero. If PASSWORDS
are not zero, and the value is set to the correct password, the unit automatically proceeds to the next parameter
entry. If PASSWORDS are not zero, and the value is set to the incorrect password, the message "INVALID
PASSWORD" will appear in the upper display.
3.4.6 ENABLES
If Chart Prompts is DISABLED, when the CHART key is pressed, the message "CHART KEY DISABLED" will
appear in the lower display. If Display Prompts is DISABLED, when the DISP key is pressed, "DISPLAY KEY
DISABLED" will appear in the lower display. If other parameters are DISABLED, their corresponding prompts will
not be displayed.
3.5 THE DISPLAY
During normal operation, the display shows data according to the setup determined by the settings in Display and
Configuration prompts.
The display has 2 lines of 20 characters with 8 status indicators.
The display may be configured as continuous or sequential, as well as 1 value at a time, 2 values at a time, or 4
PVs at a time. Refer to Section 3.7 for details.
3.6 GENERAL
After completing installation and wiring of the instrument, the configuration procedures must be performed to
prepare the instrument for operation on the intended application. The procedures include selecting specific
prompts/parameters, entering data and possible jumper positioning. Once properly configured the instrument will
retain the selections in memory. Not all selections are applicable for every recorder.
Note: Before configuring, it is recommended that the Software Reference/Record Sheets (found at the
end of this section) be completely filled in.
Parameter selections and data entry are made via the keypad. To ease configuration and operation, user entered
data has been divided up into three sections referred to as Main Prompts. The three are: System, Display, and
Chart. Each prompt contains different type of data; chart for the chart, Display for the Display, and System, as
follows:
CONFIGURATION--ACTION TIME SETTINGS--ALARM SETTINGS--ENABLES/PASSWORDS--TEST-CALIBRATION--MODEL/REV
Edition 3
Rev G
3-4
Section 3
ACTION TIME
SETTINGS
Selections made in action time settings are used to generate actuators that are true/false
based on times and/or dates.
ALARM SETTING
Selections made in alarm settings determine the setpoint of each alarm configured.
ENABLES/
PASSWORDS
Selections made in enables/passwords provide means of enabling or disabling certain
prompts or selections AND provides additional security with the use of 6 digit passwords
restricting access to Chart, Display, Enables/Passwords and MAIN Prompts
selections.
CONFIGURATION
Selections made in configuration set up the instrument for proper operation.
TEST
Routines used to test the relays and chart.
CALIBRATION
Routines used to calibrate the instrument.
MODEL/REV
Deciphered to determine whether certain prompts or sections are shown/displayed and
revision of the software.
3.7 DISPLAY DETAILS
The instrument will spend most of the time in Normal Display. When in Normal Display, it can provide various
displays of instrument tag, input values, simulated values, derived values, process values, and other values that
may be added to the Display Sequence in Configuration, or it may display active operator messages. In Normal
Display, the instrument can also be in one of two conditions, Sequential or Continuous Display.
The display provides upper case letters only, with a few exceptions for engineering units.
The following is the format for the instrument tag and times and dates:
tag
hh:mm aa bb/cc/yy
hh - hours
mm - minutes
aa - AM or PM if not 24 hour
bb - month if MM:DD:YY format
day if DD:MM:YY format
cc - day if MM:DD:YY format
month if DD:MM:YY format
yy - year
- global alarm indicator
or for the third date format
tag
hh:mm aa dd mmm yy
dd - day
mmm - month in 3 character format
For Instrument tag, the "tag" is the INSTRUMENT TAG from the INSTRUMENT SETTINGS prompts section, and
for ACTION TIME SETTINGS, the "tag" is TIME 1 TAG or TIME 2 TAG from the ACTION TIME SETTINGS
prompts section.
(Continued on next page)
Section 3
3-5
Edition 3
Rev G
The following is the "1 VAL" at a time display format for process variables:
display tag
aaaannnnnn uuuuuu
aaaa - individual alarm indicators:
H = High Process Alarm
L = Low Process Alarm
R = Rate Alarm
nnnnnn - represents a number, with up to as many digits as n's shown
uuuuuu - represents the corresponding units, with up to as many characters as
u's shown
The same format applies for input, simulated, and derived variables, except that aaaa does not apply.
The following is the "2 VALS" at a time display format for process variables:
paaaannnnnn uuuuuu
paaaannnnnn uuuuuu
p - Process Variable Number
The following is the "2 VALS" at a time display format for other variables:
IVm nnnnnn uuuuuu
IVm nnnnnn uuuuuu
m - Input Variable Number
SVm nnnnnn uuuuuu
SVm nnnnnn uuuuuu
m - Simulated Variable Number
DVmm nnnnnn uuuuuu
DVmm nnnnnn uuuuuu
mm - Derived Variable Number
The following is the "4 PVS" at a time display format for process variables:
pannnnuuu pannnnuuu
pannnnuuu pannnnuuu
p - Process Variable Number
a - Highest Priority Active Alarm
When "4 PVS" at a time is selected, all variables except PVs will be displayed using their respective "2 VALS" at a
time format.
The following is the "1 VAL" at a time display format for totals:
display tag
w
nnnnnnnnnnn uuuuuu
w - Preset Indicator
P - Preset Reached
To maintain a consistant value and units placement, the following is the "2 VAL" at a time display format for totals:
display tag
w
nnnnnnnnnnn uuuuuu
w - Preset Indicator
P - Preset Reached
The number may or may not contain commas, depending on the number format selected for total values.
Operator Messages are displayed as their configured two line message, regardless of the format selected.
For contact closure inputs, the nnnnnn field will contain the text corresponding to the current state.
Edition 3
Rev G
3-6
Section 3
Whenever the display format is other than "1 VAL" at a time, the different types are not intermixed in any given
display step, consequently the second line may be blank.
SEQUENTIAL DISPLAY
With Sequential Display active, the instrument provides a sequential display of all input, simulated, derived, and
process values that have their Display Option set to "IN SEQUENTIAL MODE" or "IN BOTH MODES". The rate
of sequencing is programmable from 1 to 8 seconds.
CONTINUOUS DISPLAY
With Continuous Display active, the instrument continuously displays a single step of the Display Sequence for all
input, simulated, derived, and process values that have their Display Option set to "IN CONTINUOUS MODE" or
"IN BOTH MODES". The UP and DOWN keys will step backward or forward through the list.
3.8 CHART DETAILS
The CHART TYPE is user selectable from one of three choices:
1. RINGS/LINES/SCALES preprinted
Rings - concentric rings
Lines - time lines
Scales - scale numbers
2. RINGS AND TIME LINES preprinted
3. RINGS ONLY preprinted
The RECORDING METHOD choices, user selectable per pen are as follows, using a 24 hour rotation for example, with spokes recorded every 24 seconds.
1. INSTANTANEOUS VALUES - records the instantaneous value at 24 second intervals.
2. CONNECT THE VALUES - records the instantaneous value at 24 second intervals, but includes dots
between successive values.
3. DRAG - MIN TO MAX - records the minimum and maximum values during the 24 second interval and
includes dots between the values.
4. AVERAGE VALUES - records the average of the values during the 24 second interval.
5. CONNECT THE AVERAGES - records the average of the values during the 24 second interval, but
includes dots between successive averages.
Major time lines are printed as a series of dots, with noticeable spacing, and extend from the inner chart ring to
the outer chart ring. The number of major time lines printed on the chart is determined by the MAJOR TIME
PERIODS parameter in the CHART CONFIGURATION prompts section. The color of the major time line is
programmable.
Scale lines are printed as a series of dots, closely spaced to form a solid line, and are printed only in the area of
the chart (zone or portion of chart span) used for the respective trend line. The scale lines are printed on top of
major time lines. The number of scale lines printed on the chart is determined by the MAJOR TIME PERIODS
parameter, the number of BLANK MAJOR TIME PERIODS, and the number of trend lines being recorded. The
color of the scale line is the same as the respective trend line.
Minor time lines are printed as a series of dots, with spacing greater than major time lines and extend from the
inner chart ring to the outer chart ring. The number of minor time lines printed on the chart between the major
time lines is determined by the MINOR TIME PERIODS parameter in the CHART CONFIGURATION prompts
section and is one less than the number of periods selected.
Section 3
3-7
Edition 3
Rev G
Trends can be zoned into two different areas to allow for higher resolution on one end of the recorded span. The
recorded area used on the chart for a trend may not necessarily use the entire area available for recording.
Engineering unit values are printed next to the corresponding scale lines. The ZONE 1 LOW DIVISION parameter in RECORDERS section of CONFIGURATION specifies the position on the chart corresponding to the
bottom of zone 1 and the ZONE 1 HIGH DIVISION parameter specifies the position on the chart corresponding to
the top of zone 1 (and the bottom of zone 2 if zone 2 is used). The ZONE 2 HIGH DIVISION parameter specifies
the position on the chart corresponding to the top of zone 2, with zero specifying that zone 2 is not used.
The SPAN 1 LOW parameter specifies the value corresponding to the bottom of zone 1 and SPAN 1 HIGH
parameter specifies the value corresponding to the top of zone 1 and bottom of zone 2 (if used). The SPAN 2
HIGH parameter specifies the value corresponding to the top of zone 2. If the zone 2 parameter is zero, zone 2
is inactive or not used.
The DIVISION parameters specify location relative to the CHART DIVISIONS parameter (or number of chart
rings), which corresponds to the usable recording span of the chart.
The SCALE INTERVAL parameters specify the number of divisions between printed scale values. The values
printed are calculated by the instrument. If the SCALE INTERVAL parameter is zero, no scale is printed, but the
recorder tag will be printed.
Values corresponding to the bottom of the recordable area are located slightly upscale so that they are printable.
Values corresponding to the top of the recordable area are located slightly downscale so that they do not interfere
with the time and date. All other values are centered vertically on the corresponding concentric circle.
The UNITS that are configured for display are printed next to the outermost scale value.
The RECORDER TAG for each recorded trend is printed underneath the outermost scale value.
The CHART TAG, time, and date are printed just beyond the recording area, at successive major time lines as
follows:
On 10" and 12" Charts:
CHART TAG
TIME
DATE
TIME
On 11" Charts:
CHART TAG
TIME
CHART TAG
TIME
DATE
TIME
DATE
TIME
The color of the scale line, scale values, units, and recorder tag always correspond to the trend for which they
apply.
The color of the major time lines, minor time lines, time, and date/chart tag are each programmable.
3.8.1 CHART PRINTING INTERRUPTIONS
When chart printing is interrupted momentarily, the printing resumes as though no interruption had occurred.
If the interruption lasts beyond the point at which data should have been printed, the chart will advance to the
appropriate point, printing minor and major time lines as needed, and resume trending.
If the interruption lasts long enough such that no data would be printed between successive major time divisions,
the divisions will not be printed.
When power is restored, the chart is marked with an arrow (" ê") to indicate the point of power interuption.
Edition 3
Rev G
3-8
Section 3
3.8.2 NEW CHART PRINTING REQUIREMENTS
The following ACTION ON NEW CHART options are provided:
NONE - JUST CONTINUE
PRINT RANGE LIST
PRINT SCALES
The following example illustrates the format used if PRINT RANGE LIST has been configured. This method
would be selected to reduce the time between chart installation and initial trend recording. This Range List
corresponds to the example found at the end of this section.
Line
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Print
FLOW #1
0/400 GPM
TEMP #1
20/120 *F NL
PH #1
0/14 PH NL
ALARM #1
0/1 NL
Description
Recorder Tag
Span, Units
Recorder Tag
Span, Units
Recorder Tag
Span, Units
Recorder Tag
Span, Units
Color
Black
Black
Blue
Blue
Green
Green
Red
Red
If the scale is other than a simple 0 to 100% of chart with one zone, "NL" will follow the units to indicate non
linear.
If PRINT SCALES has been configured, the instrument will proceed to print, as needed per the chart format, time
lines, scale lines, scale values, units and recorder tag for each recording pen which is configured. The time, date,
and chart tag will not be printed during this process. The chart will be advanced to the correct position for the
next time line after the completion of printing for each recording pen.
Upon completion of PRINT RANGE LIST or PRINT SCALES, if configured, the instrument is ready to begin
trending. Trending will not begin if the instrument status has been set to OFF or the chart has been stopped.
When the instrument first begins trending after a new chart has been installed, it will print, as needed per the
chart format, time lines, scale lines, scale values, units, and recorder tag for each recording pen until it reaches
the position corresponding to the current time. If the instrument status has not been set to off and the chart
has not been stopped by other than the chart being full, historical trend data will also be included. The
time, date, and chart tag will be printed during this process. At this point, the instrument will begin the normal
recording process and marks the chart on the outer ring with an arrow(" ¨") to indicate where the trend began.
3.8.3 EXAMPLE CHART
Figure 3-2 (page 3-12) illustrates the typical data presentation for a 12" chart. The "recorder" trends are referred
to by number in this illustration for black and white reproduction.
Refer to Table 3-1 (page 3-10) and Table 3-2 (page 3-11) for the corresponding recorder configuration/programming data. For this example, the instrument has four inputs as follows:
1
2
3
4
Raw Flow Value
Temperature
Pressure
pH
The value recorded on Pen 1 is a derived value; flow corrected for temperature and pressure. The derived value
is also converted to a process value for alarming.
(Continued on next page)
Section 3
3-9
Edition 3
Rev G
The value recorded on Pen 2 is the temperature, zoned to record 20 to 120 on the lower 10% of the chart, and
120 to 210 on the upper 90% of the chart.
The value recorded on Pen 3 is the pH, input 4 zoned to record 0 to 14 on the upper 70% of the chart.
The value recorded on Pen 4 is the status of alarm A11, zoned to record 0 or 1 at 70% or 80% of the chart.
Input 3, the pressure, is used in the derived value, but not recorded.
TABLE 3-1 Configure Chart Parameters
(Not all parameters are shown)
CONFIGURE CHART
CHART TYPE USED
(CHART TYPE)
RINGS ONLY
CHART TAG
tttttttttttttttttttt
UNIT #1
NORMAL SPEED
(CHART SPEED)
24 HOURS
MAJOR TIME PERIODS
nn
24
MINOR TIME PERIODS
n
4
BLANK TIME PERIODS
n
2
ACTION ON NEW CHART
(NEW CHART ACTION)
PRINT SCALES
Edition 3
Rev G
3-10
Section 3
TABLE 3-2 Recorder Parameters
(Not all parameters are shown)
RECORDER NUMBER
1
2
3
4
Rs RECORDER TAG
tttttttttttttttttttt
FLOW #1
TEMP #1
PH #1
ALARM #1
Rs VALUE TO RECORD
(VALUE)
DV1
IV2
IV4
DV2
Rs PEN/COLOR
(PEN/COLOR)
BLUE
GREEN
BLACK
RED
RS CHART DIVISIONS
nnn
100
100
100
100
Rs ZONE 1 LOW
DIVISION n n n
0
0
30
70
Rs ZONE 1 HIGH
DIVISION n n n
100
10
100
80
Rs SPAN 1 LOW
nnnnnnn uuuuuu
0 GPM
20 F
0 PH
0
Rs SPAN 1 HIGH
nnnnnnn uuuuuu
400 GPM
120 F
14 PH
1
Rs SCALE 1 INTERVAL
n n DIVISIONS
10
10
10
10
Rs ZONE 2 HIGH
DIVISION n n n
0
100
0
0
Rs SPAN 2 HIGH
nnnnnnn uuuuuu
N/A
210 F
N/A
N/A
Rs SCALE 2 INTERVAL
n n DIVISIONS
N/A
10
N/A
N/A
Rs POSITION ON ERROR
DIVISION n n n
100
100
20
90
Section 3
3-11
Edition 3
Rev G
3.8.4 SEQUENCE OF EVENTS
11:27 PM
11:30 PM
11:31 PM
11:50 PM
12:20 PM
12:54 PM
1:12 PM
Chart installed
Instrument began printing with the Chart Tag, (UNIT #1) and the trend data collected and
saved between 11:27 and 11:30, while continuing to save scanned data. Note the "¨" on the
outer ring to indicate where trending began
Instrument caught up to the current time and began normal trending.
Flow rate went into alarm.
Flow rate came out of alarm.
Recording interrupted by power failure.
Recording restored, "ê" marked on the chart at X:XX PM to indicate point of power interruption
and chart positioned to correct time and trending resumes.
FIGURE 3-2
Edition 3
Rev G
3-12
Section 3
3.9 GETTING STARTED
Before attempting any configuration/programming, review Sections 3.3 Keypad Function; 3.4 Changing Parameter Settings; 3.7 Display Details; 3.8 Chart Details; and Appendix C Reference Section.
Then, using the Flow Charts below, the Quick Start Procedure, page 3-14 and filled in the Software Reference/
Record Sheets, determine the prompts and parameters that will be required for proper operation of the instrument and begin the configuration and programming procedures as described in Section 4 Configuration; Section
5 Display Programming; Section 6 Chart Prompts, and if required, Section 7 Alarm Settings and Section 8 Action
Time Settings. Section 9 contains procedures for Enabling/Disabling and entering Passwords.
Appendix D may be referred to for examples of how to program/configure some prompts and parameters.
MAIN PROMPTS
CHART
PROMPTS
CHART
PASSWORD
CHANGE
CHART
YES
START
CHART
CHART
ROTATE
TREND
COLLECT
CHART
SPEED
CHART
CONFIG
NO
DISP
PROMPTS
DISP
PASSWORD
SYSTEM
PROMPTS
SYSTEM
PASSWORD
CONTROLLER
STATE ACCESS*
ACT/TIME
SETTINGS
SELECT
SETPOINTS*
ALARM
SETTINGS
SELECT
MANUAL VALUES*
TUNING
PARAMETERS*
ENABLES
PASSWORDS
DISP
MODE
CONFIG.
DISP
FORMAT
TEST
SEQ DISP
DURATION
CAL
OPER
INPUT
MODEL
REV
* CONTROLLER ONLY
CONFIGURATION
CONFIG
INPUTS
CONSTANTS
CUSTOM
CURVES
TIMERS
LEDS
DERIVED
ACTUATORS
OPERATOR
INPUTS
DERIVED
VARIABLES
RELAYS
OPERATOR
MESSAGES
PROCESS
VARIABLES
CURRENT
OUTPUTS
CHART
MESSAGES
CONTROLLERS*
SETPOINTS*
RECORDERS
TOTALIZERS
INSTRUMENT
SETTINGS
CONTROL STATE
ACCESS*
SIMULATED
VARIABLES
* CONTROLLER ONLY
Section 3
3-13
Edition 3
Rev G
3.10 QUICK START PROCEDURE
This procedure can be used for starting up the recorder at the very basic level of recording inputs or to quickly
familiarize yourself with the basic configuration process. A large number of default parameters are utilized and
the default conditions are assumed. Please refer to the balance of Section 4 for important details on how to get
full use of the instruments capabilities.
To use this procedure you should have already jumper configured at least one input (see Section 2 - Installation
and Wiring), or be willing to use the factory settings of Thermocouple, Wide Span and Upscale Break protection.
The marker pen assembly should also be installed, see Section 2 for installation instructions.
Connect a sensor or input signal source to the primary input that matches the type of hardware configured on the
input board. If the input is configured as a thermocouple, you can simply install a wire between the input connections and the unit will indicate the temperature inside the instrument.
To perform Quick Start you will need to configure the Input Value, Recorder Pen, Chart, and Display.
Input Value Configuration
Step 1
From a power-up state, depress the SCROLL key until CONFIGURATION shows in the lower line display (the
upper line display will show SELECT). With CONFIGURATION in the lower line display, use the DOWN key, then
SCROLL key to select INPUTS. Press the DOWN ARROW key to display INPUT NUMBER. The INPUT NUMBER must agree with the input to be displayed and recorded. Press the MOD key, use the UP/DOWN arrows to
change the value, and the ENTER key to make the selection.
Step 2
Depress the SCROLL key twice to skip over IVx COPY/INITIALIZE. The display should show IVx DISPLAY TAG.
If you wish to enter a Display Tag, use the MOD key and then the UP/DOWN arrows or MOD key again to enter
the Character Selection, then select characters for the Tag.
Step 3
Depress the SCROLL key to advance to the display, IVx INPUT TYPE/RANGE. The default will be OFF-NO
INPUT. Select MOD to change this and SCROLL to select an input type. Press ENTER to finalize the selection.
Step 4
The Prompts displayed, after the next depression of the SCROLL key will depend on which Input Type/Range
was selected. If Thermocouple or RTD were selected, then the specific type of Thermocouple or RTD will need to
be selected. Use the MOD key to change, then the SCROLL and ENTER keys as before. Degrees C or F can
also be selected after the type of TC or RTD has been specified by pressing the LEFT ARROW or SCROLL key
to choice, then press Enter. If mA, mV, or volt was selected go to step 5, otherwise go to Step 7.
Step 5
Press the SCROLL key to INPUT RANGE LOW (default = 0) and INPUT RANGE HIGH (default = 100). These
two parameters specify the desired analog signal range (4-20mA, 0-100mV) that will be scaled to engineering
units.
Step 6
If mA, mV, or VOLT was selected, the SCROLL key will display IVx V/mA CONVERSION next. LINEAR is the
default condition. Select according to the type of signal conversion desired.
Step 7
The next display will show IVx DISPLAY UNITS. Select F, C or OTHER. If OTHER is selected, the SCROLL key
will next bring up IVx OTHER UNITS on the display. Use the MOD key, then UP/DOWN arrows and ENTER to
specify the Display Units.
Edition 3
Rev G
3-14
Section 3
Step 8
Next, the display will show IVx DECIMAL POSITION, IVx RANGE LIMIT LOW, and IVx RANGE LIMIT HIGH.
These will be used to calculate the engineering units range for volt/milliamp inputs for the Input being configured.
For Thermocouple/RTD inputs, their values establish the expected range outside of which the instrument will
consider the value "out of range". Select accordingly with the MOD, SCROLL, UP/DOWN arrows and ENTER.
Step 9
Depress the SCROLL key and skip over the rest of the Input Selections until the display shows IVx DISPLAY
OPTION. Select IN BOTH MODES for this input.
Step 10
After depressing the ENTER key, depress the UP ARROW key to get back to the previous level of CONFIGURE.
Step 11
Depress the SCROLL key until RECORDERS is displayed in the lower line display.
Step 12
Depress the DOWN ARROW key to enter the Recorder Configuration section. Depress the SCROLL key and
skip over the displays shown until the display shows Rx VALUE TO RECORD. Use the MOD and UP/DOWN
keys to select IVx where X is the input channel being configured. Press ENTER to finalize this selection.
Step 13
Depress the SCROLL key and skip over the displays until the display shows Rx SPAN 1 LOW and enter the low
end of the range of units to be recorded. In other words, what input value (in units) should represent the low end
of chart. Input this value using the MOD, UP/DOWN arrows, SCROLL and ENTER as before.
Step 14
Repeat for Rx SPAN 1 HIGH, using the input value (in units) that should represent the high end of the chart.
Note: the recorder span should normally correspond to an even multiple of one hundred units (for example 0 to
200 or 30 to 130, not 0 to 130) so the scales are convenient to read.
Step 15
Depress the UP ARROW key 3 times to return to the Normal Display.
Step 16
Depress the CHART key until SELECT and CHART CONFIGURATION appears. Press the DOWN ARROW key
to show CHART SIZE. Select the chart size being used. Press the UP ARROW key twice to return to the
Normal Display.
Step 17
Depress the CHART key again until CHANGE CHART appears. Select YES. Install the chart. Be sure to adjust
the three retaining clips according to the size chart being used. The display should show START NEW CHART.
Select YES with the LEFT ARROW key and then press ENTER.
After initializing the chart, the recorder should begin recording and displaying values for the Input Signal just
configured.
Section 3
3-15
Edition 3
Rev G
Software Reference/Record Sheet
Configuration
INPUT
Parameter
DISPLAY TAG
INPUT TYPE/RANGE
T/C TYPE
RTD TYPE
DEG C/F
SENSOR BREAK
INPUT RANGE LOW
INPUT RANGE HIGH
PULSE RATE HIGH
COMMS ADDRESS
COMMS REGISTER
REGISTER TYPE
V/MA CONVERSION
DISPLAY UNITS
OTHER UNITS
DECIMAL POSITION
RANGE LIMIT LOW
RANGE LIMIT HIGH
EXPONENT
CUTOFF TYPE
CUTOFF VALUE
INPUT CORRECT 1
INPUT CORRECT 2
VALUE FILTER
DISPLAY OPTION
OPEN/1 DESCR.
CLOSED/0 DESCR.
DISPLAY FILTER
Edition 3
Rev G
Input 1
Input 2
Input 3
Input 4
Upscale Downscale Upscale Downscale Upscale Downscale Upscale Downscale
Pulse/Sec
Pulse/Sec
Pulse/Sec
Pulse/Sec
Units
Units
Units
Units
Units
Units
Units
Units
@
@
@
@
@
@
@
@
Seconds
Seconds
Seconds
Seconds
Seconds
Seconds
Seconds
Seconds
3-16
Section 3
Software Reference/Record Sheet
Configuration
INPUT
Parameter
DISPLAY TAG
INPUT TYPE/RANGE
T/C TYPE
T/C INPUT SPAN
RTD TYPE
DEG C/F
V/MA INPUT TYPE
SENSOR BREAK
INPUT RANGE LOW
INPUT RANGE HIGH
PULSE RATE HIGH
COMMS ADDRESS
COMMS REGISTER
REGISTER TYPE
V/MA CONVERSION
DISPLAY UNITS
OTHER UNITS
DECIMAL POSITION
RANGE LIMIT LOW
RANGE LIMIT HIGH
EXPONENT
CUTOFF TYPE
CUTOFF VALUE
INPUT CORRECT 1
INPUT CORRECT 2
VALUE FILTER
DISPLAY OPTION
HIGH STATE DES
LOW STATE DES
DISPLAY FILTER
Section 3
Input 5
Wide
Input 6
Narrow
Wide
Input 7
Narrow
Wide
Input 8
Narrow
Wide
Narrow
Upscale Downscale Upscale Downscale Upscale Downscale Upscale Downscale
Pulse/Sec
Pulse/Sec
Pulse/Sec
Pulse/Sec
Units
Units
Units
Units
Units
Units
Units
Units
@
@
@
@
@
@
@
@
Seconds
Seconds
Seconds
Seconds
Seconds
Seconds
Seconds
Seconds
3-17
Edition 3
Rev G
Software Reference/Record Sheet
Configuration
CONSTANTS
Parameter
CV-1
CV-2
CV-3
CV-4
VALUE
Parameter
Parameter
CV-7
CV-5
CV-8
CV-9
CV-6
CV-10
CV-11
CV-7
CV-12
CV-8
VALUE
Parameter
CV-9
CV-10
CV-11
CV-12
VALUE
Edition 3
Rev G
3-18
Section 3
Software Reference/Record Sheet
Configuration
CUSTOM CURVES
Parameter
CC-1
CC-2
DECIMAL POSITION OF
INPUT
DECIMAL POSITION OF
OUTPUT
NUMBER OF POINTS
POINT PAIR 01
POINT PAIR 02
POINT PAIR 03
POINT PAIR 04
POINT PAIR 05
POINT PAIR 06
POINT PAIR 07
POINT PAIR 08
POINT PAIR 09
POINT PAIR 10
POINT PAIR 11
POINT PAIR 12
POINT PAIR 13
POINT PAIR 14
POINT PAIR 15
POINT PAIR 16
POINT PAIR 17
POINT PAIR 18
POINT PAIR 19
POINT PAIR 20
POINT PAIR 21
Section 3
-->
-->
-->
-->
-->
-->
-->
-->
-->
-->
-->
-->
-->
-->
-->
-->
-->
-->
-->
-->
-->
-->
-->
-->
-->
-->
-->
-->
-->
-->
-->
-->
-->
-->
-->
-->
-->
-->
-->
-->
-->
-->
3-19
Edition 3
Rev G
Software Reference/Record Sheet
Configuration
CUSTOM CURVES
Parameter
CC-3
CC-4
DECIMAL POSITION OF
INPUT
DECIMAL POSITION OF
OUTPUT
NUMBER OF POINTS
POINT PAIR 01
POINT PAIR 02
POINT PAIR 03
POINT PAIR 04
POINT PAIR 05
POINT PAIR 06
POINT PAIR 07
POINT PAIR 08
POINT PAIR 09
POINT PAIR 10
POINT PAIR 11
POINT PAIR 12
POINT PAIR 13
POINT PAIR 14
POINT PAIR 15
POINT PAIR 16
POINT PAIR 17
POINT PAIR 18
POINT PAIR 19
POINT PAIR 20
POINT PAIR 21
Edition 3
Rev G
-->
-->
-->
-->
-->
-->
-->
-->
-->
-->
-->
-->
-->
-->
-->
-->
-->
-->
-->
-->
-->
-->
-->
-->
-->
-->
-->
-->
-->
-->
-->
-->
-->
-->
-->
-->
-->
-->
-->
-->
-->
-->
3-20
Section 3
Software Reference/Record Sheet
Configuration
DERIVED VARIABLES
Parameter
DISPLAY TAG
FUNCTION
INPUT 1
INPUT 2
INPUT 3
INPUT 4
INPUT 5
INPUT ACTUATOR
RESET ACTUATOR
DISPLAY UNITS
UNITS DESCRIPTION
DECIMAL POSITION
VALUE FILTER
DISPLAY OPTION
DISPLAY FILTER
Parameter
DISPLAY TAG
FUNCTION
INPUT 1
INPUT 2
INPUT 3
INPUT 4
INPUT 5
INPUT ACTUATOR
RESET ACTUATOR
DISPLAY UNITS
UNITS DESCRIPTION
DECIMAL POSITION
VALUE FILTER
DISPLAY OPTION
DISPLAY FILTER
Section 3
DV-1
DV-2
DV-3
DV-4
seconds
seconds
seconds
seconds
seconds
seconds
seconds
seconds
DV-5
DV-6
DV-7
DV-8
seconds
seconds
seconds
seconds
seconds
seconds
seconds
seconds
3-21
Edition 3
Rev G
Software Reference/Record Sheet
Configuration
DERIVED VARIABLES
Parameter
DISPLAY TAG
FUNCTION
INPUT 1
INPUT 2
INPUT 3
INPUT 4
INPUT 5
INPUT ACTUATOR
RESET ACTUATOR
DISPLAY UNITS
UNITS DESCRIPTION
DECIMAL POSITION
VALUE FILTER
DISPLAY VALUE
DISPLAY FILTER
Edition 3
Rev G
DV-9
DV-10
DV-11
DV-12
seconds
seconds
seconds
seconds
seconds
seconds
seconds
seconds
3-22
Section 3
Software Reference/Record Sheet
Configuration
PROCESS VARIABLES
Parameter
DISPLAY TAG
INPUT
DISPLAY UNITS
OTHER UNITS
DECIMAL POSITION
VALUE FILTER
DISPLAY OPTION
DISPLAY FILTER
Ax1 ALARM TYPE
Ax1 TIME BASE
Ax1 SAMPLE PERIOD
Ax1 HYSTERESIS
Ax2 ALARM TYPE
Ax2 TIME BASE
Ax2 SAMPLE PERIOD
Ax2 HYSTERESIS
Ax3 ALARM TYPE
Ax3 TIME BASE
Ax3 SAMPLE PERIOD
Ax3 HYSTERESIS
Ax4 ALARM TYPE
Ax4 TIME BASE
Ax4 SAMPLE PERIOD
Ax4 HYSTERESIS
LOOP ALARM TIME
ALARM INHIBIT
Section 3
PV-1
PV-2
PV-3
PV-4
seconds
seconds
seconds
seconds
seconds
seconds
seconds
seconds
seconds
seconds
seconds
seconds
seconds
seconds
seconds
seconds
seconds
seconds
seconds
seconds
seconds
seconds
seconds
seconds
3-23
Edition 3
Rev G
Software Reference/Record Sheet
Configuration
CONTROLLERS
Parameter
CONTROLLER-1
CONTROL TYPE
OUT 1 TYPE
OUT 2 TYPE
OUT 1 HYST
OUT 2 HYST
OUT 1 % LIMIT
OUT 2 % LIMIT
OUT 1 % ERROR
OUT 2 % ERROR
OUT SLEW RATE
MANUAL ACTUATOR
AUTO TRANSFER
OFF
MAIN SP SOURCE
REMOTE SP ACTUATOR
REMOTE SP SOURCE
2nd SP ACTUATOR
2nd SP SOURCE
REMOTE SP RATIO
REMOTE SP BIAS
FEED FWD SOURCE
FEED FWD HIGH
FEED FWD LOW
DISP SELECT SP
DISP RAMPED SP
DISP % OUTPUTS
Edition 3
Rev G
CONTROLLER-2
CONTROLLER-3
CONTROLLER-4
%
%
%
%
%MIN
%
%
%
%
%/MIN
%
%
%
%
%/MIN
%
%
%
%
%/MIN
ON
OFF
ON
3-24
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
Section 3
Software Reference/Record Sheet
Configuration
CONTROL SETPOINTS
Parameter
Setpoint 1
Setpoint 2
Setpoint 3
Setpoint 4
Setpoint 1
Setpoint 2
Setpoint 3
Setpoint 4
*PROMPT TEXT
DISPLAY UNITS
OTHER UNITS
DEC POSITION
UPPER LIMIT
LOWER LIMIT
DISP OPTION
Parameter
*PROMPT TEXT
DISPLAY UNITS
OTHER UNITS
DEC POSITION
UPPER LIMIT
LOWER LIMIT
DISP OPTION
* If the prompt text is blank, the setpoint is disabled and the remaining prompts will not be seen. The
setpoint will also not appear in the setpoint sub-menu of the DISPLAY menu.
Section 3
3-25
Edition 3
Rev G
Software Reference/Record Sheet
Configuration
RECORDERS
Parameter
RECORDER TAG
VALUE TO RECORD
PEN/COLOR
RECORDING METHOD
DECIMAL POSITION
CHART DIVISIONS
ZONE 1 LOW
ZONE 1 HIGH
SPAN 1 LOW
SPAN 1 HIGH
SCALE 1 INTERVAL
ZONE 2 HIGH
SPAN 2 HIGH
SCALE 2 INTERVAL
POSIT ON ERROR
FILTER
Edition 3
Rev G
RCDR-1
division
division
RCDR-2
division
division
division
division
divisions
division
divisions
seconds
division
division
division
division
division
seconds
3-26
divisions
divisions
divisions
division
RCDR-4
divisions
divisions
division
division
RCDR-3
divisions
division
seconds
seconds
Section 3
Software Reference/Record Sheet
Configuration
TOTALIZERS
Parameter
DISPLAY TAG
INPUT VALUE
TIME BASE
TOTAL IS FLOW
DISPLAY UNITS
DECIMAL POSITION
DISPLAY OPTION
DISPLAY FORMAT
TOTALIZER TYPE
TOTALIZER PRESET
LOW FLOW CUTOFF
RESET ACTUATOR
HOLD ACTUATOR
PULSED OUT
PULSE EVERY
Section 3
TOTAL-1
times
no
TOTAL-2
times
yes
no
3-27
TOTAL-3
times
yes
no
TOTAL-4
times
yes
no
yes
Edition 3
Rev G
Software Reference/Record Sheet
Configuration
TIMERS
Parameter
TIME-1
TIME-2
TIME-3
TIME-4
DISPLAY TAG
TIMER TYPE
TIME FORMAT
TIMER PERIOD
RESET ACTUATOR
DISPLAY OPTION
Configuration
LEDS
Parameter
LED-1
LED-2
LED-3
LED-4
LED-5
LED-6
LED-7
LED-8
ACTUATOR
Parameter
ACTUATOR
Edition 3
Rev G
3-28
Section 3
Software Reference/Record Sheet
Configuration
RELAYS
Parameter
RELAY USAGE
ACTUATOR
T.P. VALUE
CYCLE TIME
Parameter
RELAY USAGE
ACTUATOR
T.P. VALUE
CYCLE TIME
Section 3
RLY-1
seconds
RLY-5
seconds
RLY-2
seconds
RLY-6
seconds
3-29
RLY-3
RLY-4
seconds
RLY-7
seconds
seconds
RLY-8
seconds
Edition 3
Rev G
Software Reference/Record Sheet
Configuration
CURRENT OUTPUTS
Parameter
SOURCE
RANGE LOW
RANGE HIGH
OUTPUT RANGE
OUTPUT ON ERROR
Edition 3
Rev G
CO-1
CO-2
CO-3
mA
mA
mA
mA
3-30
CO-4
mA
mA
mA
mA
Section 3
Software Reference/Record Sheet
Configuration
INSTRUMENT SETTINGS
Parameter
INSTRUMENT TAG
DISPLAY OPTION
INSTR. ON ACTUATOR
ALARMING ON ACTUATOR
CONTROL ON ACTUATOR
DATE DISPLAY FORMAT
TIME DISPLAY FORMAT
CURRENT DATE
CURRENT DAY
CURRENT TIME
TIME TO LOG DATA
COMMUNICATIONS MODE
COMMS ADDRESS
COMMS BIT RATE
COMMS PARITY
INPUT SCAN SEQUENCE
Section 3
3-31
Edition 3
Rev G
Software Reference/Record Sheet
Configuration
DERIVED ACTUATORS
Derived Actuator
Equation
DA-1
DA-2
DA-3
DA-4
DA-5
DA-6
DA-7
DA-8
DA-9
DA-10
DA-11
DA-12
DA-13
DA-14
DA-15
DA-16
DA-17
DA-18
DA-19
DA-20
DA-21
DA-22
DA-23
DA-24
Edition 3
Rev G
3-32
Section 3
Software Reference/Record Sheet
Configuration
OPERATOR INPUTS
Parameter
PROMPT TEXT
OFF/NO/0 CHOICE
ON/YES/1 CHOICE
ACTUATION STYLE
POWER UP STATE
WHEN DISPLAYED
Parameter
PROMPT TEXT
OFF/NO/0 CHOICE
ON/YES/1 CHOICE
ACTUATION STYLE
POWER UP STATE
WHEN DISPLAYED
Parameter
PROMPT TEXT
OFF/NO/0 CHOICE
ON/YES/1 CHOICE
ACTUATION STYLE
POWER UP STATE
WHEN DISPLAYED
Parameter
PROMPT TEXT
OFF/NO/0 CHOICE
ON/YES/1 CHOICE
ACTUATION STYLE
POWER UP STATE
WHEN DISPLAYED
Section 3
OI-01
OI-02
OI-03
Continuous Momentary Continuous Momentary Continuous Momentary
Off
On Same
Off
On Same
Off
On Same
Always When Enabled Always When Enabled Always When Enabled
OI-04
OI-05
OI-06
Continuous Momentary Continuous Momentary Continuous Momentary
Off
On Same
Off
On Same
Off
On Same
Always When Enabled Always When Enabled Always When Enabled
OI-07
OI-08
OI-09
Continuous Momentary Continuous Momentary Continuous Momentary
Off
On Same
Off
On Same
Off
On Same
Always When Enabled Always When Enabled Always When Enabled
OI-10
OI-11
OI-12
Continuous Momentary Continuous Momentary Continuous Momentary
Off
On Same
Off
On Same
Off
On Same
Always When Enabled Always When Enabled Always When Enabled
3-33
Edition 3
Rev G
Software Reference/Record Sheet
Configuration
OPERATOR MESSAGES
Parameter
OM-01
OM-02
OM-03
OM-04
OM-05
OM-06
OM-07
OM-08
OM-09
OM-10
OM-11
OM-12
ACTUATOR
LINE 1 TEXT
LINE 2 TEXT
DISPLAY MODE
Parameter
ACTUATOR
LINE 1 TEXT
LINE 2 TEXT
DISPLAY MODE
Parameter
ACTUATOR
LINE 1 TEXT
LINE 2 TEXT
DISPLAY MODE
Parameter
ACTUATOR
LINE 1 TEXT
LINE 2 TEXT
DISPLAY MODE
Edition 3
Rev G
3-34
Section 3
Software Reference/Record Sheet
Configuration
CHART MESSAGES
Parameter
ACTUATOR
PEN/COLOR
MESSAGE TEXT
VALUE 1
VALUE 2
VALUE 3
VALUE 4
TIME/DATE STAMP
ORIENTATION
Parameter
ACTUATOR
PEN/COLOR
MESSAGE TEXT
VALUE 1
VALUE 2
VALUE 3
VALUE 4
TIME/DATE STAMP
ORIENTATION
Parameter
ACTUATOR
PEN/COLOR
MESSAGE TEXT
VALUE 1
VALUE 2
VALUE 3
VALUE 4
TIME/DATE STAMP
ORIENTATION
Section 3
CM-01
CM-02
CM-03
No Yes
No Yes
No Yes
CM-05
CM-06
CM-07
No Yes
No Yes
No Yes
CM-09
CM-10
CM-11
No Yes
No Yes
No Yes
3-35
CM-04
No Yes
CM-08
No Yes
CM-12
No Yes
Edition 3
Rev G
Software Reference/Record Sheet
Configuration
CONTROL STATE ACCESS
Parameter
Text
CA1 LINE 1 TEXT
CA1 LINE 2 TEXT
CA1 F1 KEY USAGE
CA1 F1 LINE 1 TEXT
CA1 F1 OFF STATE TEXT
CA1 F1 ON STATE TEXT
CA1 F2 KEY USAGE
CA1 F2 LINE 1 TEXT
CA1 F2 OFF STATE TEXT
CA1 F2 ON STATE TEXT
CA1 F3 KEY USAGE
CA1 F3 LINE 1 TEXT
CA1 F3 OFF STATE TEXT
CA1 F3 ON STATE TEXT
CA1 F4 KEY USAGE
CA1 F4 LINE 1 TEXT
CA1 F4 OFF STATE TEXT
CA1 F4 ON STATE TEXT
CA1 F5 KEY USAGE
CA1 F5 LINE 1 TEXT
CA1 F5 OFF STATE TEXT
CA1 F5 ON STATE TEXT
Edition 3
Rev G
3-36
Section 3
Software Reference/Record Sheet
Configuration
CONTROL STATE ACCESS
Parameter
Text
CA2 LINE 1 TEXT
CA2 LINE 2 TEXT
CA2 F1 KEY USAGE
CA2 F1 LINE 1 TEXT
CA2 F1 OFF STATE TEXT
CA2 F1 ON STATE TEXT
CA2 F2 KEY USAGE
CA2 F2 LINE 1 TEXT
CA2 F2 OFF STATE TEXT
CA2 F2 ON STATE TEXT
CA2 F3 KEY USAGE
CA2 F3 LINE 1 TEXT
CA2 F3 OFF STATE TEXT
CA2 F3 ON STATE TEXT
CA2 F4 KEY USAGE
CA2 F4 LINE 1 TEXT
CA2 F4 OFF STATE TEXT
CA2 F4 ON STATE TEXT
CA2 F5 KEY USAGE
CA2 F5 LINE 1 TEXT
CA2 F5 OFF STATE TEXT
CA2 F5 ON STATE TEXT
Section 3
3-37
Edition 3
Rev G
Software Reference/Record Sheet
Configuration
CONTROL STATE ACCESS
Parameter
Text
CA3 LINE 1 TEXT
CA3 LINE 2 TEXT
CA3 F1 KEY USAGE
CA3 F1 LINE 1 TEXT
CA3 F1 OFF STATE TEXT
CA3 F1 ON STATE TEXT
CA3 F2 KEY USAGE
CA3 F2 LINE 1 TEXT
CA3 F2 OFF STATE TEXT
CA3 F2 ON STATE TEXT
CA3 F3 KEY USAGE
CA3 F3 LINE 1 TEXT
CA3 F3 OFF STATE TEXT
CA3 F3 ON STATE TEXT
CA3 F4 KEY USAGE
CA3 F4 LINE 1 TEXT
CA3 F4 OFF STATE TEXT
CA3 F4 ON STATE TEXT
CA3 F5 KEY USAGE
CA3 F5 LINE 1 TEXT
CA3 F5 OFF STATE TEXT
CA3 F5 ON STATE TEXT
Edition 3
Rev G
3-38
Section 3
Software Reference/Record Sheet
Configuration
CONTROL STATE ACCESS
Parameter
Text
CA4 LINE 1 TEXT
CA4 LINE 2 TEXT
CA4 F1 KEY USAGE
CA4 F1 LINE 1 TEXT
CA4 F1 OFF STATE TEXT
CA4 F1 ON STATE TEXT
CA4 F2 KEY USAGE
CA4 F2 LINE 1 TEXT
CA4 F2 OFF STATE TEXT
CA4 F2 ON STATE TEXT
CA4 F3 KEY USAGE
CA4 F3 LINE 1 TEXT
CA4 F3 OFF STATE TEXT
CA4 F3 ON STATE TEXT
CA4 F4 KEY USAGE
CA4 F4 LINE 1 TEXT
CA4 F4 OFF STATE TEXT
CA4 F4 ON STATE TEXT
CA4 F5 KEY USAGE
CA4 F5 LINE 1 TEXT
CA4 F5 OFF STATE TEXT
CA4 F5 ON STATE TEXT
Section 3
3-39
Edition 3
Rev G
Software Reference/Record Sheet
Configuration
SIMULATED VARIABLES
Parameter
DISPLAY TAG
TYPE
DISPLAY UNITS
OTHER UNITS
DECIMAL POSITION
RANGE LOW
RANGE HIGH
PERIOD (1/FREQ.)
DISPLAY OPTION
Edition 3
Rev G
SV-1
C F Other
minutes
SV-2
C F Other
minutes
3-40
SV-3
C F Other
minutes
SV-4
C F Other
minutes
Section 3
Software Reference/Record Sheet
Configuration
CHART PROGRAMMING
Select Chart Configuration
CHART SIZE
CHART TYPE USED
CHART TAG
NORMAL SPEED
MAJOR TIME PERIODS
MINOR TIME PERIODS
BLANK MAJOR PERIODS
ALTERNATE SPEED USED
ALT SPEED ACTUATOR
ALTERNATE SPEED
MAJOR TIME PERIODS
MINOR TIME PERIODS
BLANK MAJOR PERIODS
MAJOR LINE PEN/COLOR
MAJOR LINE PEN/COLOR (IF SELECT)
MINOR LINE PEN/COLOR
MINOR LINE PEN/COLOR (IF SELECT)
TIME PEN/COLOR
DATE/PEN COLOR
CHART TAG PEN/COLOR
ACTION ON NEW CHART
STOP AFTER 1 REVOLUTION
ROTATE CHART ACTUATOR
COLLECT DATA ACTUATOR
CHART ROTATION PROMPT
TREND DATA COLLECT PROMPT
CHART SPEED PROMPT
Section 3
MATCH SCALE COLOR
BLUE GREEN RED
MATCH SCALE COLOR
BLUE GREEN RED
BLUE GREEN RED
BLUE GREEN RED
BLUE GREEN RED
3-41
SELECT A COLOR
BLACK VIOLET
SELECT A COLOR
BLACK VIOLET
BLACK VIOLET
BLACK VIOLET
BLACK VIOLET
Edition 3
Rev G
Software Reference/Record Sheet
Configuration
DISPLAY PROGRAMMING
Parameter
SEQUENTIAL DISPLAY
DISPLAY MODE
DISPLAY FORMAT
Edition 3
Rev G
DURATION _______ SECONDS
CONTINUOUS
SEQUENCE
1 VAL
2 VALS
4 VALS
3-42
Section 3
Software Reference/Record Sheet
Configuration
ALARM SETTINGS
PV 1
ALM 1 (A11)
ALM 2 (A12)
ALM 2
ALM 1 (A21)
ALM 3
ALM 2 (A22)
ALM 4
ALM 3
ALM 4
ALM 3 (A13)
ALM 4 (A14)
ALM 3 (A23)
ALM 4 (A24)
ALM 3 (A33)
ALM 4 (A34)
ALM 3 (A43)
ALM 4 (A44)
SETPOINT
PV 2
PV 2
ALM 1
SETPOINT
PV 3
ALM 1
PV 3
SETPOINT
PV 4
PV 4
ALM 2
ALM 1 (A31)
ALM 1
ALM 2
ALM 1 (A41)
ALM 2 (A32)
ALM 3
ALM 2 (A42)
ALM 4
SETPOINT
Section 3
3-43
Edition 3
Rev G
Software Reference/Record Sheet
Configuration
ACTION TIME SETTINGS
Parameter
TIME 1 TAG
TIME 1
DATE 1
TIME 2 TAG
TIME 2
DATE 2
DAY OF WEEK ACTUATOR
DAY OF MONTH ACTUATOR
TIME DISPLAY OPTION
Edition 3
Rev G
3-44
Section 3
Software Reference/Record Sheet
Configuration
TUNING PARAMETERS
Parameter
SP RAMP RATE
OUT 1 P. BAND
OUT 2 P. BAND
OUT 1 SHIFT
OUT 2 SHIFT
INTEGRATION BAND
INTEGRATION SHIFT
OUT 1 AUTO RESET
OUT 2 AUTO RESET
OUT 1 RATE
OUT 2 RATE
Section 3
CONTROLLER-1
CONTROLLER-2
CONTROLLER-3
CONTROLLER-4
/HR
/HR
/HR
/HR
R/M
R/M
MIN
MIN
R/M
R/M
MIN
MIN
R/M
R/M
MIN
MIN
R/M
R/M
MIN
MIN
3-45
Edition 3
Rev G
Software Reference/Record Sheet
Configuration
ENABLES & PASSWORDS
Circle your selected choice
Factory setting is underlined
Parameter
ACTION TIME SETTINGS
ALARM SETTINGS
TUNING PARAMETERS
SET POINT CHANGES
CONFIGURATION
DERIVED ACTUATORS
OPERATOR INPUTS CONF
OPERATOR MESSAGES
CHART MESSAGES
SIMULATED VARIABLES
TEST
CALIBRATION
CHART PROMPTS
CHART CONFIGURATION
DISPLAY PROMPTS
OPERATOR INPUTS
CONTROL STATE ACCESS
SYSTEM PROMPTS PASSWORD
ENABLES & PASSWORDS PASSWORD
CHART PROMPTS PASSWORD
DISPLAY PROMPTS PASSWORD
Edition 3
Rev G
Disabled - Enabled
Disabled - Enabled
Disabled - Enabled
Disabled - Enabled
Disabled - Enabled
Disabled - Enabled
Disabled - Enabled
Disabled - Enabled
Disabled - Enabled
Disabled - Enabled
Disabled - Enabled
Disabled - Enabled
Disabled - Enabled
Disabled - Enabled
Disabled - Enabled
Disabled - Enabled
Disabled - Enabled
3-46
Section 3
Section 4 - Configuration
Selections made in Configuration set up the recorder for operation. Not all sections are applicable for every
recorder. Before or during configuration of your recorder, it is recommended that the Software Reference/Record
Sheet (found at end of Section 3) be completely filled in.
4.1 ENTERING CONFIGURATION
From the Normal Display, press the
until CONFIGURATION is seen in the lower display line. If PASS-
WORD appears in the lower display line, the correct “password” will need to be entered before access to CONFIGURATION is allowed. If CONFIGURATION is not displayed, then Configuration has been disabled. Refer to
Section 9, Enables and Passwords, for instructions to enable Configuration.
4.1.1 INPUTS
Input defines input types, ranges, units, scaling and display status for each of 1-8 inputs.
With CONFIGURATION in the lower display line, press the
then
until INPUTS appears in the lower
display line.
1. Press the
to display INPUT NUMBER.
INPUT NUMBER
1
Selections
1-8
Press the
to change, then
or
to desired input number, then press the
to store into memory.
Section 4
4-1
Edition 3
Rev G
I
N
P
U
T
S
2. Press the
to advance to the next parameter, COPY/INITIALIZE.
I
N
P
U
T
S
IVx COPY / INITIALIZE
NO
Press the
Selections
YES or NO
to change, then
to desired selection, then press
or
.
Choose YES if the parameters to be programmed are the same as another INPUT already programmed.
If selection is NO, see Step 3.
If selection is YES:
IVx COPY FROM INPUT
(0 = INITIALIZED)
Press the
o r
X
Input to be copied from
0=FACTORY DEFAULT
to change to the
input number to be copied from.
3. Press the
to advance to the next parameter, DISPLAY TAG.
IVx DISPLAY TAG
INPUT x
Refer to Section 3.4.2 Changing Text, page 3-3 for
Selection
Character Selection
Edition 3
Rev G
instructions.
4-2
Section 4
4. Press the
to advance to the next parameter, INPUT TYPE/RANGE.
IVx INPUT TYPE / RANGE
OFF - NO INPUT
Press the
Selections
OFF-NO INPUT
TC NARROW TC WIDE
RTD mA
25mV 100mV
1 VOLT 10 VOLT
SWITCH CONTACT
COMMS
5. Press the
to change, then
,
to desired choice, then press the
.
to advance to the next parameter:
OFF-NO INPUT selected, no other prompts for Input x will be seen, go to Step 1, Pg. 4-1.
TC TYPE selected, go to Step 5A.
RTD TYPE selected, go to Step 5B
mV, mA, Volt, Switch Contact go to Step 6.
COMMS, go to Step 6.
5A.
IVx TC TYPE
J
Press the
Selections
J,K,E,T,S
R,B,N,C,G
D
NI/NI-MOLY
PLATINEL II
Press the
Section 4
to change, then
,
to desired choice, then press the
.
to advance to step 5C.
4-3
Edition 3
Rev G
I
N
P
U
T
S
5B.
IVx RTD TYPE
I
N
P
U
T
S
PT 100 .00385 DIN
Selections
PT 100 .00385 DIN
PT 100 .00392 USA
PT 100 .00392 SAMA
NI 100
Press the
Press the
to change, then
to desired choice, then press the
,
.
to advance to step 5C.
5C. If TC or RTD was selected, then press the
to advance to the next parameter, DEGREES C/F.
IVx DEGREES C / F
°F
Selections
°C, °F
Press the
to change, then
to desired choice, then the
or
, or press the
Special key directly below
the desired choice.
Edition 3
Rev G
4-4
Section 4
6. Press the
to advance to the next parameter, SENSOR BREAK .
IVx SENSOR BREAK
I
N
P
U
T
S
UPSCALE
Press the
Selections
UPSCALE DOWNSCALE
Press the
to change, then
to desired choice, then press the
.
to advance through the next six prompts.
They are six jumper position prompts, non-changeable, and are displayed for information /verification only. The
jumper positions are based upon whether the input number is odd/even, input type, and span. Refer to Section
2.3.2 through 2.3.6.
FOR INPUT NUMBER 1, 3, 5, 7
JU7 position
JU3 position
JU1 position
JU15 position
JU11 position
JU2 position
FOR INPUT NUMBER 2, 4, 6, 8
JU8 position
JU6 position
JU4 position
JU16 position
JU12 position
JU5 position
7. If INPUT TYPE/RANGE selected was mA, mV, or VOLT, press the
to advance to the next parameter,
INPUT RANGE LOW .
Units correspond to units
configured in INPUT
TYPE/RANGE, mA, mV
or VOLT.
IVx INPUT RANGE LOW
.000 units
Press the
to change, then
,then
press
Section 4
or
Selections
± 999
, then
.
4-5
Edition 3
Rev G
8. If INPUT TYPE/RANGE selected was mA, mV, or VOLT, press the
to advance to the next parameter,
INPUT RANGE HIGH.
I
N
P
U
T
S
Units correspond to units
configured in INPUT
TYPE/RANGE, mA, mV
or VOLT.
IVx INPUT RANGE HIGH
100.000 units
Press the
to change, then
, then
press
or
Selections
± 999
, then
.
9. If INPUT TYPE/RANGE selected was PULSE, press the
to advance to the next parameter, PULSE
RATE HIGH. (Not Yet Available)
IVx PULSE RATE HIGH
1000
PULSES / SEC
Press the
to change, then
Selections
30 to 99999
,
to desired value, then press the
.
10. If INPUT TYPE/RANGE selected was COMMS, press the
to advance to the next parameter,
COMMS ADDRESS.
IVx COMMS ADDRESS
1
Press the
to change, then
desired address, then press the
Edition 3
Rev G
to
Selections
1 to 247
.
4-6
Section 4
11. If INPUT TYPE/RANGE selected was COMMS, press the
to advance to the next parameter, COMMS
REGISTER.
IVx COMMS REGISTER
I
N
P
U
T
S
0
Press the
to change, then
, then
press
or
Selections
0 to 65535
, then
.
12. If INPUT TYPE/RANGE selected was COMMS, press the
to advance to the next parameter, REGIS-
TER TYPE.
IVx REGISTER TYPE
INT
Press the
INT
Selections
LONG FLOAT
to change, then
to desired choice, then press the
13. If INPUT TYPE/RANGE selected was mA, mV, or Volt, press the
.
to advance to the next parameter,
VmA CONVERSION.
IVx V / mA CONVERSION
LINEAR
Press the
Selections
LINEAR, SQRT, EXP
Section 4
4-7
to change, then
to
desired choice, then
, or press the key directly
below the desired
choice.
Edition 3
Rev G
14. Press the
to advance to the next parameter, DISPLAY UNITS.
IVx DISPLAY UNITS
I
N
P
U
T
S
°F
Press the
Selections
°C °F OTHER
to change, then
to
desired choice, then
, or press the key directly
below the desired
choice.
15. If DISPLAY UNITS selected was OTHER, press the
to advance to the next parameter, OTHER
UNITS.
IVx OTHER UNITS
°F
Refer to Section 3.4.2 Changing Text, page 3-3 for
Selection
Text
16. Press the
instructions.
to advance to the next parameter, DECIMAL POSITION.
IVx DECIMAL POSITION
0
Press the
to change, then
desired number, then press
Edition 3
Rev G
to
Selections
0 to 4
.
4-8
Section 4
17. If INPUT TYPE/RANGE selected was not SWITCH CONTACT, press the
to advance to the next
parameter, RANGE LIMIT LOW.
IVx RANGE LIMIT LOW
Units correspond to
units configured in step
13 or 14.
0 units
Press the
to change, then
desired value, or
then press
Selections
± 999999
(decimal position = 0)
± 9.9999
(decimal position = 4)
to
then ,
.
18. If INPUT TYPE/RANGE selected was not SWITCH CONTACT, press the
to advance to the next
parameter, RANGE LIMIT HIGH.
IVx RANGE LIMIT HIGH
Units correspond to
units configured in step
13 or 14.
100 units
Press the
to change, then
desired value, or
then press
Section 4
to
Selections
± 999999
(decimal position = 0)
± 9.9999
(decimal position = 4)
then ,
.
4-9
Edition 3
Rev G
I
N
P
U
T
S
19. If V/mA conversion selected was EXP, press the
to advance to the next parameter, EXPONENT.
IVx EXPONENT
I
N
P
U
T
S
1.500
Press the
Selections
0.000 to 5.000
20. Press the
to change, then
desired value, then press the
to
.
to advance to the next parameter, CUTOFF TYPE.
IVx VALUE CUTOFF TYPE
NONE
Selections
NONE AT VALUE
TO ZERO BELOW VALUE
TO ZERO NEAR ZERO
Press the
to change, then
,
to desired choice, then press the
.
21. If CUTOFF TYPE selected was other than NONE, press the
to advance to the next parameter,
CUTOFF VALUE.
IVx CUTOFF VALUE
Units correspond to
units configured in step
14 or 15.
0 units
Press the
Selections
± 999999
(decimal position = 0)
± 9.9999
(decimal position = 4)
to change, then
,
to desired value, then press the
.
Edition 3
Rev G
4-10
Section 4
22. Press the
to advance to the next parameter, INPUT CORRECT 1 (not seen if SWITCH CONTACT or
COM was selected).
IVx INPUT CORRECT 1
0
AT
0
Selections
± 999999
(decimal position = 0)
± 9.9999
(decimal position = 4)
Press the
the
to change,
I
N
P
U
T
S
Selections
± 999999
(decimal position = 0)
± 9.9999
(decimal position = 4)
to select digit to change, then
to desired digit, then press
. This will change the correction (left number). Then change the value at which the correction
will occur (right number) and press
23. Press the
.
to advance to the next parameter, INPUT CORRECT 2 (not seen if SWITCH CONTACT or
COM was selected).
IVx INPUT CORRECT 2
0
AT
100
Selections
± 999999
(decimal position = 0)
± 9.9999
(decimal position = 4)
Press the
press the
to change,
Selections
± 999999
(decimal position = 0)
± 9.9999
(decimal position = 4)
to select digit to change, then
. This will change the correction (left number). Then change the value at which the correction
will occur (right number) and press
Section 4
to desired digit, then
4-11
.
Edition 3
Rev G
24. Press the
to advance to the next parameter, VALUE FILTER.
IVx VALUE FILTER
I
N
P
U
T
S
0 SECONDS
Press the
Selections
0 to 9999 seconds
to change, then
, then
then press the
25. Press the
or
to desired value,
.
to advance to the next parameter, DISPLAY OPTION.
IVx DISPLAY OPTION
IN BOTH MODES
Selections
NOT DISPLAYED
IN CONTINUOUS MODE
IN SEQUENTIAL MODE
IN BOTH MODES
Edition 3
Rev G
Press the
to change, then
desired choice, then press the
4-12
to
.
Section 4
26. If INPUT TYPE/RANGE selected was SWITCH CONTACT, press the
to advance to the next param-
eter, OPEN/1 DESCR..
IVx OPEN / 1 DESCR.
OPEN
Refer to Section 3.4.2 Changing Text, page 3-3 for
Selections
Text
instructions.
27. If INPUT TYPE/RANGE selected was SWITCH CONTACT, press the
to advance to the next param-
eter, CLOSED/0 DESCR..
IVx CLOSED / 0 DESCR.
CLOSED
Selections
Text
Section 4
Refer to Section 3.4.2 Changing Text, page 3-3 for
instructions.
4-13
Edition 3
Rev G
I
N
P
U
T
S
28. Press the
to advance to the next parameter, DISPLAY FILTER.
IVx DISPLAY FILTER
I
N
P
U
T
S
0 SECONDS
Press the
Selections
0 to 9999 seconds
, then
&
C
O
S
T
A
N
T
S
to change, then
then press the
29. Press the
section, page 4-1.
or
to desired value,
.
and the display advances to the next input to be programmed. Refer to the beginning of this
4.1.2 CONSTANTS
Constants are available only when MATH has been specified and present in the model number order matrix.
From the Normal Display, press the
until CONFIGURATION is seen in the lower display line. If PASSWORD appears in the lower display line, the correct "password" will need to be entered before access to Configuration is allowed. If CONFIGURATION is not displayed, then Configuration has been disabled. Refer to Section
9, Enables and Passwords, for instructions to enable Configuration.
With CONFIGURATION in the display, press the
display line.
1. Press the
, then the
until CONSTANTS appears in the lower
to display CONSTANT NUMBER.
CONSTANT NUMBER
1
Press the
to change, then
desired number, then press the
Edition 3
Rev G
to
Selections
1 to 12
.
4-14
Section 4
2. Press the
to advance to the next parameter, VALUE.
CVx VALUE
1.00000 E 0
Press the
to change, then
desired position, then
Selections
-9.99999E37 to 9.99999E37
to
to desired number,
then press the
. This will change the value (left number). Then change the exponent (right number) and
then press
.
3. Press the
&
and the display advances to the next constant to be programmed. Refer to the beginning of
this section, page 4-14.
4.1.3 CUSTOM CURVES
Custom Curves are available only when MATH has been specified and present in the model number order matrix.
Custom Curves allow the user to define up to 21 point "custom curve".
From the Normal Display, press the
until CONFIGURATION is seen in the lower display line. If PASSWORD appears in the lower display line, the correct "password" will need to be entered before access to Configuration is allowed. If CONFIGURATION is not displayed, then Configuration has been disabled. Refer to
Section 9, Enables and Passwords, for instructions to enable Configuration.
With CONFIGURATION in the display, press the
lower display line.
, then the
until CUSTOM CURVES appears in the
(Continued on next page)
Section 4
C
O
S
T
A
N
T
S
4-15
Edition 3
Rev G
C
U
S
T
O
M
C
U
R
V
E
S
1. Press the
to display CUSTOM CURVE NUMBER.
CUSTOM CURVE NUMBER
C
U
S
T
O
M
C
U
R
V
E
S
1
Press the
to change, then
desired number, then press the
2. Press the
to
Selections
1 to 4
.
to advance to the next parameter, DECIMAL POSITION OF INPUT.
CCx DECIMAL POSITION
OF INPUT
Press the
to change, then
desired number, then press the
3. Press the
0
to
Selections
0 to 4
.
to advance to the next parameter, DECIMAL POSITION OF OUTPUT.
CCx DECIMAL POSITION
OF OUTPUT
Press the
to change, then
desired number, then press the
Edition 3
Rev G
Selections
0 to 4
to
.
4-16
Section 4
4. Press the
to advance to the next parameter, NUMBER OF POINTS.
CCx NUMBER OF POINTS
C
U
S
T
O
M
2
Press the
to change, then
desired number, then press the
5. Press the
to
Selections
2 to 21
.
to advance to the next parameter, POINT PAIR 01 .
C
U
R
V
E
S
CCx POINT PAIR 01
0 -->
0
Selections
± 999999
(decimal position = 0)
± 9.9999
(decimal position = 4)
Press the
press the
to change, then
Selections
± 999999
(decimal position = 0)
± 9.9999
(decimal position = 4)
to select digit to change, then
. This will change the "input" value (left number). Then change the "output" value
(right number) and then press the
6. Press the
to desired digit, then
.
to advance to the next parameter, POINT PAIR 02.
CCx POINT PAIR 02
100 -->
100
Selections
± 999999
(decimal position = 0)
± 9.9999
(decimal position = 4)
Selections
± 999999
(decimal position = 0)
± 9.9999
(decimal position = 4)
Follow the same procedure as in step 5 (above) to choose your selections.
Section 4
4-17
Edition 3
Rev G
Repeat this step for each POINT PAIR prompt for mm equal to 03 through 21 (or less).
7. Press the
D
E
R
I
V
E
D
V
A
R
I
A
B
L
E
S
and the display advances to the next custom curve to be programmed. Refer to the begin-
ning of this section, page 4-15.
4.1.4 DERIVED VARIABLES
Derived Variables utilize math to DERIVE a value from other variables and/or constants. Derived Variables are
available only if MATH was specified and present in the model number order matrix.
From the Normal Display, press the
until CONFIGURATION is seen in the lower display line. If PASSWORD appears in the lower display line, the correct "password" will need to be entered before access to Configuration is allowed. If CONFIGURATION is not displayed, then Configuration has been disabled. Refer to Section
9, Enables and Passwords, for instructions to enable Configuration.
With CONFIGURATION in the display, press the
the lower display line.
1. Press the
, then the
until DERIVED VARIABLES appears in
to display DV NUMBER.
DV NUMBER
1
Press the
to change, then
desired number, then press the
Edition 3
Rev G
Selections
1 to 12
to
.
4-18
Section 4
2. Press the
to advance to the next parameter, DISPLAY TAG.
DVxx DISPLAY TAG
DER VAL x
Selections
Character Selection
Refer to Section 3.4.2 Changing Text, page 3-3 for
instructions.
3. Press the
to advance to the next parameter, FUNCTION. For FUNCTION descriptions, refer to the end
of this section, Page 4-27.
DVxx FUNCTION
NONE
Selections
NONE ADD SUB MUL DIV
AVG
LIN
EXP
CONVERT F TO C
CONVERT C TO F
CUSTOM CURVE 1
CUSTOM CURVE 2
CUSTOM CURVE 3
CUSTOM CURVE 4
POLYNOMIAL
LINEAR MASS FLOW
DP MASS FLOW
RELATIVE HUMIDITY
Fo VALUE
ZR02
LOG 10
LOG e
POWER 10
POWER e
HIGH SELECT
LOW SELECT
HIGH PEAK LOW PEAK
TRACK AND HOLD
1 OF 2 SELECTOR
COVERT ACTUATOR
Press the
to change, then
or
as required to pick desired choice,
then press the
.
Continue on to next page for additional steps unless NONE was selected, in which case, no other
prompts for Derived Variables X will be seen, refer back to step 1, page 4-18.
Section 4
4-19
Edition 3
Rev G
D
E
R
I
V
E
D
V
A
R
I
A
B
L
E
S
4. Press the
D
E
R
I
V
E
D
V
A
R
I
A
B
L
E
S
to advance to the next parameter, INPUT X.
X = INPUT as required
and specified by
FUNCTION selection.
DVxx INPUT X
NONE USED
Press the
Selections
NONE USED
IV1 IV2 IV3 IV4
IV5 IV6 IV7 IV8
PV1 PV2 PV3 PV4
DV1 DV2 DV3
DV4 DV5 DV6
DV7 DV8 DV9
DV10 DV11 DV12
CV1 CV2 CV3 CV4
CV5 CV6 CV7 CV8
CV9 CV10 CV11 CV12
TOTAL1
TOTAL2
TOTAL3
TOTAL4
SV1 SV2 SV3 SV4
5. Press the
to change, then
or
as required to pick desired choice,
then press the
.
Additional selections for use with controller option:
SP1 SP2 SP3 SP4
SP5 SP6 SP7 SP8
OUTPUT 11 OUTPUT12
OUTPUT 21 OUTPUT22
OUTPUT 31 OUTPUT32
OUTPUT 41 OUTPUT42
to advance to the next parameter, INPUT X, if it applies.
DVxx INPUT X
NONE USED
Press the
to change, then
or
Selections
as required to pick desired choice,
NONE USED
IV1 IV2 IV3 IV4
IV5 IV6 IV7 IV8
PV1 PV2 PV3 PV4
DV1 DV2 DV3
then press the
.
DV4 DV5 DV6
DV7 DV8 DV9
DV10 DV11 DV12
Additional selections for use with controller option:
CV1 CV2 CV3 CV4
SP1 SP2 SP3 SP4
CV5 CV6 CV7 CV8
SP5 SP6 SP7 SP8
CV9 CV10 CV11 CV12
OUTPUT 11 OUTPUT12
TOTAL1
TOTAL2
OUTPUT 21 OUTPUT22
TOTAL3
TOTAL4
OUTPUT 31 OUTPUT32
SV1 SV2 SV3 SV4
OUTPUT 41 OUTPUT42
Edition 3
Rev G
4-20
Section 4
6. Press the
to advance to the next parameter, INPUT X, if it applies.
DVxx INPUT X
NONE USED
Press the
to change, then
or
Selections
as required to pick desired choice,
NONE USED
IV1 IV2 IV3 IV4
IV5 IV6 IV7 IV8
PV1 PV2 PV3 PV4
DV1 DV2 DV3
then press the
.
DV4 DV5 DV6
DV7 DV8 DV9
DV10 DV11 DV12
Additional selections for use with controller option:
CV1 CV2 CV3 CV4
SP1 SP2 SP3 SP4
CV5 CV6 CV7 CV8
SP5 SP6 SP7 SP8
CV9 CV10 CV11 CV12
OUTPUT 11 OUTPUT12
TOTAL1
TOTAL2
OUTPUT 21 OUTPUT22
TOTAL3
TOTAL4
OUTPUT 31 OUTPUT32
SV1 SV2 SV3 SV4
OUTPUT 41 OUTPUT42
7. Press the
to advance to the next parameter, INPUT X, if it applies.
DVxx INPUT X
NONE USED
Press the
to change, then
or
Selections
as required to pick desired choice,
NONE USED
IV1 IV2 IV3 IV4
IV5 IV6 IV7 IV8
PV1 PV2 PV3 PV4
DV1 DV2 DV3
then press the
.
DV4 DV5 DV6
DV7 DV8 DV9
DV10 DV11 DV12
Additional selections for use with controller option:
CV1 CV2 CV3 CV4
SP1 SP2 SP3 SP4
CV5 CV6 CV7 CV8
SP5 SP6 SP7 SP8
CV9 CV10 CV11 CV12
OUTPUT 11 OUTPUT12
TOTAL1
TOTAL2
OUTPUT 21 OUTPUT22
TOTAL3
TOTAL4
OUTPUT 31 OUTPUT32
SV1 SV2 SV3 SV4
OUTPUT 41 OUTPUT42
Section 4
4-21
Edition 3
Rev G
D
E
R
I
V
E
D
V
A
R
I
A
B
L
E
S
8. Press the
to advance to the next parameter, INPUT X, if it applies.
DVxx INPUT X
D
E
R
I
V
E
D
NONE USED
Press the
to change, then
or
Selections
as required to pick desired choice,
NONE USED
IV1 IV2 IV3 IV4
IV5 IV6 IV7 IV8
PV1 PV2 PV3 PV4
DV1 DV2 DV3
then press the
.
DV4 DV5 DV6
DV7 DV8 DV9
DV10 DV11 DV12
Additional selections for use with controller option:
CV1 CV2 CV3 CV4
SP1 SP2 SP3 SP4
CV5 CV6 CV7 CV8
SP5 SP6 SP7 SP8
CV9 CV10 CV11 CV12
OUTPUT 11 OUTPUT12
TOTAL1
TOTAL2
OUTPUT 21 OUTPUT22
TOTAL3
TOTAL4
OUTPUT 31 OUTPUT32
SV1 SV2 SV3 SV4
OUTPUT 41 OUTPUT42
V
A
R
I
A
B
L
E
S
Edition 3
Rev G
4-22
Section 4
9. Press the
to advance to the next parameter, INPUT ACTUATOR (Only seen if an actuator is required
per the FUNCTION specified).
DVxx INPUT ACTUATOR
NONE / OFF
Selections
NONE / OFF
ON / CONTINUOUS
ANY ALARM
ANY PROCESS ALARM
A11 A12 A13 A14
A21 A22 A23 A24
A31 A32 A33 A34
A41 A42 A43 A44
INSTRUMENT ALARM
CHART FULL
OP INP 1 OP INP 2
OP INP 3 OP INP 4
OP INP 5 OP INP 6
OP INP 7 OP INP 8
OP INP 9 OP INP 10
OP INP 11 OP INP 12
CHART CHANGED
CHART ROTATION
TREND DATA COLLECT
ALT CHART SPEED
DA1 DA2 DA3
DA4 DA5 DA6
DA7 DA8 DA9
DA10 DA11 DA12
DA13 DA14 DA15
DA16 DA17 DA18
DA19 DA20 DA21
DA22 DA23 DA24
PRESET 1 PRESET 2
PRESET 3 PRESET 4
TOTAL PO1 TOTAL PO2
TOTAL PO3 TOTAL PO4
TIME 1 TIME/DATE 1
TIME 2 TIME/DATE 2
TIME 1 TO TIME 2
TIME/DATE 1 TO 2
TIMER1 TIMER 2
TIMER 3 TIMER 4
SW1 SW2 SW3 SW4
SW5 SW6 SW7 SW8
COMM TRIGGER 1
COMM TRIGGER 2
COMM TRIGGER 3
COMM TRIGGER 4
F1 F2 F3 F4 F5
RESET MOD ENTER
ON THE HOUR
DAY OF WEEK
DAY OF MONTH
RELAY 1
RELAY 2
RELAY 3
RELAY 4
RELAY 5
RELAY 6
RELAY 7
RELAY 8
Section 4
Press the
to change, then
or
as required to pick desired choice,
then press the
V
A
R
I
A
B
L
E
S
.
Additional selections for use with controller option:
OUTPUT 11 OUTPUT12
OUTPUT 21 OUTPUT22
OUTPUT 31 OUTPUT32
OUTPUT 41 OUTPUT42
CA1F1 CA1F2 CA1F3
CA1F4
CA1F5
CA2F1 CA2F2 CA2F3
CA2F4
CA2F5
CA3F1 CA3F2 CA3F3
CA3F4
CA3F5
CA4F1 CA4F2 CA4F3
CA4F4
CA4F5
4-23
D
E
R
I
V
E
D
Edition 3
Rev G
10. Press the
to advance to the next parameter, RESET ACTUATOR, (Only seen if a reset actuator is
required per the FUNCTION specified).
D
E
R
I
V
E
D
DVxx RESET ACTUATOR
NONE / OFF
Selections
NONE / OFF
ON / CONTINUOUS
ANY ALARM
ANY PROCESS ALARM
A11 A12 A13 A14
A21 A22 A23 A24
A31 A32 A33 A34
A41 A42 A43 A44
INSTRUMENT ALARM
CHART FULL
OP INP 1 OP INP 2
OP INP 3 OP INP 4
OP INP 5 OP INP 6
OP INP 7 OP INP 8
OP INP 9 OP INP 10
OP INP 11 OP INP 12
CHART CHANGED
CHART ROTATION
TREND DATA COLLECT
ALT CHART SPEED
DA1 DA2 DA3
DA4 DA5 DA6
DA7 DA8 DA9
DA10 DA11 DA12
DA13 DA14 DA15
DA16 DA17 DA18
DA19 DA20 DA21
DA22 DA23 DA24
PRESET 1 PRESET 2
PRESET 3 PRESET 4
TOTAL PO1 TOTAL PO2
TOTAL PO3 TOTAL PO4
TIME 1 TIME/DATE 1
TIME 2 TIME/DATE 2
TIME 1 TO TIME 2
TIME/DATE 1 TO 2
TIMER1 TIMER 2
TIMER 3 TIMER 4
SW1 SW2 SW3 SW4
SW5 SW6 SW7 SW8
COMM TRIGGER 1
COMM TRIGGER 2
COMM TRIGGER 3
COMM TRIGGER 4
F1 F2 F3 F4 F5
RESET MOD ENTER
ON THE HOUR
DAY OF WEEK
DAY OF MONTH
RELAY 1
RELAY 2
RELAY 3
RELAY 4
RELAY 5
RELAY 6
RELAY 7
RELAY 8
V
A
R
I
A
B
L
E
S
Edition 3
Rev G
Press the
to change, then
or
as required to pick desired choice,
then press the
4-24
.
Section 4
11. Press the
to advance to the next parameter, DISPLAY UNITS.
DVxx DISPLAY UNITS
OTHER
Press the
Selections
°C °F OTHER
12. Press the
to change, then
desired choice, then press the
to
.
to advance to the next parameter, UNITS DESCRIP (only seen if OTHER was selected as
DISPLAY UNITS)
DVxx UNITS DESCRIP.
Refer to Section 3.4.2 Changing Text, page 3-3 for
instructions.
Selections
Text
13. Press the
to advance to the next parameter, DECIMAL POSITION.
DVxx DECIMAL POSIT.
0
Press the
to change, then
desired value, then press the
Section 4
Selections
0 to 4
to
.
4-25
Edition 3
Rev G
D
E
R
I
V
E
D
V
A
R
I
A
B
L
E
S
14. Press the
to advance to the next parameter, VALUE FILTER.
DVxx VALUE FILTER
D
E
R
I
V
E
D
V
A
R
I
A
B
L
E
S
0 SECONDS
Press the
Selections
0 to 9999 seconds
15. Press the
to change, then
to pick desired value, then press the
.
to advance to the next parameter, DISPLAY OPTION.
DVxx DISPLAY OPTION
IN BOTH MODES
Press the
Selections
NOT DISPLAYED
IN CONTINUOUS MODE
IN SEQUENTIAL MODE
IN BOTH MODES
16. Press the
to change, then
to pick
desired choice, then press the
.
to advance to the next parameter, DISPLAY FILTER.
DVxx DISPLAY FILTER
0 SECONDS
Selections
0 to 9999 seconds
17. Press the
Press the
to change, then
desired value, then press the
to pick
.
and the display advances to the next derived input to be programmed. Refer to the begin-
ning of this section, page 4-18.
Edition 3
Rev G
4-26
Section 4
DERIVED VARIABLE FUNCTION
To simplify formulas or make them easier to read, various letters or abbreviations are used for the inputs, such as
A, B, X, or TEMP. During configuration, a descriptive prompt will appear on line 1, as specified by "PROMPT:" for
each input, while the source of the input is selected via a choice of inputs on line 2.
A Derived Variable can have up to five value inputs, one actuator input, and a reset actuator. The description for
each Derived Variable Function identifies its corresponding inputs. Input choices set to NONE USED will evaluate
to zero unless specified otherwise.
Unless specifically stated, it is assumed that all values have been converted to the proper scale and units before
being used as an input. In some cases, temperatures will be automatically converted to the required units as
specified. Should a divide by zero be attempted, the result will be set to 99999.
1.
SUB, MUL, DIV, EXP, LOG 10, LOG e, POWER 10, POWER e
INPUT 1:
INPUT 2:
ACTUATOR:
RESET:
OUTPUT:
A
B
n/a
n/a
= A-B
= A*B
= A/B
= A**B
= B*LOG(A)
= B*LN (A)
= B*10**A
= B*e**A
PROMPT:
PROMPT:
DVxx INPUT A
DVxx INPUT B
for SUB
for MUL
for DIV
for EXP
for LOG 10
for LOG e
for POWER 10
for POWER e
- Subtraction
- Multiplication
- Division
- Exponent
- Log to the Base 10
- Natural Log
- Power of 10
- Power of e
For LOG 10, LOG e, POWER 10, and POWER e, if INPUT 2 is "NOT USED" then B=1.
2.
LIN - LINEAR
INPUT 1:
INPUT 2:
INPUT 3:
ACTUATOR:
RESET:
OUTPUT:
3.
Section 4
X
A
B
n/a
n/a
= A*X+B
PROMPT:
PROMPT:
PROMPT:
DVxx INPUT X
DVxx INPUT A
DVxx INPUT B
CUSTOM CURVE 1, through CUSTOM CURVE 4
INPUT 1:
ACTUATOR:
RESET:
OUTPUT:
X
PROMPT:
DVxx INPUT
n/a
n/a
= Extrapolated result using the corresponding CUSTOM CURVE.
NOTES:
The OUTPUT will be limited by the output values of the first and last POINT PAIR entries.
4-27
Edition 3
Rev G
4.
POLYNOMIAL
INPUT 1:
INPUT 2:
INPUT 3:
INPUT 4:
INPUT 5:
ACTUATOR:
RESET:
OUTPUT:
5.
X
PROMPT:
A
PROMPT:
B
PROMPT:
C
PROMPT:
D
PROMPT:
n/a
n/a
= A*X**3 + B*X**2 + C*X + D
DVxx INPUT X
DVxx INPUT A
DVxx INPUT B
DVxx INPUT C
DVxx INPUT D
LINEAR MASS FLOW - AGA 3 LINEAER GAS FLOW
INPUT 1:
INPUT 2:
INPUT 3:
INPUT 4:
INPUT 5:
ACTUATOR:
RESET:
OUTPUT:
F
PROMPT:
PRES
PROMPT:
TEMPF
PROMPT:
COMP
PROMPT:
C
PROMPT:
n/a
n/a
=C*F*SQRT (PRES/(TEMPR*COMP))
where: TMPR = TEMPF + 459.67
DVxx RAW FLOW
DVxx STATIC PRES ABS
DVxx FLOW TEMP°F
DVxx COMP. CORRECT.
DVxx SCALING CONST.
If INPUT 1 is "NOT USED", then F=1
If INPUT 2 is "NOT USED", then PRES=1
If INPUT 3 is "NOT USED", then TEMPR=1 (not TEMPF)
If INPUT 4 is "NOT USED", then COMP=1
If INPUT 5 is "NOT USED", then C=1
NOTES:
F - Raw Linear Fow Input
PRES - Static Pressure - must be ABSOLUTE
TEMPF - Flow Temperature - must be degrees F
COMP - Compressibility Correction
C - Scaling Constant
This function converts TEMP from degrees F to degrees R in the equation.
6.
DP MASS FLOW - AGA 3 DP GAS FLOW
INPUT 1:
INPUT 2:
INPUT 3:
INPUT 4:
INPUT 5:
ACTUATOR:
RESET:
OUTPUT:
DP
PROMPT:
DVxx DIFFERENT. PRES
PRES
PROMPT:
DVxx STATIC PRES ABS
TEMPF
PROMPT:
DVxx FLOW TEMP °F
COMP
PROMPT:
DVxx COMP. CORRECT.
C
PROMPT:
DVxx SCALING CONST.
n/a
n/a
= C*SQRT ((DP*PRES) / (TEMPR*COMP))
where TEMPR = TEMPF + 459.67)
If INPUT 1 is "NOT USED", then DP=1
If INPUT 2 is "NOT USED", then PRES=1
If INPUT 3 is "NOT USED", then TEMPR=1 (not TEMPF)
If INPUT 4 is "NOT USED", then COMP=1
If INPUT 5 is "NOT USED", then C=1
Edition 3
Rev G
4-28
Section 4
NOTES:
DP - Differential Pressure
PRES - Static Pressure - must be ABSOLUTE
TEMPF - Flow Temperature - must be degrees F
COMP - Compressibility Correction
C - Scaling Constant
This function converts TEMP from degrees F to degrees R in the equation.
7.
RELATIVE HUMIDITY
INPUT 1:
INPUT 2:
INPUT 3:
ACTUATOR:
RESET:
OUTPUT:
DBT
PROMPT:
DVxx DRY BULB TEMP°F
WBT
PROMPT:
DVxx WET BULB TEMP°F
BARO
PROMPT:
DVxx BARO. PRES "Hg
n/a
n/a
= RELATIVE HUMIDITY in PERCENT (0 to 100 typ)
If INPUT 3 is "NOT USED", then BARO=29.921
NOTES:
8.
DBT - DRY BULB TEMPERATURE - must be in degrees F
WBT - WET BULB TEMPERATURE - must be in degrees F
BARO - ATMOSPHERIC PRESSURE - must be in "Hg (inches of Mercury)
Fo VALUE - STERILIZATION CONSTANT Fo
INPUT 1:
INPUT 2:
INPUT 3:
ACTUATOR:
RESET:
OUTPUT:
INTEMP
PROMPT:
DVxx INPUT TEMP
STEMP
PROMPT:
DVxx STERILIZE TEMP
Z
PROMPT:
DVxx "Z" VALUE
n/a
YES
PROMPT:
DVxx RESET ACTUATOR
= DV + (10**A)/60
where: A=(INTEMP - STEMP) / Z
DV is the previous result
NOTES:
INTEMP - Input Temperature
STEMP - Sterilizing Temperature
Z - "Z" Value
The TEMPERATURE can be degrees F or C, but the "Z" value must take this into account.
Whenever RESET is active, DV will be set to zero.
The units of the resultant DV is MINUTES
This function is calculated once a second.
9.
ZRO2 - ZIRCONIA OXYGEN SENSOR
INPUT 1:
INPUT 2:
INPUT 3:
ACTUATOR:
RESET:
OUTPUT:
PP
EMF
TEMP
n//a
n/a
= PP/(10**B)
PROMPT:
PROMPT:
PROMPT:
DVxx PARTIAL PRES
DVxx PROBE EMF mV
DVxx PROBE TEMP °C
NOTES:
PP - Partial Pressure - must be in Percent
EMF - Probe EMF - must be Millivolts
TEMP - Probe Temperature - must be degrees C
where: B=EMF/(0.0496* (TEMP+273.18))
This function coverts TEMP from degrees C to degrees K in the equation
Section 4
4-29
Edition 3
Rev G
10.
HIGH SELECT and LOW SELECT
INPUT 1:
INPUT 2:
ACTUATOR:
RESET:
OUTPUT:
11.
HIGH PEAK
INPUT 1:
ACTUATOR:
RESET:
OUTPUT:
12.
YES
PROMPT:
DVxx ACTUATOR
n/a
= 0.0 if the state of the Selected Actuator is false
= 1.0 if the state of the Selected Actuator is true.
CONVERT F TO C
INPUT 1:
ACTUATOR:
RESET:
OUTPUT:
Edition 3
Rev G
A
PROMPT:
DVxx INPUT A
B
PROMPT:
DVxx INPUT B
YES
PROMPT:
DVxx SELECT B ACTUAT
n/a
= A if the state of the Selected Actuator is false.
= B if the state of the Selected Actuator is true.
CONVERT ACTUATOR
ACTUATOR:
RESET:
OUTPUT:
16.
A
PROMPT:
DVxx INPUT
YES
PROMPT:
DVxx TRACK ACTUATOR
n/a
= Current value of A if the state of the Selected Actuator is true
= Last value of A when the state of the Selected Actuator changed from true to false
1 of 2 SELECTOR
INPUT 1:
INPUT 2:
ACTUATOR:
RESET:
OUTPUT:
15.
A
PROMPT:
DVxx INPUT
n/a
YES
PROMPT:
DVXX RESET ACTUATOR
= LOWEST VALUE of A since last RESET.
Whenever RESET is active, the LOWEST VALUE will be the current value of A.
TRACK AND HOLD
INPUT 1:
ACTUATOR:
RESET:
OUTPUT:
14.
A
PROMPT:
DVXX INPUT
n/a
YES
PROMPT:
DVxx RESET ACTUATOR
= HIGHEST VALUE of A since last RESET
Whenever RESET is active, the HIGHEST VALUE will be the current value of A.
LOW PEAK
INPUT 1:
ACTUATOR:
RESET:
OUTPUT:
13.
A
PROMPT:
DVxx INPUT A
B
PROMPT:
DVxx INPUT B
n/a
n/a
= HIGHER of A and B for HIGH SELECT
= LOWER of A and B for LOW SELECT
A
n/a
n/a
= (A-32) * 5/9
PROMPT:
DVxx INPUT°F
4-30
Section 4
17.
CONVERT C TO F
INPUT 1:
ACTUATOR:
RESET:
OUTPUT:
18.
A
PROMPT:
n/a
n/a
= (A * 9/5) +32
DVxx INPUT°C
F
PROMPT:
TEMPH
PROMPT:
TEMPL
PROMPT:
C
PROMPT:
n/a
n/a
= C*F* (TEMPH-TEMPL)
DVxx FLOW
DVxx HIGHER TEMP
DVxx LOWER TEMP
DVxx SCALING CONST.
BTU
INPUT 1:
INPUT 2:
INPUT 3:
INPUT 4:
ACTUATOR:
RESET:
OUTPUT:
If INPUT 4 is "NOT USED", then C=1
NOTES:
F - Flow
TEMPH - Higher Temperature for DeltaT
TEMPL - Lower Temperature for DeltaT
C - Scaling Constant
The Temperatures can be degrees F or C, but the scaling constant must take this into
account.
19.
ADD
INPUT 1:
INPUT 2:
INPUT 3:
INPUT 4:
ACTUATOR:
RESET:
OUTPUT:
20.
A
B
C
D
n/a
n/a
= A+B+C+D
PROMPT:
PROMPT:
PROMPT:
PROMPT:
DVxx INPUT 1
DVxx INPUT 2
DVxx INPUT 3
DVxx INPUT 4
A
PROMPT:
B
PROMPT:
C
PROMPT:
D
PROMPT:
n/a
n/a
= (A+B+C+D)/E
DVxx INPUT 1
DVxx INPUT 2
DVxx INPUT 3
DVxx INPUT 4
AVG
INPUT 1:
INPUT 2:
INPUT 3:
INPUT 4:
ACTUATOR:
RESET:
OUTPUT:
Where E is the number of inputs that are CONFIGURED.
Section 4
4-31
Edition 3
Rev G
4.1.5 PROCESS VARIABLES
Process Variables define variables for use with alarms and/or control outputs
P
R
O
C
E
S
S
V
A
R
I
A
B
L
E
S
From the Normal Display, press the
until CONFIGURATION is seen in the lower display line. If PASSWORD appears in the lower display line, the correct "password" will need to be entered before access to Configuration is allowed. If CONFIGURATION is not displayed, then Configuration has been disabled. Refer to Section
9, Enables and Passwords, for instructions to enable Configuration.
With CONFIGURATION in the display, press the
the lower display line.
1. Press the
, then the
until PROCESS VARIABLES appears in
to display PROCESS VALUE NUMBER.
PROCESS VALUE NUMBER
1
Press the
to change, then
desired number, then press the
2. Press the
to
Selections
1 to 4
.
to advance to the next parameter, COPY/INITIALIZE.
PVx COPY / INITIALIZE
NO
Selections
NO or YES
Press the
to change, then
desired choice, then press the
to
.
Select YES if the parameters to be programmed are the same as another PROCESS VARIABLE already programmed.
Edition 3
Rev G
4-32
Section 4
If selection is NO, proceed to step 3.
If selection is YES:
P
R
O
C
E
S
S
PVx COPY FROM PV
(0 = INITIALIZE)
Press the
X
Process Variable to be copied from
0 = FACTORY DEFAULT
to change to the process
V
A
R
I
A
B
L
E
S
variable to be copied from.
3. Press the
to advance to the next parameter, DISPLAY TAG.
PVx DISPLAY TAG
PROCESS VAL
Selections
Text
X
Refer to Section 3.4.2 Changing Text, page 3-3 for
instructions.
Section 4
4-33
Edition 3
Rev G
4. Press the
to advance to the next parameter, INPUT TYPE.
PVx INPUT
P
R
O
C
E
S
S
V
A
R
I
A
B
L
E
S
NONE USED
Press the
Selections
NONE USED
IV1 IV2 IV3 IV4
IV5 IV6 IV7 IV8
PV1 PV2 PV3 PV4
DV1 DV2 DV3
DV4 DV5 DV6
DV7 DV8 DV9
DV10 DV11 DV12
CV1 CV2 CV3 CV4
CV5 CV6 CV7 CV8
CV9 CV10 CV11 CV12
TOTAL1 TOTAL2
TOTAL3 TOTAL4
SV1 SV2 SV3 SV4
to change, then
,
to desired choice, then press
the
.
Additional selections for use with controller option:
SP1 SP2 SP3 SP4
SP5 SP6 SP7 SP8
OUTPUT 11 OUTPUT12
OUTPUT 21 OUTPUT22
OUTPUT 31 OUTPUT32
OUTPUT 41 OUTPUT42
If NONE USED was selected, no other prompts for PROCESS VALUE X will be seen. Refer back to step 1,
page 4-32.
5. Press the
to advance to the next parameter, DISPLAY UNITS.
PVx DISPLAY UNITS
°F
Selections
°C °F OTHER
Press the
to change, then
desired choice, then press the
Edition 3
Rev G
4-34
to
.
Section 4
6. If OTHER was selected in DISPLAY UNITS, press the
to advance to the next parameter, OTHER
UNITS.
PVx OTHER UNITS
°F
Refer to Section 3.4.2 Changing Text, page 3-3 for
Selections
Text
7. Press the
instructions.
V
A
R
I
A
B
L
E
S
to advance to the next parameter, DECIMAL POSITION.
PV DECIMAL POSITION
0
Press the
to change, then
desired value, then press the
8. Press the
to
Selections
0 to 4
.
to advance to the next parameter, VALUE FILTER.
PVx VALUE FILTER
0 SECONDS
Selections
0 to 9999 seconds
Section 4
Press the
to change, then
desired value, then press the
4-35
P
R
O
C
E
S
S
to
.
Edition 3
Rev G
9. Press the
PVx DISPLAY OPTION
P
R
O
C
E
S
S
V
A
R
I
A
B
L
E
S
to advance to the next parameter, DISPLAY OPTION.
IN BOTH MODES
Selections
NOT DISPLAYED
IN CONTINUOUS MODE
IN SEQUENTIAL MODE
IN BOTH MODES
10. Press the
Press the
to change, then
to
desired choice, then press the
.
to advance to the next parameter, DISPLAY FILTER.
PVx DISPLAY FILTER
0 SECONDS
Selections
0 to 9999 seconds
Edition 3
Rev G
Press the
to change, then
desired value, then press the
4-36
to
.
Section 4
11. Press the
to advance to the next parameter, ALARM 1 TYPE.
Ax1 ALARM TYPE
OFF
Selections for recorder only
OFF
PROCESS - HIGH
Additional selections for use
PROCESS - LOW
with controller option
RATE - RISING
BAND - WITHIN
RATE - FALLING
BAND - OUTSIDE
DEVIATION - ABOVE
DEVIATION - BELOW
CONTROL LOOP OPEN*
P
R
O
C
E
S
S
Note: Process Values
must have been defined
previously in order for
ALARM prompts to
appear.
Press the
to change, then
to
desired value, then press the .
* When CONTROL LOOP OPEN is selected for ALARM TYPE and NON PID is selected for CONTROL TYPE (CONTROLLERS section of
CONFIGURATION), prompt LOOP ALARM TYPE will be displayed
The CONTROL LOOP ALARM is a special alarm which detects faults in the control feedback loop by continuously
monitoring process variable response to the control output(s).
The Loop Alarm facility repeatedly checks the control output(s) for saturation. For PID, saturation is either or both
outputs being at the maximum or minimum. For On/Off control, saturation is the control output being ON. If an
output is found to be in saturation, a timer is started; thereafter, if the saturated output has not caused the process
variable to be corrected by a pre-determined amount (V) after a time (Loop Alarm Time) has elapsed, the Loop
Alarm goes active. Subsequently, the Loop Alarm facility repeatedly checks the process variable and the control
output(s). When the process variable starts to change the value in the correct sense, or when the output comes
out of saturation, the Loop Alarm is de-activated.
For PID contron, the internal Loop Alarm Time is always set to twice the inverse of the reset value (Integral Time
Constant) parameter. For ON/OFF control, the value of the LOOP ALARM TIME parameter is used..
The value of V is dependant upon the input type:
Temperature:
Linear Ranges:
2oC or 2oF
10 least significant display units
For a single output controller, the saturation condition is simply 0% and OUT 1 MAX %. For dual output controllers, the saturation condition considers the combination of the two output types, reverse or direct, and responds
accordingly.
NOTES: Correct operation of the Loop Alarm depends upon reasonably accurate PID tunings and the Loop
Alarm is automatically disabled during manual control. Upon exit from manual control, the Loop Alarm is automatically re-enabled (if selected).
Section 4
4-37
Edition 3
Rev G
V
A
R
I
A
B
L
E
S
12. Press the
Ax1 TIME BASE
P
R
O
C
E
S
S
V
A
R
I
A
B
L
E
S
to advance to the next parameter, ALARM 1 TIME BASE (only seen if Ax1 TYPE is RATE).
PER SEC
Selections
PER SEC PER MIN
PER HOUR PER DAY
Press the
,
to desired choice, then press
the
13. Press the
to change, then
.
to advance to the next parameter, ALARM 1 SAMPLE PERIOD (only seen if Ax1 TYPE is
RATE).
Ax1 SAMPLE PERIOD
10 SECONDS
Selections
1 to 9999 seconds
14. Press the
Press the
to change, then
desired value, then press the
to
.
to advance to the next parameter, ALARM 1 HYSTERESIS.
Ax1 HYSTERESIS
Note: Units correspond
to Units configured in
Process Variables.
3 units
Selections
± 999999
(decimal position = 0)
± 9.9999
(decimal position = 4)
Press the
to change, then
desired value, then press the
to
.
NOTE: If RATE Alarm is selected, Hysteresis equals RATE in units/TIME BASE.
Edition 3
Rev G
4-38
Section 4
15. Press the
to advance to the next parameter, ALARM 2 TYPE.
Ax2 ALARM TYPE
OFF
Selections for recorder only
OFF
PROCESS - HIGH
Additional selections for use
PROCESS - LOW
with controller option
RATE - RISING
BAND - WITHIN
RATE - FALLING
BAND - OUTSIDE
DEVIATION - ABOVE
DEVIATION - BELOW
CONTROL LOOP OPEN*
Press the
to change, then
desired choice, then press the
to
.
* When CONTROL LOOP OPEN is selected for ALARM TYPE and NON PID is selected for CONTROL TYPE (CONTROLLERS section of
CONFIGURATION), prompt LOOP ALARM TYPE will be displayed
16. Press the
to advance to the next parameter, ALARM 2 TIME BASE (only seen if Ax2 TYPE is
RATE).
Ax2 TIME BASE
PER SEC
Selections
PER SEC PER MIN
PER HOUR PER DAY
Press the
,
to desired choice, then press
the
Section 4
to change, then
4-39
.
Edition 3
Rev G
P
R
O
C
E
S
S
V
A
R
I
A
B
L
E
S
17. Press the
to advance to the next parameter, ALARM 2 SAMPLE PERIOD (only seen if Ax2 TYPE is
RATE).
Ax2 SAMPLE PERIOD
P
R
O
C
E
S
S
10 SECONDS
Press the
Selections
1 to 9999 seconds
18. Press the
V
A
R
I
A
B
L
E
S
to change, then
desired value, then press the
to
.
to advance to the next parameter, ALARM 2 HYSTERESIS.
Ax2 HYSTERESIS
Note: Units correspond
to units configured in
Process Variables.
3 units
Selections
± 999999
(decimal position = 0)
± 9.9999
(decimal position = 4)
Press the
to change, then
desired value, then press the
to
.
NOTE: If RATE Alarm is selected, Hysteresis equals RATE in units/TIME BASE.
19. Press the
to advance to the next parameter, ALARM 3 TYPE.
Ax3 ALARM TYPE
OFF
Selections for recorder only
OFF
PROCESS - HIGH
Additional selections for use
PROCESS - LOW
with controller option
RATE - RISING
BAND - WITHIN
RATE - FALLING
BAND - OUTSIDE
DEVIATION - ABOVE
DEVIATION - BELOW
CONTROL LOOP OPEN*
Press the
to change, then
desired choice, then press the
to
.
* When CONTROL LOOP OPEN is selected for ALARM TYPE and NON PID is selected for CONTROL TYPE (CONTROLLERS section of
CONFIGURATION), prompt LOOP ALARM TYPE will be displayed.
Edition 3
Rev G
4-40
Section 4
20. Press the
to advance to the next parameter, ALARM 3 TIME BASE (only seen if Ax3 TYPE is RATE).
Ax3 TIME BASE
P
R
O
C
E
S
S
PER SEC
Selections
PER SEC PER MIN
PER HOUR PER DAY
Press the
,
to desired choice, then press
the
21. Press the
to change, then
.
to advance to the next parameter, ALARM 3 SAMPLE PERIOD (only seen if Ax3 TYPE is
RATE).
Ax3 SAMPLE PERIOD
10 SECONDS
Selections
1 to 9999 seconds
22. Press the
Press the
to change, then
desired value, then press the
to
.
to advance to the next parameter, ALARM 3 HYSTERESIS.
Note: Units correspond
to Units configured in
Process Variables.
Ax3 HYSTERESIS
3 units
Selections
± 999999
(decimal position = 0)
± 9.9999
(decimal position = 4)
Press the
to change, then
desired value, then press the
to
.
NOTE: If RATE Alarm is selected, Hysteresis equals RATE in units/TIME BASE.
Section 4
4-41
Edition 3
Rev G
V
A
R
I
A
B
L
E
S
23. Press the
P
R
O
C
E
S
S
V
A
R
I
A
B
L
E
S
to advance to the next parameter, ALARM 4 TYPE.
Ax4 ALARM TYPE
OFF
Selections for recorder only
OFF
PROCESS - HIGH
Additional selections for use
PROCESS - LOW
with controller option
RATE - RISING
BAND - WITHIN
RATE - FALLING
BAND - OUTSIDE
DEVIATION - ABOVE
DEVIATION - BELOW
CONTROL LOOP OPEN*
Press the
to change, then
desired choice, then press the
to
.
* When CONTROL LOOP OPEN is selected for ALARM TYPE and NON PID is selected for CONTROL TYPE (CONTROLLERS section of
CONFIGURATION), prompt LOOP ALARM TYPE will be displayed
24. Press the
to advance to the next parameter, ALARM 4 TIME BASE (only seen if Ax4 TYPE is RATE).
Ax4 TIME BASE
PER SEC
Selections
PER SEC PER MIN
PER HOUR PER DAY
Press the
,
to desired choice, then press
the
Edition 3
Rev G
to change, then
4-42
.
Section 4
25. Press the
to advance to the next parameter, ALARM 4 SAMPLE PERIOD (only seen if Ax4 TYPE is
RATE).
Ax4 SAMPLE PERIOD
10 SECONDS
Press the
Selections
1 to 9999 seconds
26. Press the
to change, then
desired value, then press the
to
.
V
A
R
I
A
B
L
E
S
to advance to the next parameter, ALARM 4 HYSTERESIS.
Ax4 HYSTERESIS
Note: Units correspond
to Units configured in
Process Variables.
3 units
Selections
± 999999
(decimal position = 0)
± 9.9999
(decimal position = 4)
Press the
to change, then
desired value, then press the
to
.
NOTE: If RATE Alarm is selected, Hysteresis equals RATE in units/TIME BASE.
Section 4
4-43
P
R
O
C
E
S
S
Edition 3
Rev G
27. Press the
to advance to the next parameter, LOOP ALARM TIME (only seen if CONTROL LOOP
OPEN selected as ALARM TYPE and ON/OFF selected as CONTROL TYPE).
P
R
O
C
E
S
S
PVx LOOP ALARM TIME
60 SECONDS
Press the
V
A
R
I
A
B
L
E
S
to change, then
to
Selections
1 - 9999
desired number, then press the
28. Press the
.
to advance to the next parameter, ALARM INHIBIT (only seen if an Alarm has been
configured).
PVx LOOP ALARM INHIBIT
NO
Press the
to change, then
to
Selections
NO YES
desired choices, then press the
.
On power-up, an "alarm" condition may occur, based on the alarm value, the process variable value and, if
appropriate to the alarm type, the (active) setpoint value. This would normally activate the alarm; however; if the
pertinent alarm is inhibited, the alarm indication is suppressed and the alarm will remain inactive. This will
prevail until the "alarm" condition returns to the "inactive" state, whereafter the alarm will operate normally.
29. Press the
and the display advances to the next process variable input to be programmed. Refer to
the beginning of this section, page 4-32.
Edition 3
Rev G
4-44
Section 4
4.1.6 RECORDERS
Recorders defines values being recorded, tags, method, source of data and chart divisions and zoning.
In the Normal Display, press the
until CONFIGURATION is seen in the lower display line. If PASSWORD
appears in the lower display line, the correct "password" will need to be entered before access to Configuration is
allowed. If CONFIGURATION is not displayed, then Configuration has been disabled. Refer to Section 9,
Enables and Passwords, for instructions to enable Configuration.
With CONFIGURATION in the display, press the
display line.
1. Press the
, then the
until RECORDERS appears in the lower
to display RECORDER NUMBER.
RECORDER NUMBER
1
Press the
to change, then
desired number, then press the
2. Press the
to
Selections
1 to 4
.
to advance to the next parameter, COPY/INITIALIZE.
Rx COPY / INITIALIZE
NO
Selections
NO YES
Press the
to change, then
desired choice, then press the
to
.
Choose YES if the parameters to be programmed are the same as another RECORDER already programmed.
Section 4
4-45
Edition 3
Rev G
R
E
C
O
R
D
E
R
S
If selection was NO, proceed to step 3.
If selection was YES:
R
E
C
O
R
D
E
R
S
Rs COPY FROM RECRDER
(0 = INITIALIZE)
Press the
X
to change to the recorder
Recorder to be copied from
0 = FACTORY DEFAULT
number to be copied from.
3. Press the
to advance to the next parameter, RECORDER TAG.
Rx RECORDER TAG
Selections
Text
Refer to Section 3.4.2 Changing Text, page 3-3 for
instructions.
Edition 3
Rev G
4-46
Section 4
4. Press the
to advance to the next parameter, VALUE TO RECORD.
Rx VALUE TO RECORD
R
E
C
O
R
D
E
R
S
NONE USED
Press the
Selections
NONE USED
IV1 IV2 IV3 IV4
IV5 IV6 IV7 IV8
PV1 PV2 PV3 PV4
DV1 DV2 DV3
DV4 DV5 DV6
DV7 DV8 DV9
DV10 DV11 DV12
CV1 CV2 CV3 CV4
CV5 CV6 CV7 CV8
CV9 CV10 CV11 CV12
TOTAL1 TOTAL2
TOTAL3 TOTAL4
SV1 SV2 SV3 SV4
to change, then
,
to desired choice, then press
the
.
Additional selections for use with controller option:
SP1 SP2 SP3 SP4
SP5 SP6 SP7 SP8
OUTPUT 11 OUTPUT12
OUTPUT 21 OUTPUT22
OUTPUT 31 OUTPUT32
OUTPUT 41 OUTPUT42
If NONE USED was selected, no other prompts for Recorder X will be seen. Refer back to step 1, page 443.
5. Press the
to advance to the next parameter, PEN/COLOR.
Rx PEN/COLOR
(see note)
Selections
BLUE
GREEN
RED
BLACK
VIOLET
Press the
to change, then
desired choice, then press the
to
.
NOTE: Default for Pen varies with Recorder Number: Pen 1 Red, Pen 2 Green, Pen 3 Blue, and Pen 4 Black or
Violet (depending on color specified when ordered). Valid choice of color depends on number of colors specified
when ordered. One color - Red, Two colors - Red, Green, Three colors - Red, Green, Blue or Four colors - Red,
Green, Blue, Black or Violet.
Section 4
4-47
Edition 3
Rev G
6. Press the
to advance to the next parameter, RECORDING METHOD.
Rx RECORDING METHOD
R
E
C
O
R
D
E
R
S
DRAG - MIN TO MAX
Press the
Selections
INSTANTANEOUS VALUES
CONNECT THE VALUES
DRAG - MIN TO MAX
AVERAGE VALUES
CONNECT THE AVERAGES
7. Press the
to change, then
desired choice, then press the
to
.
to advance to the next parameter, DECIMAL POSITION.
Rx DECIMAL POSITION
0
Press the
to change, then
to
desired number, then press the
8. Press the
Selections
0 to 4
.
to advance to the next parameter, CHART DIVISIONS.
Must be programmed
before any subsequent
prompts
Rx CHART DIVISIONS
(RINGS)
100
Selections
10 to 200
Press the
to change, then
desired value, then press the
Edition 3
Rev G
to
.
4-48
Section 4
9. Press the
to advance to the next parameter, ZONE 1 LOW.
Rx ZONE 1 LOW
R
E
C
O
R
D
E
R
S
DIVISION 0
Press the
to change, then
desired value, then press the
10. Press the
Selections
0 to 200
to
.
to advance to the next parameter, ZONE 1 HIGH.
Rx ZONE 1 HIGH
DIVISION 100
Press the
to change, then
desired digit, then
press the
Section 4
Selections
0 to 200
to
to desired value, then
.
4-49
Edition 3
Rev G
11. Press the
to advance to the next parameter, SPAN 1 LOW.
Rx SPAN 1 LOW
R
E
C
O
R
D
E
R
S
0 units
Press the
to change, then
desired number, then press the
then to
Selections
± 999999
(decimal position = 0)
± 9.9999
(decimal position = 4)
.
Units correspond to Units configured in corresponding Value to Record
parameter, previously selected.
12. Press the
to advance to the next parameter, SPAN 1 HIGH.
Rx SPAN 1 HIGH
100 units
Press the
to change, then
desired number, then press the
Selections
± 999999
(decimal position = 0)
± 9.9999
(decimal position = 4)
then to
.
Units correspond to Units configured in corresponding Value to Record
parameter, previously selected.
Edition 3
Rev G
4-50
Section 4
13. Press the
to advance to the next parameter, SCALE 1 INTERVAL.
Rx SCALE 1 INTERVAL
R
E
C
O
R
D
E
R
S
10 DIVISIONS
Press the
to change, then
desired number, then press the
14. Press the
then to
Selections
0 to 200
0 = NO SCALES
.
to advance to the next parameter, ZONE 2 HIGH.
Rx ZONE 2 HIGH
DIVISION 0
Press the
to change, then
desired number, then press the
Section 4
Selections
0 to 200
0 = SINGLE ZONE
to
.
4-51
Edition 3
Rev G
15. Press the
to advance to the next parameter, SPAN 2 HIGH (Only if Zone 2 HIGH ≠ 0).
Rx SPAN 2 HIGH
R
E
C
O
R
D
E
R
S
0 units
Press the
to change, then
desired number, then press the
then to
Selections
± 999999
(decimal position = 0)
± 9.9999
(decimal position = 4)
.
Units correspond to Units configured in corresponding Value to Record
parameter, previously selected.
16. Press the
to advance to the next parameter, SCALE 2 INTERVAL (Only if Zone 2 HIGH ≠ 0).
Rx SCALE 2 INTERVAL
10 DIVISIONS
Press the
to change, then
desired number, then press the
Edition 3
Rev G
Selections
0 to 200
0 = NO SCALES
then to
.
4-52
Section 4
17. Press the
to advance to the next parameter, POSITION ON ERROR (pen location in Chart Divisions on
an ERROR condition).
R
E
C
O
R
D
E
R
S
Rx POSITION ON ERROR
DIVISION
Press the
to change, then
desired number, then press the
18. Press the
100
Selections
0 to 200
then to
.
to advance to the next parameter, FILTER.
Rx FILTER
0 SECONDS
Selections
0 to 9999
Press the
to change, then
desired value then press the
19. Press the
to
.
and the display advances to the next recorder variable to be programmed. Refer to the
beginning of this section, page 4-43.
Section 4
4-53
Edition 3
Rev G
4.1.7 TOTALIZERS
Totalizers are seen only if TOTALIZATION was specified and present in the model number order matrix.
T
O
T
A
L
I
Z
E
R
S
From the Normal Display, press
the until CONFIGURATION is seen in the lower display line. If PASSWORD appears in the lower display line, the correct "password" will need to be entered before access to Configuration is allowed. If CONFIGURATION is not displayed, then Configuration has been disabled. Refer to Section
9, Enables and Passwords, for instructions to enable Configuration.
With CONFIGURATION in the display, press the
display line.
1. Press the
, then the
until TOTALIZERS appears in the lower
to display TOTALIZER NUMBER.
TOTALIZER NUMBER
1
Press the
to change, then
desired number, then press the
2. Press the
to
Selections
1 to 4
.
to advance to the next parameter, COPY/INITIALIZE.
Tx COPY / INITIALIZE
NO
Selections
NO YES
Press the
to change, then
desired choice, then press the
to
.
Choose YES if the parameter to be programmed are the same as another TOTALIZER already programmed.
Edition 3
Rev G
4-54
Section 4
If selection was NO, proceed to step 3.
If selection was YES:
T
O
T
A
L
I
Z
E
R
S
Tx COPY FROM TOTAL
(0 = INITIALIZE)
Press the
X
Totalizer to be copied from
0 = FACTORY DEFAULT
to change to the totalizer
number to be copied from.
3. Press the
to advance to the next parameter, DISPLAY TAG.
Tx DISPLAY TAG
TOTAL X
Refer to Section 3.4.2 Changing Text, page 3-3 for
Selections
Text
Section 4
instructions.
4-55
Edition 3
Rev G
4. Press the
to advance to the next parameter, INPUT VALUE.
Tx INPUT VALUE
T
O
T
A
L
I
Z
E
R
S
NONE USED
Press the
Selections
NONE USED
IV1 IV2 IV3 IV4
IV5 IV6 IV7 IV8
PV1 PV2 PV3 PV4
DV1 DV2 DV3
DV4 DV5 DV6
DV7 DV8 DV9
DV10 DV11 DV12
CV1 CV2 CV3 CV4
CV5 CV6 CV7 CV8
CV9 CV10 CV11 CV12
TOTAL1 TOTAL2
TOTAL3 TOTAL4
SV1 SV2 SV3 SV4
to change, then
,
, as required to desired choice, then
press the
.
Additional selections for use with controller option:
SP1 SP2 SP3 SP4
SP5 SP6 SP7 SP8
OUTPUT 11 OUTPUT12
OUTPUT 21 OUTPUT22
OUTPUT 31 OUTPUT32
OUTPUT 41 OUTPUT42
If NONE USED was selected, no other prompts for Totalizer X will be seen. Refer back to step 1, page 452.
5. Press the
to advance to the next parameter, TIME BASE.
Tx TIME BASE
PER SEC
Selections
PER SEC PER MIN
PER HOUR PER DAY
PULSES
Press the
,
, as required to desired choice, then
press the
Edition 3
Rev G
to change, then
4-56
.
Section 4
6. Press the
to advance to the next parameter, TOTAL IS FLOW.
Tx TOTAL IS FLOW
TIMES
Press the
to change, then
7. Press the
1
to
desired choice, then press the
T
O
T
A
L
I
Z
E
R
S
Selections
TIMES 1,000,000
TIMES 100,000
TIMES 10,000
TIMES 1,000
TIMES 100
TIMES 10
TIMES 1
TIMES 0.1
TIMES 0.01
TIMES 0.001
TIMES 0.0001
.
to advance to the next parameter, DISPLAY OPTION.
Tx DISPLAY UNITS
GAL.
Refer to Section 3.4.2 Changing Text, page 3-3 for
Selections
Text
8. Press the
instructions.
to advance to the next parameter, DECIMAL POSITION.
Tx DECIMAL POSITION
0
Press the
to change, then
desired choice, then press the
Section 4
to
Selections
0 to 4
.
4-57
Edition 3
Rev G
9. Press the
T
O
T
A
L
I
Z
E
R
S
to advance to the next parameter, DISPLAY OPTION.
Tx DISPLAY OPTION
IN BOTH MODES
Selections
NOT DISPLAYED
IN CONTINUOUS MODE
IN SEQUENTIAL MODE
IN BOTH MODES
10. Press the
Press the
to change, then
desired choice, then press the
to
.
to advance to the next parameter, DISPLAY FORMAT.
Tx DISPLAY FORMAT
DIGITS - NO COMMAS
Selections
DIGITS - NO COMMAS
DIGITS WITH COMMAS
11. Press the
Press the
to change, then
desired choice, then press the
to
.
to advance to the next parameter, TOTALIZER TYPE.
Tx TOTALIZER TYPE
CONTINUOUS
Selections
CONTINUOUS PRELOAD
COUNT TO PRESET
COUNT DOWN PRESET
Press the
to change, then
desired choice, then press the
Edition 3
Rev G
4-58
to
.
Section 4
12. Press the
to advance to the next parameter, TOTALIZER PRESET.
Tx TOTALIZER PRESET
-1 units
Selections
0 to 999999999
(*decimal position = 0)
9999.9999
(*decimal position = 4)
-1 = Off
Press the
to change, then
desired value, then press the
to
.
Note: Units are that of TOTAL.
* Total Decimal Position
13. Press the
to advance to the next parameter, LOW FLOW CUTOFF.
Tx LOW FLOW CUTOFF
0 units
Selections
± 999999
(*decimal position = 0)
± 9.9999
(*decimal position = 4)
Press the
to change, then
desired value, then press the
to
.
Note: Units are that of INPUT (RATE). If no units were selected, the display will show - NONE -.
*Input Decimal Position
Section 4
4-59
Edition 3
Rev G
T
O
T
A
L
I
Z
E
R
S
14. Press the
T
O
T
A
L
I
Z
E
R
S
to advance to the next parameter, RESET ACTUATOR.
Tx RESET ACTUATOR
NONE / OFF
Selections
NONE / OFF
ON / CONTINUOUS
ANY ALARM
ANY PROCESS ALARM
A11 A12 A13 A14
A21 A22 A23 A24
A31 A32 A33 A34
A41 A42 A43 A44
INSTRUMENT ALARM
CHART FULL
OP INP 1 OP INP 2
OP INP 3 OP INP 4
OP INP 5 OP INP 6
OP INP 7 OP INP 8
OP INP 9 OP INP 10
OP INP 11 OP INP 12
CHART CHANGED
CHART ROTATION
TREND DATA COLLECT
ALT CHART SPEED
DA1 DA2 DA3
DA4 DA5 DA6
DA7 DA8 DA9
DA10 DA11 DA12
DA13 DA14 DA15
DA16 DA17 DA18
DA19 DA20 DA21
DA22 DA23 DA24
PRESET 1 PRESET 2
PRESET 3 PRESET 4
TOTAL PO1 TOTAL PO2
TOTAL PO3 TOTAL PO4
TIME 1 TIME/DATE 1
TIME 2 TIME/DATE 2
TIME 1 TO TIME 2
TIME/DATE 1 TO 2
TIMER1 TIMER 2
TIMER 3 TIMER 4
SW1 SW2 SW3 SW4
SW5 SW6 SW7 SW8
COMM TRIGGER 1
COMM TRIGGER 2
COMM TRIGGER 3
COMM TRIGGER 4
F1 F2 F3 F4 F5
RESET MOD ENTER
ON THE HOUR
DAY OF WEEK
DAY OF MONTH
RELAY 1
RELAY 2
RELAY 3
RELAY 4
RELAY 5
RELAY 6
RELAY 7
RELAY 8
Edition 3
Rev G
Press the
to change, then
,
, as required to desired choice, then
press the
.
Additional selections for use with controller option:
OUTPUT 11 OUTPUT12
OUTPUT 21 OUTPUT22
OUTPUT 31 OUTPUT32
OUTPUT 41 OUTPUT42
CA1F1 CA1F2 CA1F3
CA1F4
CA1F5
CA2F1 CA2F2 CA2F3
CA2F4
CA2F5
CA3F1 CA3F2 CA3F3
CA3F4
CA3F5
CA4F1 CA4F2 CA4F3
CA4F4
CA4F5
4-60
Section 4
15. Press the
to advance to the next parameter, HOLD ACTUATOR.
Tx HOLD ACTUATOR
NONE / OFF
Selections
NONE / OFF
ON / CONTINUOUS
ANY ALARM
ANY PROCESS ALARM
A11 A12 A13 A14
A21 A22 A23 A24
A31 A32 A33 A34
A41 A42 A43 A44
INSTRUMENT ALARM
CHART FULL
OP INP 1 OP INP 2
OP INP 3 OP INP 4
OP INP 5 OP INP 6
OP INP 7 OP INP 8
OP INP 9 OP INP 10
OP INP 11 OP INP 12
CHART CHANGED
CHART ROTATION
TREND DATA COLLECT
ALT CHART SPEED
DA1 DA2 DA3
DA4 DA5 DA6
DA7 DA8 DA9
DA10 DA11 DA12
DA13 DA14 DA15
DA16 DA17 DA18
DA19 DA20 DA21
DA22 DA23 DA24
PRESET 1 PRESET 2
PRESET 3 PRESET 4
TOTAL PO1 TOTAL PO2
TOTAL PO3 TOTAL PO4
TIME 1 TIME/DATE 1
TIME 2 TIME/DATE 2
TIME 1 TO TIME 2
TIME/DATE 1 TO 2
TIMER1 TIMER 2
TIMER 3 TIMER 4
SW1 SW2 SW3 SW4
SW5 SW6 SW7 SW8
COMM TRIGGER 1
COMM TRIGGER 2
COMM TRIGGER 3
COMM TRIGGER 4
F1 F2 F3 F4 F5
RESET MOD ENTER
ON THE HOUR
DAY OF WEEK
DAY OF MONTH
RELAY 1
RELAY 2
RELAY 3
RELAY 4
RELAY 5
RELAY 6
RELAY 7
RELAY 8
Section 4
Press the
to change, then
,
, as required to desired choice, then
press the
.
Additional selections for use with controller option:
OUTPUT 11 OUTPUT12
OUTPUT 21 OUTPUT22
OUTPUT 31 OUTPUT32
OUTPUT 41 OUTPUT42
CA1F1 CA1F2 CA1F3
CA1F4
CA1F5
CA2F1 CA2F2 CA2F3
CA2F4
CA2F5
CA3F1 CA3F2 CA3F3
CA3F4
CA3F5
CA4F1 CA4F2 CA4F3
CA4F4
CA4F5
4-61
Edition 3
Rev G
T
O
T
A
L
I
Z
E
R
S
16. Press the
T
O
T
A
L
I
Z
E
R
S
to advance to the next parameter, PULSED OUTPUT.
Tx PULSED OUTPUT
NO
Selections
NO YES
17. Press the
Press the
to change, then
desired choice, then press the
to
.
to advance to the next parameter, PULSE EVERY (only seen if PULSED OUTPUT select is
YES).
Tx PULSE EVERY
1000 units
Selections
1 to 10000
Press the
to change, then
desired choice, then press the
to
.
Note: Units are that of TOTAL.
18. Press the
and the display advances to the next totalizer to be programmed. Refer to the beginning of
this section, page 4-52.
Edition 3
Rev G
4-62
Section 4
4.1.8 TIMERS
Timers are seen only if the MATH option was specified and present in the model number order matrix.
From the Normal Display, press the
until CONFIGURATION is seen in the lower display line. If PASSWORD appears in the lower display line, the correct "password" will need to be entered before access to Configuration is allowed. If CONFIGURATION is not displayed, then Configuration has been disabled. Refer to Section 9,
Enables and Passwords, for instructions to enable Configuration.
With CONFIGURATION in the display, press the
line.
1. Press the
, then the
until TIMERS appears in the lower display
to display TIMER NUMBER.
TIMER NUMBER
1
Press the
to change, then
desired number, then press the
2. Press the
to
Selections
1 to 4
.
to advance to the next parameter, DISPLAY TAG.
TMx DISPLAY TAG
TIMER X
Selections
Text
Section 4
Refer to Section 3.4.2 Changing Text, page 3-3 for
instructions.
4-63
Edition 3
Rev G
T
I
M
E
R
S
3. Press the
to advance to the next parameter, TIMER TYPE.
TMx TIMER TYPE
T
I
M
E
R
S
OFF
Press the
Selections
OFF
COUNT UP
COUNT DOWN
to change, then
,
, as required to desired choice, then
If OFF was selected, no other prompts for TIMER X
press the
.
will be seen, refer back to step 1, page 4-61.
4. Press the
to advance to the next parameter, TIME FORMAT.
TMx TIME FORMAT
SECONDS
Press the
Selections
SECONDS
MINUTES:SECONDS
HOURS:MINUTES:SECOND
to change, then
to
desired choice, then press the
.
Format:
SSS seconds
MMM:SS Minutes/Seconds
HHH:MM:SS Hours/Minutes/Seconds
5. Press the
to advance to the next parameter, TIMER PERIOD, per selected TIME FORMAT.
TMx TIMER PERIOD
format
0
Press the
Selections
0 to 999
Edition 3
Rev G
to change, then
desired value, then press the
4-64
to
.
Section 4
6. Press the
to advance to the next parameter, RESET ACTUATOR.
TMx RESET ACTUATOR
NONE / OFF
Selections
NONE/OFF
Press the
to change, then
,
ON/CONTINUOUS
ANY ALARM
, as required to desired choice, then
ANY PROCESS ALARM
A11 A12 A13 A14
A21 A22 A23 A24
A31 A32 A33 A34
A41 A42 A43 A44
press the
.
INSTRUMENT ALARM
CHART FULL
OP INP 1 OP INP 2
OP INP 3 OP INP 4
OP INP 5 OP INP 6
OP INP 7 OP INP 8
OP INP 9 OP INP 10
OP INP 11 OP INP 12
CHART CHANGED
CHART ROTATION
TREND DATA COLLECT
ALT CHART SPEED
DA1 DA2 DA3
DA4 DA5 DA6
DA7 DA8 DA9
DA10 DA11 DA12
DA13 DA14 DA15
DA16 DA17 DA18
DA19 DA20 DA21
DA22 DA23 DA24
PRESET 1 PRESET 2
PRESET 3 PRESET 4
TOTAL PO1 TOTAL PO2
TOTAL PO3 TOTAL PO4
TIME 1 TIME/DATE 1
TIME 2 TIME/DATE 2
TIME 1 TO TIME 2
TIME /DATE 1 TO 2
TIMER 1 TIMER 2
TIMER 3 TIMER 4
SW1 SW2 SW3 SW4
SW5 SW6 SW7 SW8
Additional selections for use with controller option:
COMM TRIGGER 1
OUTPUT 11 OUTPUT12
COMM TRIGGER 2
OUTPUT 21 OUTPUT22
COMM TRIGGER 3
OUTPUT 31 OUTPUT32
COMM TRIGGER 4
OUTPUT 41 OUTPUT42
F1 F2 F3 F4 F5
CA1F1 CA1F2 CA1F3
RESET MOD ENTER
CA1F4
CA1F5
ON THE HOUR
CA2F1 CA2F2 CA2F3
DAY OF WEEK
CA2F4
CA2F5
DAY OF MONTH
CA3F1 CA3F2 CA3F3
RELAY 1
RELAY 2
CA3F4
CA3F5
RELAY 3
RELAY 4
CA4F1 CA4F2 CA4F3
RELAY 5
RELAY 6
CA4F4
CA4F5
RELAY 7
RELAY 8
Section 4
4-65
Edition 3
Rev G
T
I
M
E
R
S
7. Press the
to advance to the next parameter, DISPLAY OPTION.
TMx DISPLAY OPTION
T
I
M
E
R
S
IN BOTH MODES
Selections
NOT DISPLAYED
IN CONTINUOUS MODE
IN SEQUENTIAL MODE
IN BOTH MODES
Press the
to change, then
desired choice, then press the
to
.
&
L
E
D
S
8. Press the
and the display advances to the next timer to be programmed. Refer to the beginning of this
section, page 4-61.
4.1.9 LEDS
In this section, each of the available 8 individual LEDs can be configured to operate on any of the available
actuators.
From the Normal Display, press the
until CONFIGURATION is seen in the lower display line. If PASSWORD appears in the lower display line, the correct "password" will need to be entered before access to Configuration is allowed. If CONFIGURATION is not displayed, then Configuraiton has been disabled. Refer to Section 9,
Enables and Passwords, for instructions to enable Configuration.
With CONFIGURATION in the display, press the
, then the
until LEDS appears in the lower display
line.
1. Press the
to display LED NUMBER.
LED NUMBER
1
Press the
to change, then
desired choice, then press the
Edition 3
Rev G
to
Selections
1 to 8
.
4-66
Section 4
2. Press the
to advance to the next parameter, LED ACTUATOR.
LED x ACTUATOR
NONE / OFF
Selections
NONE/OFF
Press the
to change, then
,
ON/CONTINUOUS
ANY ALARM
ANY PROCESS ALARM
, as required to desired choice, then
A11 A12 A13 A14
A21 A22 A23 A24
A31 A32 A33 A34
A41 A42 A43 A44
press the
.
INSTRUMENT ALARM
CHART FULL
OP INP 1 OP INP 2
OP INP 3 OP INP 4
OP INP 5 OP INP 6
OP INP 7 OP INP 8
OP INP 9 OP INP 10
OP INP 11 OP INP 12
CHART CHANGED
CHART ROTATION
TREND DATA COLLECT
ALT CHART SPEED
DA1 DA2 DA3
DA4 DA5 DA6
DA7 DA8 DA9
DA10 DA11 DA12
DA13 DA14 DA15
DA16 DA17 DA18
DA19 DA20 DA21
DA22 DA23 DA24
PRESET 1 PRESET 2
PRESET 3 PRESET 4
TOTAL PO1 TOTAL PO2
TOTAL PO3 TOTAL PO4
TIME 1 TIME/DATE 1
TIME 2 TIME/DATE 2
TIME 1 TO TIME 2
TIME /DATE 1 TO 2
TIMER 1 TIMER 2
TIMER 3 TIMER 4
SW1 SW2 SW3 SW4
SW5 SW6 SW7 SW8
COMM TRIGGER 1
Additional selections for use with controller option:
COMM TRIGGER 2
OUTPUT 11 OUTPUT12
COMM TRIGGER 3
OUTPUT 21 OUTPUT22
COMM TRIGGER 4
OUTPUT 31 OUTPUT32
F1 F2 F3 F4 F5
OUTPUT 41 OUTPUT42
RESET MOD ENTER
CA1F1 CA1F2 CA1F3
ON THE HOUR
CA1F4
CA1F5
DAY OF WEEK
CA2F1 CA2F2 CA2F3
DAY OF MONTH
CA2F4
CA2F5
RELAY 1
RELAY 2
CA3F1 CA3F2 CA3F3
RELAY 3
RELAY 4
CA3F4
CA3F5
RELAY 5
RELAY 6
CA4F1 CA4F2 CA4F3
RELAY 7
RELAY 8
CA4F4
CA4F5
3. Press the
and the display advances to the next LED to be programmed. Refer to the beginning of this
section, page 4-64.
Section 4
4-67
Edition 3
Rev G
L
E
D
S
4.1.10 RELAYS
Relays only available when specified and present in the model number order matrix.
L
E
D
S
&
R
E
L
A
Y
S
From the Normal Display, press the
until CONFIGURATION is seen in the lower display line. If PASSWORDS appears in the lower display line, the correct "password" will need to be entered before access to Configuration is allowed. If CONFIGURATION is not displayed, then Configuruation has been disabled. Refer to
SEction 9, Enables and Passwords, for instructions to enable Configuration.
With CONFIGURATION in the display, press the
, then the
until RELAYS appears in the lower display
line.
1. Press the
to display RELAY NUMBER.
RELAY NUMBER
1
Press the
to change, then
desired number, then press the
2. Press the
to
Selections
1 to 8
.
to advance to the next parameter, RELAY USAGE.
RELAY x USAGE
STATE OR ON - OFF
Selections
STATE OR ON-OFF
PULSED OUTPUT
TIME PROPORTIONING
Edition 3
Rev G
Press the
to change, then
desired choice, then press the
4-68
to
.
Section 4
3. Press the
to advance to the next parameter, RELAY ACTUATOR (only available if RELAY USAGE
selected was STATE OR ON-OFF or PULSED OUTPUT).
RELAY x ACTUATOR
NONE / OFF
Selections
NONE/OFF
Press the
to change, then
,
ON/CONTINUOUS
ANY ALARM
, as required to desired choice, then
ANY PROCESS ALARM
A11 A12 A13 A14
A21 A22 A23 A24
A31 A32 A33 A34
A41 A42 A43 A44
press the
.
INSTRUMENT ALARM
CHART FULL
OP INP 1 OP INP 2
OP INP 3 OP INP 4
OP INP 5 OP INP 6
OP INP 7 OP INP 8
OP INP 9 OP INP 10
OP INP 11 OP INP 12
CHART CHANGED
CHART ROTATION
TREND DATA COLLECT
ALT CHART SPEED
DA1 DA2 DA3
DA4 DA5 DA6
DA7 DA8 DA9
DA10 DA11 DA12
DA13 DA14 DA15
DA16 DA17 DA18
DA19 DA20 DA21
DA22 DA23 DA24
PRESET 1 PRESET 2
PRESET 3 PRESET 4
TOTAL PO1 TOTAL PO2
TOTAL PO3 TOTAL PO4
TIME 1 TIME/DATE 1
TIME 2 TIME/DATE 2
TIME 1 TO TIME 2
TIME /DATE 1 TO 2
TIMER 1 TIMER 2
TIMER 3 TIMER 4
SW1 SW2 SW3 SW4
SW5 SW6 SW7 SW8
COMM TRIGGER 1
Additional selections for use with controller option:
COMM TRIGGER 2
OUTPUT 11 OUTPUT12
COMM TRIGGER 3
OUTPUT 21 OUTPUT22
COMM TRIGGER 4
OUTPUT 31 OUTPUT32
F1 F2 F3 F4 F5
OUTPUT 41 OUTPUT42
RESET MOD ENTER
CA1F1 CA1F2 CA1F3
ON THE HOUR
CA1F4
CA1F5
DAY OF WEEK
CA2F1 CA2F2 CA2F3
DAY OF MONTH
CA2F4
CA2F5
RELAY 1
RELAY 2
CA3F1 CA3F2 CA3F3
RELAY 3
RELAY 4
CA3F4
CA3F5
RELAY 5
RELAY 6
CA4F1 CA4F2 CA4F3
RELAY 7
RELAY 8
CA4F4
CA4F5
Section 4
4-69
Edition 3
Rev G
R
E
L
A
Y
S
4. Press the
to advance to the next parameter, RELAY T.P. VALUE (only seen if RELAY USAGE selected
was TIME PROPORTIONING).
R
E
L
A
Y
S
RELAY x T.P. VALUE
NONE USED
Press the
Selections
NONE USED
IV1 IV2 IV3 IV4
IV5 IV6 IV7 IV8
PV1 PV2 PV3 PV4
DV1 DV2 DV3
DV4 DV5 DV6
DV7 DV8 DV9
DV10 DV11 DV12
CV1 CV2 CV3 CV4
CV5 CV6 CV7 CV8
CV9 CV10 CV11 CV12
TOTAL1 TOTAL2
TOTAL3 TOTAL4
SV1 SV2 SV3 SV4
5. Press the
to change, then
,
, as required to desired choice, then
press the
.
Additional selections for use with controller option:
SP1 SP2 SP3 SP4
SP5 SP6 SP7 SP8
OUTPUT 11 OUTPUT12
OUTPUT 21 OUTPUT22
OUTPUT 31 OUTPUT32
OUTPUT 41 OUTPUT42
to advance to the next parameter, CYCLE TIME (only seen if RELAY USAGE selected is
TIME PROPORTIONING).
RELAY x CYCLE TIME
1 SECONDS
Selections
1 to 240
Press the
to change, then
desired value, then press the
6. Press the
to
.
and the display advances to the next relay to be programmed. Refer to the beginning of this
section, page 4-66.
Edition 3
Rev G
4-70
Section 4
4.1.11 CURRENT OUTPUTS
Only seen if current outputs has been specified and present in the model number order matrix.
From the Normal Display, press the
until CONFIGURATION is seen in the lower display line. If PASSWORD appears in the lower display line, the correct "password" will need to be entered before access to Configuration is allowed. If CONFIGURATION is not displayed, then Configuration has been disabled. Refer to Section 9,
Enables and Passwords, for instructions to enable Configuration.
With CONFIGURATION in the display, press the ,
the lower display line.
1. Press the
then the
until CURRENT OUTPUTS appears in
to display CURRENT OUTPUT.
O
U
T
P
U
T
S
CURRENT OUTPUT
1
Press the
to change, then
desired number, then press the
2. Press the
to
Selections
1 to 4
.
to advance to the next parameter, SOURCE.
COx SOURCE
NONE USED
Press the
Selections
NONE USED
IV1 IV2 IV3 IV4
IV5 IV6 IV7 IV8
PV1 PV2 PV3 PV4
DV1 DV2 DV3
DV4 DV5 DV6
DV7 DV8 DV9
DV10 DV11 DV12
CV1 CV2 CV3 CV4
CV5 CV6 CV7 CV8
CV9 CV10 CV11 CV12
TOTAL1 TOTAL2
TOTAL3 TOTAL4
SV1 SV2 SV3 SV4
to change, then
,
, as required to desired choice, then
press the
.
Additional selections for use with controller option:
SP1 SP2 SP3 SP4
SP5 SP6 SP7 SP8
OUTPUT 11 OUTPUT12
OUTPUT 21 OUTPUT22
OUTPUT 31 OUTPUT32
OUTPUT 41 OUTPUT42
If NONE USED was selected, no other prompts for CURRENT OUTPUT X will be displayed, refer to step 1
above.
Section 4
C
U
R
R
E
N
T
4-71
Edition 3
Rev G
3. Press the
C
U
R
R
E
N
T
O
U
T
P
U
T
S
to advance to the next parameter, RANGE LOW.
COx RANGE LOW
Units correspond to
Units configured in
corresponding CO
Source parameter
previously selected.
0 units
Press the
Selections
± 999999
4. Press the
desired value, then press the
to
.
to advance to the next parameter, RANGE HIGH.
COx RANGE HIGH
Units correspond to
Units configured in
corresponding CO
Source parameter
previously selected.
100 units
Press the
Selections
± 999999
5. Press the
to change, then
to change, then
desired value, then press the
to
.
to advance to the next parameter, OUTPUT RANGE.
COx OUTPUT RANGE
4 - 20mA
Selections
0-20mA 4-20mA
Edition 3
Rev G
Press the
to change, then
desired choice, then press the
4-72
to
.
Section 4
6. Press the
to advance to the next parameter, OUTPUT ON ERROR.
COx OUTPUT ON ERROR
0 mA
Selections
0 to 22
7. Press the
Press the
to change, then
desired value, then press the
to
.
and the display advances to the next current output to be programmed. Refer to the begin-
ning of this section, page 4-69.
Section 4
4-73
Edition 3
Rev G
C
U
R
R
E
N
T
O
U
T
P
U
T
S
4.1.12 INSTRUMENT SETTINGS
Instrument Settings define instrument tag, display option and date/time format.
I
N
S
T
R
U
M
E
N
T
From the Normal Display, press the
until CONFIGURATION is seen in the lower display line. If PASSWORD appears in the lower display line, the correct "password" will need to be entered before access to Configuration is allowed. If CONFIGURATION is not displayed, then Configuration has been disabled. Refer to Section
9, Enables and Passwords, for instructions to enable Configuration.
With CONFIGURATION in the display, press the
, then the
until INSTRUMENT SETTINGS appears
in the lower display line.
1. Press the
to display INSTRUMENT TAG.
INSTRUMENT TAG
S
E
T
T
I
N
G
S
RECORDER #1
Refer to Section 3.4.2 Changing Text, page 3-3 for
Selections
Text
2. Press the
instructions.
to advance to the next parameters, DISPLAY OPTION.
DISPLAY OPTION
IN SEQUENTIAL MODE
Selections
NOT DISPLAYED
IN CONTINUOUS MODE
IN SEQUENTIAL MODE
IN BOTH MODES
Edition 3
Rev G
Press the
to change, then
desired choice, then press the
4-74
to
.
Section 4
3. Press the
to advance to the next parameter, INSTR. ON ACTUATOR.
INSTR. ON ACTUATOR
ON / CONTINUOUS
Selections
NONE/OFF
ON/CONTINUOUS
ANY ALARM
ANY PROCESS ALARM
A11 A12 A13 A14
A21 A22 A23 A24
A31 A32 A33 A34
A41 A42 A43 A44
INSTRUMENT ALARM
CHART FULL
OP INP 1 OP INP 2
OP INP 3 OP INP 4
OP INP 5 OP INP 6
OP INP 7 OP INP 8
OP INP 9 OP INP 10
OP INP 11 OP INP 12
CHART CHANGED
CHART ROTATION
TREND DATA COLLECT
ALT CHART SPEED
DA1 DA2 DA3
DA4 DA5 DA6
DA7 DA8 DA9
DA10 DA11 DA12
DA13 DA14 DA15
DA16 DA17 DA18
DA19 DA20 DA21
DA22 DA23 DA24
PRESET 1 PRESET 2
PRESET 3 PRESET 4
TOTAL PO1 TOTAL PO2
TOTAL PO3 TOTAL PO4
TIME 1 TIME/DATE 1
TIME 2 TIME/DATE 2
TIME 1 TO TIME 2
TIME /DATE 1 TO 2
TIMER 1 TIMER 2
TIMER 3 TIMER 4
SW1 SW2 SW3 SW4
SW5 SW6 SW7 SW8
COMM TRIGGER 1
COMM TRIGGER 2
COMM TRIGGER 3
COMM TRIGGER 4
F1 F2 F3 F4 F5
RESET MOD ENTER
ON THE HOUR
DAY OF WEEK
DAY OF MONTH
RELAY 1
RELAY 2
RELAY 3
RELAY 4
RELAY 5
RELAY 6
RELAY 7
RELAY 8
Section 4
Press the
to change, then
,
, as required to desired choice, then
press the
.
I
N
S
T
R
U
M
E
N
T
S
E
T
T
I
N
G
S
Additional selections for use with controller option:
OUTPUT 11 OUTPUT12
OUTPUT 21 OUTPUT22
OUTPUT 31 OUTPUT32
OUTPUT 41 OUTPUT42
CA1F1 CA1F2 CA1F3
CA1F4
CA1F5
CA2F1 CA2F2 CA2F3
CA2F4
CA2F5
CA3F1 CA3F2 CA3F3
CA3F4
CA3F5
CA4F1 CA4F2 CA4F3
CA4F4
CA4F5
4-75
Edition 3
Rev G
4. Press the
I
N
S
T
R
U
M
E
N
T
to advance to the next parameter, ALARMING ON ACTUATOR.
ALARMING ON ACTUATOR
ON / CONTINUOUS
Selections
NONE/OFF
ON/CONTINUOUS
ANY ALARM
ANY PROCESS ALARM
A11 A12 A13 A14
A21 A22 A23 A24
A31 A32 A33 A34
A41 A42 A43 A44
INSTRUMENT ALARM
CHART FULL
OP INP 1 OP INP 2
OP INP 3 OP INP 4
OP INP 5 OP INP 6
OP INP 7 OP INP 8
OP INP 9 OP INP 10
OP INP 11 OP INP 12
CHART CHANGED
CHART ROTATION
TREND DATA COLLECT
ALT CHART SPEED
DA1 DA2 DA3
DA4 DA5 DA6
DA7 DA8 DA9
DA10 DA11 DA12
DA13 DA14 DA15
DA16 DA17 DA18
DA19 DA20 DA21
DA22 DA23 DA24
PRESET 1 PRESET 2
PRESET 3 PRESET 4
TOTAL PO1 TOTAL PO2
TOTAL PO3 TOTAL PO4
TIME 1 TIME/DATE 1
TIME 2 TIME/DATE 2
TIME 1 TO TIME 2
TIME /DATE 1 TO 2
TIMER 1 TIMER 2
TIMER 3 TIMER 4
SW1 SW2 SW3 SW4
SW5 SW6 SW7 SW8
COMM TRIGGER 1
COMM TRIGGER 2
COMM TRIGGER 3
COMM TRIGGER 4
F1 F2 F3 F4 F5
RESET MOD ENTER
ON THE HOUR
DAY OF WEEK
DAY OF MONTH
RELAY 1
RELAY 2
RELAY 3
RELAY 4
RELAY 5
RELAY 6
RELAY 7
RELAY 8
S
E
T
T
I
N
G
S
Edition 3
Rev G
Press the
to change, then
,
as required to desired choice, then
press the
.
Additional selections for use with controller option:
OUTPUT 11 OUTPUT12
OUTPUT 21 OUTPUT22
OUTPUT 31 OUTPUT32
OUTPUT 41 OUTPUT42
CA1F1 CA1F2 CA1F3
CA1F4
CA1F5
CA2F1 CA2F2 CA2F3
CA2F4
CA2F5
CA3F1 CA3F2 CA3F3
CA3F4
CA3F5
CA4F1 CA4F2 CA4F3
CA4F4
CA4F5
4-76
Section 4
5. Press the
key to advance to the next parameter, CONTROL ON ACTUATOR (only seen on controller).
CONTROL ON ACTUATOR
ON / CONTINUOUS
Selections
NONE/OFF
ON/CONTINUOUS
ANY ALARM
ANY PROCESS ALARM
A11 A12 A13 A14
A21 A22 A23 A24
A31 A32 A33 A34
A41 A42 A43 A44
INSTRUMENT ALARM
CHART FULL
OP INP 1 OP INP 2
OP INP 3 OP INP 4
OP INP 5 OP INP 6
OP INP 7 OP INP 8
OP INP 9 OP INP 10
OP INP 11 OP INP 12
CHART CHANGED
CHART ROTATION
TREND DATA COLLECT
ALT CHART SPEED
DA1 DA2 DA3
DA4 DA5 DA6
DA7 DA8 DA9
DA10 DA11 DA12
DA13 DA14 DA15
DA16 DA17 DA18
DA19 DA20 DA21
DA22 DA23 DA24
OUTPUT 11 OUTPUT12
OUTPUT 21 OUTPUT22
OUTPUT 31 OUTPUT32
OUTPUT 41 OUTPUT42
PRESET 1 PRESET 2
PRESET 3 PRESET 4
TOTAL PO1 TOTAL PO2
TOTAL PO3 TOTAL PO4
TIME 1 TIME/DATE 1
TIME 2 TIME/DATE 2
TIME 1 TO TIME 2
TIME /DATE 1 TO 2
TIMER 1 TIMER 2
TIMER 3 TIMER 4
SW1 SW2 SW3 SW4
SW5 SW6 SW7 SW8
COMM TRIGGER 1
COMM TRIGGER 2
COMM TRIGGER 3
COMM TRIGGER 4
F1 F2 F3 F4 F5
RESET MOD ENTER
ON THE HOUR
DAY OF WEEK
DAY OF MONTH
RELAY 1
RELAY 2
CA1F1 CA1F2 CA1F3
CA1F4
CA1F5
CA2F1 CA2F2 CA2F3
CA2F4
CA2F5
CA3F1 CA3F2 CA3F3
CA3F4
CA3F5
CA4F1 CA4F2 CA4F3
CA4F4
CA4F5
RELAY 3
RELAY 4
RELAY 5
RELAY 6
RELAY 7
RELAY 8
Section 4
Press the
to change, then
,
as required to desired choice, then
press the
4-77
.
Edition 3
Rev G
6. Press the
DATE DISPLAY FORMAT
I
N
S
T
R
U
M
E
N
T
S
E
T
T
I
N
G
S
to advance to the next parameter, DATE DISPLAY FORMAT.
MM / DD / YY
Press the
to change, then
Selections
MM/DD/YY
DD/MM/YY
DD/MMM/YY
as required to desired choice, then
press the
7. Press the
,
.
to advance to the next parameter, TIME DISPLAY FORMAT.
TIME DISPLAY FORMAT
AM / PM
Press the
Selections
AM/PM 24 HOUR
8. Press the
to change, then
desired choice, then press the
.
to advance to the next parameter, CURRENT DATE.
CURRENT DATE
format
Press the
to
to change, then
01 / 01 / 95
Format:
MM/DD/YY
DD/MM/YY
DD/MMM/YY
,
Enter Current Date
as required to desired choice, then
press the
Edition 3
Rev G
. Change and enter each portion of the date.
4-78
Section 4
9. Press the
to advance to the next parameter, CURRENT DAY.
CURRENT DAY
Selections
SUN MON TUE WED
THUR FRI SAT
10. Press the
Press the
I
N
S
T
R
U
M
E
N
T
to change, then
to desired choice, then press the
.
to advance to the next parameter, CURRENT TIME.
CURRENT TIME
format
Press the
to change, then
9:00 AM
,
S
E
T
T
I
N
G
S
Format:
AM/PM
24 HOUR
Enter Current Time
as required to desired choice, then
press the
11. Press the
. Change and enter each portion of the date.
to advance to the next parameter, TIME TO LOG DATA (NOT AVAILABE AT THIS TIME).
TIME TO LOG DATA
format
Format:
AM/PM
24 HOUR
Selections
AM/PM
11:59 PM
Press the
,
as required to desired choice, then
press the
Section 4
to change, then
4-79
.
Edition 3
Rev G
12. Press the
to advance to the next parameter, COMMUNICATIONS MODE (Only seen if the communi-
cations option is present).
I
N
S
T
R
U
M
E
N
T
S
E
T
T
I
N
G
S
COMMUNICATIONS MODE
SLAVE
Selections
SLAVE MASTER*
Press the
OFF
to change, then
desired choice, then press the
to
.
* NOTE: When Master is selected, the recorder uses the comms address that was previously programmed. No slave unit should use this address. Also, the comms address
parameter will not show up if master is selected, it must be programmed price to the selection of Master.
13. Press the
to advance to the next parameter, COMMS ADDRESS 1 (only seen if SLAVE is selected in
COMMUNICATIONS MODE).
COMMS ADDRESS
1
Press the
to change, then
desired value, then press the
14. Press the
to
Selections
1 to 247
.
to advance to the next parameter, COMM BIT RATE.
COMMS BIT RATE
9600
Selections
9600 4800
2400 1200
Press the
,
as required to desired choice, then
press the
Edition 3
Rev G
to change, then
4-80
.
Section 4
15. Press the
to advance to the next parameter, COMMS PARITY.
COMMS PARITY
ODD
NONE
16. Press the
Selections
ODD EVEN
Press the
to change, then
to
desired choice, then press the
I
N
S
T
R
.
S
E
T
T
I
N
G
S
to advance to the next parameter, INPUT SCAN SEQUENCE
INPUT SCAN SEQUENCE
8 INPUTS-2 SCANS/SEC
&
Selections
8 INPUTS-2 SCANS/SEC
4 INPUTS-4 SCANS/SEC
2INP-4S/S, 4INP-2S/S
1INP-8S/S, 2INP-4S/S
1INP-8S/S, 4INP-2S/S
2I-4S, 2I-2S, 4I-1S
1I-8S, 1I-4S, 2I-2S
1I-8S, 1I-4S, 4I-1S
1I-8S, 2I-2S, 4I-1S
1I-8S, 1I-2S, 6I-1S
Press the
to change, then
desired choice, then press the
to
.
The input scan rate is programmable and dependant on the number of active inputs present. The total scans per
second for the instrument is 16 scans/second, and the instrument can have up to 8 inputs configured. INPUT
SCAN SEQUENCE prompt allows the scan rate to be changed. Select the scan rate closest to the rate required.
NOTE: The total of inputs must be equal to or greater than the actual number of inputs configured.
Example:
4 Inputs Configured
Require One input scan of 8/sec
One input scan of 4/sec
Two inputs scan of 1/sec each
Select: 1I-8S, 1I-4S, 4I-1S
IV1 is 8 scans/sec, IV2 is 4 scans/sec and IV3 through
IV6 are 1 scan/sec. Note that it does no harm to include
unused inputs in the scan sequence as they will be
ignored
Section 4
4-81
Edition 3
Rev G
D
E
R
I
V
E
D
A
C
T
U
A
T
O
R
S
17. Press the
and the display advances to INSTRUMENT TAG. To exit, press the
. Refer to the
beginning of this section, page 4-72.
4.1.13 DERIVED ACTUATORS
Derived Actuators are used when two or more actuators need to be combined logically.
From the Normal Display, press the
until CONFIGURATION is seen in the lower display line. If PASSWORD
appears in the lower display line, the correct "password" will need to be entered before access to Configuration is
allowed. If CONFIGURATION is not displayed, then Configuration has been disabled. Refer to Section 9, Enables and Passwords, for instructions to enable Configuration.
With CONFIGURATION in the display, press the
the lower display line.
1. Press the
, then the
until DERIVED ACTUATORS appears in
to display DERIVED ACTUATOR.
DERIVED ACTUATOR
1
Press the
to change, then
desired number, then press the
Edition 3
Rev G
to
Selections
1 to 24
.
4-82
Section 4
2. Press the
to advance to the next parameter, COPY/INITIALIZE.
DAxx COPY / INITIALIZE
NO
Selections
NO YES
Press the
to change, then
desired choice, then press the
to
.
A
C
T
U
A
T
O
R
S
Choose YES if the parameters to be programmed are the same as another DERIVED ACTUATOR already
programmed.
If selection was NO, proceed to step 3.
If selection was YES:
DAxx COPY FROM DA
(0 = INITIALIZE)
Press the
XX
Derived Actuator to be copied from
0 = FACTORY DEFAULT
to change to the desired
actuator to be copied from.
Section 4
4-83
D
E
R
I
V
E
D
Edition 3
Rev G
3. Press the
D
E
R
I
V
E
D
to advance to the next parameter, ITEM 1.
DAxx
Selections
END OR AND
NOT
(
)
ANY ALARM
ANY PROCESS ALARM
A11 A12 A13 A14
A21 A22 A23 A24
A31 A32 A33 A34
A41 A42 A43 A44
INSTRUMENT ALARM
CHART FULL
OP INP 1 OP INP 2
OP INP 3 OP INP 4
OP INP 5 OP INP 6
OP INP 7 OP INP 8
OP INP 9 OP INP 10
OP INP 11 OP INP 12
CHART CHANGED
CHART ROTATION
TREND DATA COLLECT
ALT CHART SPEED
DA1 DA2 DA3
DA4 DA5 DA6
DA7 DA8 DA9
DA10 DA11 DA12
DA13 DA14 DA15
DA16 DA17 DA18
DA19 DA20 DA21
DA22 DA23 DA24
PRESET 1 PRESET 2
PRESET 3 PRESET 4
TOTAL PO1 TOTAL PO2
TOTAL PO3 TOTAL PO4
TIME 1 TIME/DATE 1
TIME 2 TIME/DATE 2
TIME 1 TO TIME 2
TIME /DATE 1 TO 2
TIMER 1 TIMER 2
TIMER 3 TIMER 4
SW1 SW2 SW3 SW4
SW5 SW6 SW7 SW8
COMM TRIGGER 1
COMM TRIGGER 2
COMM TRIGGER 3
COMM TRIGGER 4
F1 F2 F3 F4 F5
RESET MOD ENTER
ON THE HOUR
DAY OF WEEK
DAY OF WEEK
RELAY 1
RELAY 2
RELAY 3
RELAY 4
RELAY 5
RELAY 6
RELAY 7
RELAY 8
A
C
T
U
A
T
O
R
S
ITEM 1
Press the
to change, then
,
as required to desired choice, then
press the
.
Additional selections for use with controller option:
OUTPUT 11 OUTPUT12
OUTPUT 21 OUTPUT22
OUTPUT 31 OUTPUT32
OUTPUT 41 OUTPUT42
CA1F1 CA1F2 CA1F3
CA1F4
CA1F5
CA2F1 CA2F2 CA2F3
CA2F4
CA2F5
CA3F1 CA3F2 CA3F3
CA3F4
CA3F5
CA4F1 CA4F2 CA4F3
CA4F4
CA4F5
Repeat the ITEM prompt as needed to configure the items necessary to form the desired logic equation.
Edition 3
Rev G
4-84
Section 4
4. Press the
and the display advances to the next derived actuator to be programmed. Refer to the
beginning of this section, page 4-80.
4.1.14 OPERATOR INPUTS
Operator Inputs are prompts programmed that allow these prompts to turn on or off actuators that control some
other function within the instrument.
From the Normal Display, press the
until CONFIGURATION is seen in the lower display line. If PASSWORD appears in the lower display line, the correct "password" will need to be entered before access to Configuration is allowed. If CONFIGURATION is not displayed, then Configuration has been disabled. Refer to Section 9,
Enables and Passwords, for instructions to enable Configuration.
With CONFIGURATION in the display, press the
, then the
until OPERATOR INPUTS appears in the
lower display line.
1. Press the
to display OPERATOR INPUT.
OPERATOR INPUT
1
D
E
R
I
V
E
D
A
C
T
U
A
T
O
R
S
&
Press the
to change, then
desired number, then press the
2. Press the
to
O
P
E
R
A
T
O
R
Selections
1 to 12
.
to advance to the next parameter, COPY/INITIALIZE.
OIxx COPY / INITIALIZE
NO
Selections
NO YES
Section 4
Press the
to change, then
desired choice, then press the
4-85
to
.
Edition 3
Rev G
I
N
P
U
T
S
Choose YES if the parameters to be programmed are the same as another OPERATOR INPUT already programmed.
D
E
R
I
V
E
D
A
C
T
U
A
T
O
R
S
If selection was NO, proceed to step 3.
If selection was YES:
OIxx COPY FROM OI
(0 = INITIALIZE)
Press the
Operator Input to be copied from
0 = FACTORY DEFAULT
to change to the desired
actuator to be copied from.
3. Press the
&
O
P
E
R
A
T
O
R
1
to advance to the next parameter, PROMPT TEXT.
OIxx PROMPT TEXT
Refer to Section 3.4.2 Changing Text, page 3-3 for
Selections
Character Selection
instructions.
If TEXT not entered, no other prompt in OPERATOR INPUTS will be seen. Refer back to step 1, page 4-81.
I
N
P
U
T
S
Edition 3
Rev G
4-86
Section 4
4. Press the
to advance to the next parameter, OFF STATE TEXT.
OIxx OFF STATE TEXT
OFF
Refer to Section 3.4.2 Changing Text, page 3-3 for
instructions.
Selections
Character Selection
5. Press the
I
N
P
U
T
S
to advance to the next parameter, ON STATE TEXT.
OIxx ON STATE TEXT
ON
Refer to Section 3.4.2 Changing Text, page 3-3 for
Selections
Character Selection
6. Press the
instructions.
to advance to the next parameter, ACTUATION STYLE.
OIxx ACTUATION STYLE
CONTINUOUS
Selections
CONTINUOUS MOMENTARY
Press the
to change, then
desired choice, then press the
Section 4
4-87
O
P
E
R
A
T
O
R
to
.
Edition 3
Rev G
7. Press the
to advance to the next parameter, POWER UP STATE.
OIxx POWER UP STATE
O
P
E
R
A
T
O
R
I
N
P
U
T
S
SAME
Selections
OFF ON SAME
Press the
to change, then
desired choice, then press the
8. Press the
to
.
to advance to the next parameter, WHEN DISPLAYED.
OIxx WHEN DISPLAYED
ALWAYS
Selections
ALWAYS, WHEN ENABLED
9. Press the
Press the
to change, then
desired choice, then press the
to
.
and the display advances to the next operator input to be programmed. Refer to the beginning
of this section, page 4-81.
Edition 3
Rev G
4-88
Section 4
4.1.15 OPERATOR MESSAGES
Operator Messages are user defined messages to advise or provide information, via the display, that selected
actuators are active.
From the Normal Display, press the
until CONFIGURATION is seen in the lower display line. If PASSWORD appears in the lower display line, the correct "password" will need to be entered before access to
Configurat allowed. If CONFIGURATION is not displayed, then Configuration has been disabled. Refer to Section
9, Enables and Passwords, for instructions to enable Configuration.
With CONFIGURATION in the display, press the ,
in the lower display line.
1. Press the
then the
until OPERATOR MESSAGES appears
to display OPERATOR MESSAGE.
OPERATOR MESSAGE
M
E
S
S
A
G
E
S
1
Press the
to change, then
desired number, then press the
2. Press the
Selections
1 to 12
to
.
to advance to the next parameter, COPY/INITIALIZE.
OMxx COPY / INITIALIZE
NO
Selections
NO YES
Press the
to change, then
desired choice, then press the
to
.
Choose YES if the parameters to be programmed are the same as another OPERATOR MESSAGE already
programmed.
Section 4
4-89
O
P
E
R
A
T
O
R
Edition 3
Rev G
If selection was NO, proceed to step 3.
O
P
E
R
A
T
O
R
If selection was YES:
OMxx COPY FROM OM
(0 = INITIALIZE)
Press the
1
to change to the desired
Operator Message to be copied from
0 = FACTORY DEFAULT
operator message to be copied from.
M
E
S
S
A
G
E
S
Edition 3
Rev G
4-90
Section 4
3. Press the
to advance to the next parameter, ACTUATOR.
O
P
E
R
A
T
O
R
OMxx ACTUATOR
NONE / OFF
Selections
NONE/OFF
Press the
to change, then
,
ON/CONTINUOUS
ANY ALARM
as required to desired choice, then
ANY PROCESS ALARM
A11 A12 A13 A14
A21 A22 A23 A24
A31 A32 A33 A34
press the
.
A41 A42 A43 A44
INSTRUMENT ALARM
CHART FULL
OP INP 1 OP INP 2
OP INP 3 OP INP 4
OP INP 5 OP INP 6
OP INP 7 OP INP 8
OP INP 9 OP INP 10
OP INP 11 OP INP 12
CHART CHANGED
CHART ROTATION
TREND DATA COLLECT
ALT CHART SPEED
DA1 DA2 DA3
DA4 DA5 DA6
DA7 DA8 DA9
DA10 DA11 DA12
DA13 DA14 DA15
DA16 DA17 DA18
DA19 DA20 DA21
DA22 DA23 DA24
PRESET 1 PRESET 2
PRESET 3 PRESET 4
TOTAL PO1 TOTAL PO2
TOTAL PO3 TOTAL PO4
TIME 1 TIME/DATE 1
TIME 2 TIME/DATE 2
TIME 1 TO TIME 2
TIME /DATE 1 TO 2
TIMER 1 TIMER 2
TIMER 3 TIMER 4
SW1 SW2 SW3 SW4
SW5 SW6 SW7 SW8
COMM TRIGGER 1
Additional selections for use with controller option:
COMM TRIGGER 2
OUTPUT 11 OUTPUT12
COMM TRIGGER 3
OUTPUT 21 OUTPUT22
COMM TRIGGER 4
OUTPUT 31 OUTPUT32
F1 F2 F3 F4 F5
OUTPUT 41 OUTPUT42
RESET MOD ENTER
CA1F1 CA1F2 CA1F3
ON THE HOUR
CA1F4
CA1F5
DAY OF WEEK
CA2F1 CA2F2 CA2F3
DAY OF MONTH
CA2F4
CA2F5
RELAY 1
RELAY 2
CA3F1 CA3F2 CA3F3
RELAY 3
RELAY 4
CA3F4
CA3F5
RELAY 5
RELAY 6
CA4F1 CA4F2 CA4F3
RELAY 7
RELAY 8
CA4F4
CA4F5
Section 4
4-91
M
E
S
S
A
G
E
S
Edition 3
Rev G
4. Press the
OMxx LINE 1 TEXT
O
P
E
R
A
T
O
R
M
E
S
S
A
G
E
S
to advance to the next parameter, LINE 1 TEXT.
MESSAGE X
Refer to Section 3.4.2 Changing Text, page 3-3 for
Selections
Character Selection
5. Press the
instructions.
to advance to the next parameter, LINE 2 TEXT.
OMxx LINE 2 TEXT
Refer to Section 3.4.2 Changing Text, page 3-3 for
Selections
Text
6. Press the
instructions.
to advance to the next parameter, DISPLAY MODE.
OMxx DISPLAY MODE
PREEMPT
Selections
PREEMPT
PREEMPT TO CYCLIC
PREEMPT TO OFF
CYCLIC
BACKGROUND
Edition 3
Rev G
Press the
to change, then
desired choice, then press the
4-92
to
.
Section 4
7. Press the
and the display advances to the next operator message to be programmed. Refer to the
beginning of this section, page 4-85.
4.1.16 CHART MESSAGES
Chart Messages allow user defined text to be recorded on the chart.
From the Normal Display, press the
until CONFIGURATION is seen in the upper display line. If PASSWORD appears in the lower display line, the correct "password" will need to be entered before access to Configuration is allowed. If CONFIGURAITON is not displayed, then Configuration has been disabled. Refer to Section
9, Enables and Passwords, for instructions to enable Configuration.
With CONFIGURATION in the display, press the , then the
in the lower display line.
1. Press the
u n t i l
CHART MESSAGES appears
&
to display CHART MESSAGES.
C
H
A
R
T
CHART MESSAGE NUMBER
1
Press the
to change, then
desired number, then press the
2. Press the
M
E
S
S
A
G
E
S
Selections
1 to 12
to
.
to advance to the next parameter, COPY/INITIALIZE.
CMxx COPY / INITIALIZE
NO
Selections
NO YES
Press the
to change, then
desired choice, then press the
Section 4
O
P
E
R
A
T
O
R
4-93
to
.
Edition 3
Rev G
Choose YES if the parameters to be programmed are the same as another CHART MESSAGE already programmed.
C
H
A
R
T
M
E
S
S
A
G
E
S
If selection is NO, proceed to step 3.
If selection is YES:
CMxx COPY FROM CM
(0 = INITIALIZE)
Press the
1
to change to the desired chart
Chart Message to be copied from
0 = FACTORY DEFAULT
message to be copied from.
Edition 3
Rev G
4-94
Section 4
3. Press the
to advance to the next parameter, ACTUATOR.
CMxx ACTUATOR
C
H
A
R
T
NONE / OFF
Selections
NONE/OFF
Press the
to change, then
,
ON/CONTINUOUS
ANY ALARM
as required to desired choice, then
ANY PROCESS ALARM
A11 A12 A13 A14
A21 A22 A23 A24
A31 A32 A33 A34
A41 A42 A43 A44
press the
.
INSTRUMENT ALARM
CHART FULL
OP INP 1 OP INP 2
OP INP 3 OP INP 4
OP INP 5 OP INP 6
OP INP 7 OP INP 8
OP INP 9 OP INP 10
OP INP 11 OP INP 12
CHART CHANGED
CHART ROTATION
TREND DATA COLLECT
ALT CHART SPEED
DA1 DA2 DA3
DA4 DA5 DA6
DA7 DA8 DA9
DA10 DA11 DA12
DA13 DA14 DA15
DA16 DA17 DA18
DA19 DA20 DA21
DA22 DA23 DA24
PRESET 1 PRESET 2
PRESET 3 PRESET 4
TOTAL PO1 TOTAL PO2
TOTAL PO3 TOTAL PO4
TIME 1 TIME/DATE 1
TIME 2 TIME/DATE 2
TIME 1 TO TIME 2
TIME /DATE 1 TO 2
TIMER 1 TIMER 2
TIMER 3 TIMER 4
SW1 SW2 SW3 SW4
SW5 SW6 SW7 SW8
COMM TRIGGER 1
Additional selections for use with controller option:
COMM TRIGGER 2
OUTPUT 11 OUTPUT12
COMM TRIGGER 3
OUTPUT 21 OUTPUT22
COMM TRIGGER 4
OUTPUT 31 OUTPUT32
F1 F2 F3 F4 F5
OUTPUT 41 OUTPUT42
RESET MOD ENTER
CA1F1 CA1F2 CA1F3
ON THE HOUR
CA1F4
CA1F5
DAY OF WEEK
CA2F1 CA2F2 CA2F3
DAY OF MONTH
CA2F4
CA2F5
RELAY 1
RELAY 2
CA3F1 CA3F2 CA3F3
RELAY 3
RELAY 4
CA3F4
CA3F5
RELAY 5
RELAY 6
CA4F1 CA4F2 CA4F3
RELAY 7
RELAY 8
CA4F4
CA4F5
Section 4
4-95
M
E
S
S
A
G
E
S
Edition 3
Rev G
4. Press the
CMxx PEN / COLOR
C
H
A
R
T
M
E
S
S
A
G
E
S
to advance to the next parameter, PEN/COLOR.
RED
Press the
Selections
BLUE
GREEN
RED
BLACK
VIOLET
to change, then
desired choice, then press the
to
.
Note: Valid choice of color depends on number of colors specified when ordered. One color - Red, Two colors Red, Green; Three colors - Red, Green, Blue or Four colors - Red, Green, Blue, Black or Violet.
5. Press the
to advance to the next parameter, MESSAGE TEXT.
CMxx MESSAGE TEXT
CM X
Refer to Section 3.4.2 Changing Text, page 3-3 for
Selections
Character Selection
Edition 3
Rev G
instructions.
4-96
Section 4
6. Press the
to advance to the next parameter, VALUE 1.
CMxx VALUE 1
NONE USED
Press the
to change, then
,
Selections
as required to desired choice, then
NONE USED
IV1 IV2 IV3 IV4
IV5 IV6 IV7 IV8
PV1 PV2 PV3 PV4
DV1 DV2 DV3
press the
.
DV4 DV5 DV6
DV7 DV8 DV9
DV10 DV11 DV12
Additional selections for use with controller option:
CV1 CV2 CV3 CV4
SP1 SP2 SP3 SP4
CV5 CV6 CV7 CV8
SP5 SP6 SP7 SP8
CV9 CV10 CV11 CV12
OUTPUT 11 OUTPUT12
TOTAL1 TOTAL2
OUTPUT 21 OUTPUT22
TOTAL3 TOTAL4
OUTPUT 31 OUTPUT32
SV1 SV2 SV3 SV4
OUTPUT 41 OUTPUT42
7. Press the
to advance to the next parameter, VALUE 2.
CMxx VALUE 2
NONE USED
Press the
to change, then
,
Selections
as required to desired choice, then
NONE USED
IV1 IV2 IV3 IV4
IV5 IV6 IV7 IV8
PV1 PV2 PV3 PV4
press the
.
DV1 DV2 DV3
DV4 DV5 DV6
DV7 DV8 DV9
DV10 DV11 DV12
Additional selections for use with controller option:
CV1 CV2 CV3 CV4
SP1 SP2 SP3 SP4
CV5 CV6 CV7 CV8
SP5 SP6 SP7 SP8
CV9 CV10 CV11 CV12
OUTPUT 11 OUTPUT12
TOTAL1 TOTAL2
OUTPUT 21 OUTPUT22
TOTAL3 TOTAL4
OUTPUT 31 OUTPUT32
SV1 SV2 SV3 SV4
OUTPUT 41 OUTPUT42
Section 4
4-97
Edition 3
Rev G
C
H
A
R
T
M
E
S
S
A
G
E
S
8. Press the
to advance to the next parameter, VALUE 3.
CMxx VALUE 3
C
H
A
R
T
NONE USED
Press the
to change, then
,
Selections
as required to desired choice, then
NONE USED
IV1 IV2 IV3 IV4
IV5 IV6 IV7 IV8
PV1 PV2 PV3 PV4
press the
.
DV1 DV2 DV3
DV4 DV5 DV6
DV7 DV8 DV9
DV10 DV11 DV12
Additional selections for use with controller option:
CV1 CV2 CV3 CV4
SP1 SP2 SP3 SP4
CV5 CV6 CV7 CV8
SP5 SP6 SP7 SP8
CV9 CV10 CV11 CV12
OUTPUT 11 OUTPUT12
TOTAL1 TOTAL2
OUTPUT 21 OUTPUT22
TOTAL3 TOTAL4
OUTPUT 31 OUTPUT32
SV1 SV2 SV3 SV4
OUTPUT 41 OUTPUT42
M
E
S
S
A
G
E
S
9. Press the
to advance to the next parameter, VALUE 4.
CMxx VALUE 4
NONE USED
Press the
to change, then
,
Selections
as required to desired choice, then
NONE USED
IV1 IV2 IV3 IV4
IV5 IV6 IV7 IV8
PV1 PV2 PV3 PV4
DV1 DV2 DV3
press the
.
DV4 DV5 DV6
DV7 DV8 DV9
DV10 DV11 DV12
Additional selections for use with controller option:
CV1 CV2 CV3 CV4
SP1 SP2 SP3 SP4
CV5 CV6 CV7 CV8
SP5 SP6 SP7 SP8
CV9 CV10 CV11 CV12
OUTPUT 11 OUTPUT12
TOTAL1 TOTAL2
OUTPUT 21 OUTPUT22
TOTAL3 TOTAL4
OUTPUT 31 OUTPUT32
SV1 SV2 SV3 SV4
OUTPUT 41 OUTPUT42
Edition 3
Rev G
4-98
Section 4
10. Press the
to advance to the next parameter, TIME/DATE STAMP.
CMxx TIME / DATE STAMP
C
H
A
R
T
NO
Press the
Selections
YES NO
11. Press the
to change, then
desired choice, then press the
to
.
M
E
S
S
A
G
E
S
to advance to the next parameter, CMSS ORIENTATION.
CMxx ORIENTATION
HORIZONTAL
Press the
Selections
HORIZONTAL VERTICAL
to change, then
desired choice, then press the
to
&
.
12. Press the
and the display advances to the next chart message to be programmed. Refer to the
beginning of this section, page 4-89.
4.1.17 SIMULATED VARIABLES
Simulated Variables typically used for testing purposes.
From the Normal Dispplay, press
the until CONFIGURATION is seen in the upper display line. If PASSWORD appears in the lower display line, the correct "password" will need to be entered before access to Configuration is allowed. If CONFIGURATION is not displayed, then Configuration has been disabled. Refer to Section 9,
Enables and Passwords, for instructions to enable Configuration.
With CONFIGURATION is the display, press the ,
in the lower display line.
then the
Section 4
4-99
until SIMULATED VARIABLES appears
Edition 3
Rev G
S
I
M
U
L
A
T
E
D
V
A
R
I
A
B
L
E
S
1. Press the
S
I
M
U
L
A
T
E
D
V
A
R
I
A
B
L
E
S
to display SV NUMBER.
SV NUMBER
1
Press the
to change, then
desired number, then press the
2. Press the
to
Selections
1 to 4
.
to advance to the next parameter, DISPLAY TAG.
SVx DISPLAY TAG
SIM VAL X
Selections
Text
Refer to Section 3.4.2 Changing Text, page 3-3 for
instructions.
3. Press the
to advance to the next parameter, TYPE.
SVx TYPE
OFF
Press the to change, then to desired choice, then
press the.
Selections
OFF
SIN WAVE
SAWTOOTH
SQUARE WAVE
SPIKES
Edition 3
Rev G
4-100
Section 4
If OFF was selected, no other prompts for SIMULATED VARIABLES X will be seen. Refer back to step 1, page
4-97.
4. Press the
S
I
M
U
L
A
T
E
D
to advance to the next parameter, DISPLAY UNITS.
SVx DISPLAY UNITS
°F
°C
Selections
°F OTHER
5. If DISPLAY UNITS selected was OTHER, press the
to advance to the next parameter, OTHER UNITS.
SVx OTHER UNITS
Refer to Section 3.4.2 Changing Text, page 3-3 for
Selections
Text
6. Press the
instructions.
to advance to the next parameter, DECIMAL POSITION.
SVx DECIMAL POSITION
0
Press the
to change, then
desired value, then press the
Section 4
Selections
0 to 4
to
.
Units correspond to
Units configured in
Simulated Variable
4-101
Edition 3
Rev G
V
A
R
I
A
B
L
E
S
7. Press the
S
I
M
U
L
A
T
E
D
V
A
R
I
A
B
L
E
S
to advance to the next parameter, RANGE LOW.
SVx RANGE LOW
0
Press the
units
to change, then
Selections
± 999999
(decimal position = 0)
± 9.9999
(decimal position = 4)
to
desired value, then press the .
8.
Press
the to advance to the next parameter, RANGE HIGH.
SVx RANGE HIGH
100
Press the
to change, then
desired value, then press the
Edition 3
Rev G
Units correspond to
Units configured in
Simulated Variable
units
Selections
± 999999
(decimal position = 0)
± 9.9999
(decimal position = 4)
to
.
4-102
Section 4
9. Press the
to advance to the next parameter, PERIOD.
SVx PERIOD (1 / FREQ.)
S
I
M
U
L
A
T
E
D
60 MINUTES
Selections
1 to 1440
10. Press the
to advance to the next parameter, DISPLAY OPTION.
V
A
R
I
A
B
L
E
S
SVx DISPLAY OPTION
IN BOTH MODES
Selections
NOT DISPLAYED
IN CONTINUOUS MODE
IN SEQUENTIAL MODE
IN BOTH MODES
11. Press the
and the display advances to the next simulated input to be pro-
grammed. Refer to the beginning of this section, page 4-95.
Section 4
4-103
Edition 3
Rev G
Section 5 - Display Programming
Selections made in the Display prompts section determine what is displayed and how it is displayed.
From the Normal Display, press the
. If the Display prompts are disabled, when the DISP key is pressed,
DISPLAY KEY DISABLED will appear in the lower display line. Refer to Section 9, Enables and Passwords, for
instructions to enable Display prompts.
If the Display Prompts are not disabled BUT the password is other than zero, DISPLAY KEY PASSWORD will
appear in the display when the DISP key is pressed. If the correct "password" is entered, DISPLAY MODE will
appear in the upper display line. If the incorrect "password" is entered, INVALID PASSWORD will appear in the
upper display line.
If the Display Prompts are not disabled AND the password is set to zero, when the
MODE will appear in the upper display line.
key is pressed, DISPLAY
For the prompts associated with the
key, the unit automatically goes into the modify mode. For simplicity of
operation, use the Special keys below the display, referred to as F1 thru F5, for making choice selections. Upon
selection of a new choice/value, the unit will again automatically go into the modify mode.
In this prompt section, use the
key to advance to the next prompt without modifying the current parameter.
1. If instrument is a Controller, the following prompts may appear up to (4) times, one for each CONTROL STATE
ACCESS (CA) configured in CONTROL STATE ACCESS section of CONFIGURATION. The prompts are visible
for CAx if CAx LINE 1 TEXT is not blank. In the description of these prompts, x is the CA number, 1-4, and, if the
defaults are not changed, the controller number.
tttttttttttttttttttt
vvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvv
default "CONTROLLER x STATES"
Automatic Modify Mode (AMM) used, default "A/M SP1/SP2 L/R"
The "t t" field is the configured CAx LINE 1 TEXT and the "v v" field is the configured CAx LINE 2 TEXT. Note that
although AMM is in use, none of the fields in this prompt are modifiable, and none will be flashing.
2. When the above prompt is displayed, if any function keys for CAx have usage other than NOT USED, pressing
that key will display the following:
tttttttttttttttttttt
(CC)
default "CONTROLLER x STATE"
AMM used
The "t t" field is the configured CAx Fn LINE 1 TEXT, where "n" is the function key number, 1-5. The "cc" field is a
two item choice which causes the CAxFn actuator to be cleared (left choice) or set (right choice). The choice text
will be as configured if the usage is CUSTOM, otherwise it will be one of AUTOMATIC/MANUAL, SP1/SP2 or
LOCAL/REMOTE.
Section 5
5-1
Edition 3
Rev G
3. When this prompt is displayed with the AUTOMATIC/MANUAL choice, if the associated controller is configured
for PID control and is in the manual mode, pressing the DOWN key will display the prompts below:
Note: The controller may have its manual actuator set to something other than CAxFn, and in this case the
prompts below may be accessible even if the above section was AUTOMATIC.
Cx OUTPUT 1
MANUAL OUTPUT
visible if output 1 is proportional
nnn% value 0-100%, initially current value
Cx OUTPUT 2
MANUAL OUTPUT
visible if output 2 is proportional
nnn% value 0-100%, initially current value
These prompts allow the controller outputs to be manually changed. To change, press the
key as required to desired output %, then press the
key, then the
key. To exit, press the
ke y.
4. Following the top level CONTROL STATE ACCESS prompts, if setpoint changes are enabled via ENABLES &
PASSWORDS and at least one setpoint has its PROMPT TEXT configured, the following prompt will appear:
SELECT
SETPOINTS
This prompt allows setpoint values to be changed. When displayed, pressing the
key will display the
following prompt:
tttttttttttttttttttt
default "SETPOINT x"
nnnnnnnn uuuuuu
This prompt is displayed for each setpoint which has its PROMPT TEXT configured, each prompt being accessed
via
and
keys. The "t t " field is the configured setpoint prompt text. The value for "nn" depends on
the setpoint's upper and lower limits decimal position. The "uu" field is the configured setpoint units text.
Edition 3
Rev G
5-2
Section 5
To change the setpoint, press the
key, then
keys to desired setpoint, then press the
key.
To exit, press the
key.
5. Following the top level Setpoint Prompt, if any controllers are configured for PID control and are in manual
mode, the following prompt will appear:
SELECT
MANUAL VALUES
This prompt provides an alternative method of manually changing controller outputs. When this prompt is displayed, pressing the
key will display the following:
Cx OUTPUT 1
visible if output 1 proportional
MANUAL OUTPUT
nnn% value 0-100, initially current value
Cx OUTPUT 2
visible if output 2 proportional
MANUAL OUTPUT
nnn% value 0-100, initially current value
These prompts are displayed for each controller in manual mode, where x is the controller number, 1-4.
To change, press the
To exit, press the
Section 5
key, then
keys to desired setting, then press the
key.
key.
5-3
Edition 3
Rev G
6. Following the top level Manual Values prompts, the "Standard Display" prompts are displayed as follows:
DISPLAY MODE
CONTINUOUS SEQUENCE
AMM used, default CONTINUOUS
DISPLAY FORMAT
1 VAL 2 VALS 4 VALS
AMM used, default 1 VAL
SEQUENTIAL DISPLAY
DURATION
n SECONDS
SEQUENCE, AMM used, default 1
7. If any OPERATOR INPUTS (OIs) are configured and visible, they appear in numerical order following the
above prompts. The prompts are as follows:
pppppppppppppppppppp
programmable prompt text
nnnnnnnnnnyyyyyyyyyy
AMM used, see below
The second line is a choice list with two items, the "n" item being the programmable OFF STATE TEXT phrase
associated with the OI, and the "y" item being the programmable ON STATE TEXT.
An OI is configured when its prompt text as Configured in OPERATOR INPUTS section of CONFIGURATION, is
not blank. It is visible when the following conditions apply:
WHEN DISPLAYED (prompt in OPERATOR INPUTS) configured to always
or
if configured to ENABLED in ENABLES & PASSWORDS.
Edition 3
Rev G
5-4
Section 5
Section 6 - Chart Prompts
From the Normal Display, press the
. If the Chart Prompts are disabled, when the CHART key is pressed,
CHART KEY DISABLED will appear in the lower display. Refer to Section 9, Enables & Passwords, for instructions to enable Chart Prompts.
If the Chart Prompts are not disabled BUT the password is other than zero, CHART PROMPTS PASSWORD will
appear in the display when the CHART key is pressed. If the correct "password" is entered, CHANGE CHART
will appear in the upper display. If the incorrect "password" is entered, INVALID PASSWORD will appear in the
upper display.
If the Chart Prompts is not disabled AND the password is set to zero, when the CHART key is pressed, CHANGE
CHART will appear in the upper display.
For the prompts associated with the CHART key, the unit automatically goes into the modify mode, unless the
prompt is for SELECT CHART CONFIGURATION. For simplicity of operation etc., upon selection of a new
choice, the unit will automatically go into the modify mode, unless its a special case as noted below.
In this prompt section, use the CHART key to advance to the next prompt without modifying the current parameter.
IMPORTANT: The CHANGE CHART procedure shown below must be followed. If it is not, important
information (chart tags, time, scales, etc) may not be printed.
6.1 CHANGE CHART
1. Press the
. CHANGE CHART appears in the upper display line and NO YES (NO blinking) appears in
the lower display line. If the chart has previously been stopped for changing, this prompt may not appear.
2. Select YES by pressing the key directly below the displayed YES or by pressing the
until YES is blinking, then press the
3.
or
.
START NEW CHART appears in the top display and NO YES (NO blinking) appears in the bottom display.
4. Change the chart at this time.
5. Select YES by pressing the key directly below the displayed YES or by pressing the
until YES is blinking, then press the
or
.
(Continued on next page)
Section 6
6-1
Edition 3
Rev G
6. Upon selection of YES, the chart is initialized and the unit exits to the NORMAL DISPLAY if Chart Rotation
and Trend Data Collect are ON. If either Chart Rotation or Trend Data Collect are OFF, after the initialization
message, the unit will display CHART ROTATION OFF and/or TREND DATA COLLECT OFF, as applicable, until
any key is pressed. This is a reminder that normal recording will not commence.
6.2 CHART CONFIGURATION
To enter Chart configuration, from the Normal Display, press the
until SELECT appears in the upper
display line and CHART CONFIGURATION appears in the lower display line. If CHART KEY DISABLED appears in the lower display line, refer to Section 9, Enables and Passwords, for instructions to enable Chart
Prompts. If PASSWORD appears in the lower display line, the correct "password" will need to be entered before
access to the Chart Select is allowed.
1. Press the
to display CHART SIZE.
Note: When changing
chart size, calibration of
the instrument to the
chart is required. See
chart calibration in
Section 11.
CHART SIZE
12in
10in
Selection
11in 12in
Press the
to change, then
desired choice, then press the
2. Press the
to
.
to advance to the next parameter, CHART TYPE USED.
CHART TYPE USED
RINGS ONLY
Selection
RINGS/LINES/SCALES
RINGS AND TIMELINES
RINGS ONLY
Edition 3
Rev G
Press the
to change, then
desired choice, then press the
6-2
to
.
Section 6
3. Press the
to advance to the next parameter, CHART TAG.
CHART TAG
UNIT #1
Refer to Section 3.4.2 Changing Text, Page 3-3, for
instructions.
Selection
Text
4. Press the
to advance to the next parameter, NORMAL SPEED.
NORMAL SPEED
24 HOUR
Press the
Selection
8 HOUR 12 HOUR
24 HOUR 48 HOUR
7 DAY
OTHER
,
to desired choice, then press
the
5. Press the
to change, then
.
to advance to the next parameter, NORMAL SPEED (only seen if NORMAL SPEED selected
was OTHER).
NORMAL SPEED
24 HRS / REV
Press the
Selection
6 to 9999
desired digit, then
then press the
Section 6
to change, then
6-3
to
to desired value,
.
Edition 3
Rev G
6. Press the
to advance to the next parameter, MAJOR TIME PERIODS.
MAJOR TIME PERIODS
24
Press the
to change, then
desired digit, then
then press the
7. Press the
to
Selections
6 to 48
to desired value,
.
to advance to the next parameter, MINOR TIME PERIODS.
MINOR TIME PERIODS
2
Press the
to change, then
desired value, then press the
8. Press the
to
Selections
0 to 8
.
to advance to the next parameter, BLANK MAJOR PERIODS.
BLANK MAJOR PERIODS
2
Press
the to change,
desired value, then press
Edition 3
Rev G
then to
Selections
0 to 48
the .
6-4
Section 6
9. Press the
to advance to the next parameter, MAJOR LINE PEN/COLOR.
MAJOR LINE PEN / COLOR
MATCH SCALE COLOR
Selections
MATCH SCALE COLOR
SELECT A COLOR
10. Press the
Press the
to change, then
desired choice, then press the
to
.
to advance to the next parameter, MAJOR LINE PEN/COLOR (only seen if MAJOR LINE
PEN/COLOR selected was SELECT A COLOR).
MAJOR LINE PEN / COLOR
Note: Valid choice of color
depends on number of
colors specified when
ordered. One color - Red;
Two colors - Red, Green;
Three colors - Red,
Green, Blue; or Four
colors - Red, Green, Blue,
Black or Violet.
Section 6
RED
Selections
BLUE
GREEN
RED
BLACK
VIOLET
Press the
to change, then
desired choice, then press the
6-5
to
.
Edition 3
Rev G
11. Press the
to advance to the next parameter, MINOR LINE PEN/COLOR.
MINOR LINE PEN / COLOR
MATCH SCALE COLOR
Selections
MATCH SCALE COLOR
SELECT A COLOR
12. Press the
Press the
to change, then
desired choice, then press the
to
.
to advance to the next parameter, MINOR LINE PEN/COLOR (only seen if MINOR LINE
PEN/COLOR selected was SELECT A COLOR).
MINOR LINE PEN / COLOR
Note: Valid choice of color
depends on number of
colors specified when
ordered. One color - Red;
Two colors - Red, Green;
Three colors - Red,
Green, Blue; or Four
colors - Red, Green, Blue,
Black or Violet.
Edition 3
Rev G
RED
Selections
BLUE
GREEN
RED
BLACK
VIOLET
Press the
to change, then
desired choice, then press the
6-6
to
.
Section 6
13. Press the
to advance to the next parameter, TIME PEN/COLOR.
TIME PEN / COLOR
RED
Note: Valid choice of color
depends on number of
colors specified when
ordered. One color Red; Two colors - Red,
Green; Three colors Red, Green, Blue; or Four
colors - Red, Green, Blue,
Black or Violet.
14. Press the
Press the
Selections
BLUE
GREEN
RED
BLACK
VIOLET
to change, then
desired choice, then press the
to
.
to advance to the next parameter, DATE/PEN COLOR.
DATE PEN / COLOR
RED
Note: Valid choice of color
depends on number of
colors specified when
ordered. One color Red; Two colors - Red,
Green; Three colors Red, Green, Blue; or Four
colors - Red, Green, Blue,
Black or Violet.
Section 6
Selections
BLUE
GREEN
RED
BLACK
VIOLET
Press the
to change, then
desired choice, then press the
6-7
to
.
Edition 3
Rev G
15. Press the
to advance to the next parameter, CHART TAG PEN/ COLOR.
CHART TAG PEN / COLOR
RED
Note: Valid choice of color
depends on number of
colors specified when
ordered. One color Red; Two colors - Red,
Green; Three colors Red, Green, Blue; or Four
colors - Red, Green, Blue,
Black or Violet.
16. Press the
Selections
BLUE
GREEN
RED
BLACK
VIOLET
Press the
to change, then
desired choice, then press the
to
.
to advance to the next parameter, ACTION ON NEW CHART.
ACTION ON NEW CHART
NONE - JUST CONTINUE
Selections
NONE - JUST CONTINUE
PRINT RANGE LIST
PRINT SCALES
17. Press the
Press the
to change, then
desired choice, then press the
to
.
to advance to the next parameter, STOP AFTER 1 REV.
STOP AFTER 1 REV
NO
Selections
NO YES
Press the
to change, then
desired choice, then press the
Edition 3
Rev G
6-8
to
.
Section 6
18. Press the
to advance to the next parameter, ROTATE CHART ACTUATR.
ROTATE CHART ACTUATR
CHART ROTATION
Selections
NONE / OFF
ON / CONTINUOUS
ANY ALARM
ANY PROCESS ALARM
A11 A12 A13 A14
A21 A22 A23 A24
A31 A32 A33 A34
A41 A42 A43 A44
INSTRUMENT ALARM
CHART FULL
OP INP 1 OP INP 2
OP INP 3 OP INP 4
OP INP 5 OP INP 6
OP INP 7 OP INP 8
OP INP 9 OP INP 10
OP INP 11 OP INP 12
CHART CHANGED
CHART ROTATION
TREND DATA COLLECT
ALT CHART SPEED
DA1 DA2 DA3
DA4 DA5 DA6
DA7 DA8 DA9
DA10 DA11 DA12
DA13 DA14 DA15
DA16 DA17 DA18
DA19 DA20 DA21
DA22 DA23 DA24
PRESET 1 PRESET 2
PRESET 3 PRESET 4
TOTAL PO1 TOTAL PO2
TOTAL PO3 TOTAL PO4
TIME 1 TIME/DATE 1
TIME 2 TIME/DATE 2
TIME 1 TO TIME 2
TIME/DATE 1 TO 2
TIMER1 TIMER 2
TIMER 3 TIMER 4
SW1 SW2 SW3 SW4
SW5 SW6 SW7 SW8
COMM TRIGGER 1
COMM TRIGGER 2
COMM TRIGGER 3
COMM TRIGGER 4
F1 F2 F3 F4 F5
RESET MOD ENTER
ON THE HOUR
DAY OF WEEK
DAY OF MONTH
RELAY 1
RELAY 2
RELAY 3
RELAY 4
RELAY 5
RELAY 6
RELAY 7
RELAY 8
Section 6
Press the
to change, then
,
to desired choice, then press
the
.
Additional selections for use with controller option:
OUTPUT 11 OUTPUT12
OUTPUT 21 OUTPUT22
OUTPUT 31 OUTPUT32
OUTPUT 41 OUTPUT42
CA1F1 CA1F2 CA1F3
CA1F4
CA1F5
CA2F1 CA2F2 CA2F3
CA2F4
CA2F5
CA3F1 CA3F2 CA3F3
CA3F4
CA3F5
CA4F1 CA4F2 CA4F3
CA4F4
CA4F5
6-9
Edition 3
Rev G
19. Press the
to advance to the next parameter, COLLECT DATA ACTUATR.
COLLECT DATA ACTUATR
CHART ROTATION
Selections
NONE / OFF
ON / CONTINUOUS
ANY ALARM
ANY PROCESS ALARM
A11 A12 A13 A14
A21 A22 A23 A24
A31 A32 A33 A34
A41 A42 A43 A44
INSTRUMENT ALARM
CHART FULL
OP INP 1 OP INP 2
OP INP 3 OP INP 4
OP INP 5 OP INP 6
OP INP 7 OP INP 8
OP INP 9 OP INP 10
OP INP 11 OP INP 12
CHART CHANGED
CHART ROTATION
TREND DATA COLLECT
ALT CHART SPEED
DA1 DA2 DA3
DA4 DA5 DA6
DA7 DA8 DA9
DA10 DA11 DA12
DA13 DA14 DA15
DA16 DA17 DA18
DA19 DA20 DA21
DA22 DA23 DA24
PRESET 1 PRESET 2
PRESET 3 PRESET 4
TOTAL PO1 TOTAL PO2
TOTAL PO3 TOTAL PO4
TIME 1 TIME/DATE 1
TIME 2 TIME/DATE 2
TIME 1 TO TIME 2
TIME/DATE 1 TO 2
TIMER1 TIMER 2
TIMER 3 TIMER 4
SW1 SW2 SW3 SW4
SW5 SW6 SW7 SW8
COMM TRIGGER 1
COMM TRIGGER 2
COMM TRIGGER 3
COMM TRIGGER 4
F1 F2 F3 F4 F5
RESET MOD ENTER
ON THE HOUR
DAY OF WEEK
DAY OF MONTH
RELAY 1
RELAY 2
RELAY 3
RELAY 4
RELAY 5
RELAY 6
RELAY 7
RELAY 8
Edition 3
Rev G
Press the
to change, then
,
to desired choice, then press
the
.
Additional selections for use with controller option:
OUTPUT 11 OUTPUT12
OUTPUT 21 OUTPUT22
OUTPUT 31 OUTPUT32
OUTPUT 41 OUTPUT42
CA1F1 CA1F2 CA1F3
CA1F4
CA1F5
CA2F1 CA2F2 CA2F3
CA2F4
CA2F5
CA3F1 CA3F2 CA3F3
CA3F4
CA3F5
CA4F1 CA4F2 CA4F3
CA4F4
CA4F5
6-10
Section 6
20. Press the
to advance to the next parameter, CHART ROTATION.
CHART ROTATION
PROMPT DISPLAYED
Selections
PROMPT NOT DISPLAYED
PROMPT DISPLAYED
21. Press the
Press the
to change, then
desired choice, then press the
to
.
to advance to the next parameter, TREND DATA COLLECT.
TREND DATA COLLECT
PROMPT NOT DISPLAYED
Press the
Selections
PROMPT NOT DISPLAYED
PROMPT DISPLAYED
22. Press the
to change, then
desired choice, then press the
to
.
to advance to the next parameter, CHART SPEED PROMPT.
CHART SPEED PROMPT
PROMPT NOT DISPLAYED
Selections
PROMPT NOT DISPLAYED
PROMPT DISPLAYED
23. Press the
Section 6
Press the
to change, then
desired choice, then press the
to
.
at any time when not in modify to exit.
6-11
Edition 3
Rev G
Section 7 - Alarm Settings
Selections made in Alarm Settings determine the setpoints (or RATE if RATE alarm selected) of each alarm
configured in the Process Variables section of the Configuration section in System Prompts.
From the Normal Display, press the
until ALARM SETTINGS appears in the lower display line. If PASSWORD appears in the lower display line, the correct "password" will need to be entered before access to Alarm
Settings is allowed. If ALARM SETTINGS is not displayed, then Alarm Settings has been disabled, or NO alarms
have been configured. Refer to Section 9, Enables and Passwords, for instructions to enable Alarm Settings.
1. Press the
to display ALARMS FOR PV NUMBER.
ALARMS FOR PV NUMBER
1
Press the
to change, then
desired choice, then press the
to
Selections
1 to 4
.
Alarm Setpoint prompts will only appear for Alarms that have been configured. Refer to Section 4.1.5,
page 4-32.
2. Press the
to advance to the next parameter, ALARM 1 SETPOINT. If RATE Alarm was selected,
setpoint refers to RATE.
Ax1 SETPOINT
Units correspond to
Units configured in
Process Variables with
per unit time included if
a rate of change alarm
is specified.
* Decimal position
configured in Process
Variables.
Section 7
100 units
Selections
± 999999
(*decimal position = 0)
± 9.9999
(*decimal position = 4)
Press the
to change, then
desired value, then press the
7-1
to
.
Edition 3
Rev G
3. Press the
to advance to the next parameter, ALARM 2 SETPOINT. If RATE Alarm was selected,
setpoint refers to RATE.
Ax2 SETPOINT
Units correspond to
Units configured in
Process Variables with
per unit time included if
a rate of change alarm
is specified.
100 units
Press the
Selections
± 999999
• Decimal position
configured in Process (*decimal position = 0)
± 9.9999
Variables.
(*decimal position = 4)
4. Press the
to change, then
desired value, then press the
to
.
to advance to the next parameter, ALARM 3 SETPOINT. If RATE Alarm was selected,
setpoint refers to RATE.
Units correspond to
Units configured in
Process Variables with
per unit time included if
a rate of change alarm
is specified.
* Decimal position
configured in Process
Variables.
Edition 3
Rev G
Ax3 SETPOINT
100 units
Selections
± 999999
(*decimal position = 0)
± 9.9999
(*decimal position = 4)
Press the
to change, then
desired value, then press the
7-2
to
.
Section 7
5. Press the
to advance to the next parameter, ALARM 4 SETPOINT. If RATE Alarm was selected,
setpoint refers to RATE.
Ax4 SETPOINT
Units correspond to
Units configured in
Process Variables with
per unit time included if
a rate of change alarm
is specified.
* Decimal position
configured in Process
Variables.
6. Press the
100 units
Selections
± 999999
(*decimal position = 0)
± 9.9999
(*decimal position = 4)
Press the
to change, then
desired value, then press the
to
.
and the display advances to the next applicable ALARMS FOR PV NUMBER prompt. Refer to
the beginning of this section, page 7-1.
Section 7
7-3
Edition 3
Rev G
Section 8 - Action Time Settings
Action Time Settings are simply TIME/DATE settings that can be used to initiate a desired action. Selections made
in Action Time Settings are used to generate actuators TIME 1, TIME/DATE 1, TIME 2, TIME/DATE 2, TIME 1 TO
TIME 2, and TIME/DATE 1 TO 2.
The TIME 1 and TIME 2 actuators are TRUE when the time is equal to or greater than the TIME values during
each 24 hour day, and FALSE between midnight and the TIME specified.
The TIME/DATE actuators are TRUE when the TIME and DATE are equal to or greater than the TIME and DATE
values and remain TRUE after midnight.
TIME 1 TO TIME 2 is TRUE when the time is equal to or greater than the TIME 1 and less than or equal to TIME 2
during the next 24 hour period.
EXAMPLES:
TIME 1 = 8 AM
TIME 1 = 10 PM
TIME 2 = 4 PM
TIME 2 = 6 AM
From the Normal Display, press the
8 HOURS, from 8 am to 4 pm
8 HOURS, from 10 pm through midnight to 6 am
until ACTION TIME SETTINGS appears in the lower display line. If
PASSWORD appears in the lower display line, the correct "password" will need to be entered before access to
Action Time Settings is allowed. If ACTION TIME SETTINGS is not displayed, then Action Time Settings has
been disabled. Refer to Section 9, Enables and Passwords, for instructions to enable Action Time Settings.
Note: Each time and date is actually comprised of two or three values or choices which all must be changed/
entered if any one of the parts must be changed. For example, to change a time from 9:00 PM to 9:15 PM, press
MOD, then ENTER (since no change is needed to 9), change 00 to 15 and then press ENTER, then press ENTER
again to leave PM as it is.
1. Press the
to display TIME 1 TAG.
TIME 1 TAG
START TIME
Selections
Text
Refer to Section 3.4.2 Changing Text, page 3-3 for
instructions,
Section 8
8-1
Edition 3
Rev G
2. Press the
to advance to the next parameter, TIME 1.
TIME 1
format
06:00 AM
Press the
FORMAT AND
ENTRY PER
TIME FORMAT
SELECTED IN
INSTRUMENT SETTINGS
CONFIGURATION
to change, then
,
to desired value, then press
the
. Change and enter each portion of the
time.
3. Press the
to advance to the next parameter, DATE 1.
DATE 1
format
XX / XX / XX
Will read current date
FORMAT AND
ENTRY PER
TIME FORMAT
SELECTED IN
INSTRUMENT SETTINGS
CONFIGURATION
Press the
to change, then
,
to desired value, then press
the
. Change and enter each portion of the
date.
Edition 3
Rev G
8-2
Section 8
4. Press the
to advance to the next parameter, TIME 2 TAG.
TIME 2 TAG
STOP TIME
Refer to Section 3.4.2 Changing Text, page 3-3 for
Selections
Text
5. Press the
instructions.
to advance to the next parameter, TIME 2.
TIME 2
format
FORMAT AND
ENTRY PER
TIME FORMAT
SELECTED IN
INSTRUMENT SETTINGS
CONFIGURATION
06:00 AM
Press the
to change, then
,
to desired value, then press
the
. Change and enter each portion of the
time.
Section 8
8-3
Edition 3
Rev G
6. Press the
to advance to the next parameter, DATE 2.
DATE 2
format
XX / XX / XX
Will read current date
FORMAT AND
ENTRY PER
TIME FORMAT
SELECTED IN
INSTRUMENT SETTINGS
CONFIGURATION
Press the
to change, then
,
to desired value, then press the
.
Change and enter each portion of the date.
7. Press the
to advance to the next parameter, DAY OF WEEK ACTUATOR.
DAY OF WEEK ACTUATOR
SUN
SUN MON TUE WED
THUR FRI SAT
Press the
to change, then
to desired value, then press the
,
.
Day of Week Actuator works in conjunction with the CURRENT DAY entry under INSTRUMENT SETTINGS, page
4-76. The DAY OF WEEK ACTUATOR will be active if the day selected matches the current calender day. For
example, if today is THURSDAY and the DAY OF WEEK ACTUATOR selected is THUR, the actuator will be true
until the clock calendar rolls over to FRIDAY.
Edition 3
Rev G
8-4
Section 8
8. Press the
to advance to the next parameter, DAY OF OF MONTH ACTUATOR.
DAY OF MONTH ACT.
1
Press the
Selections
1 to 31
to change, then
,
to desired value, then press the
.
Day of Month Actuator works according to the days numerical date. For example, if today's date is the 15th and
the DAY OF MONTH ACTUATOR date is selected is 15, the actuator will be active until the clock calendar rolls
over to the 16th.
9. Press the
to advance to the next parameter, TIME DISPLAY OPTION.
TIME DISPLAY OPTION
NOT DISPLAYED
Selections
NOT DISPLAYED
IN CONTINUOUS MODE
IN SEQUENTIAL MODE
IN BOTH MODES
10. Press the
Section 8
Press the
to change, then
desired choice, then press the
to
.
at any time while not in modify, to exit. Refer to the beginning of this section, page 8-1.
8-5
Edition 3
Rev G
Section 9 - Enables & Passwords
Enables and Passwords provides a means of enabling or disabling prompt sections and provides additional
operational security with the use of 6 digit password.
If the Display prompts or Chart prompts are disabled, those prompt sections will not be accessible and DISPLAY
KEY DISABLED or CHART KEY DISABLED will be displayed when the corresponding key is pressed. If other
prompt sections are disabled, their corresponding access or selection prompts will not appear.
Passwords can restrict access to the Display, Chart, and System prompts, and the Enables and Passwords
prompts section. If any of the passwords is set to a value other than zero, the corresponding password will be
requested when the operator attempts to access that prompt section. Should a password be forgotten or misplaced, contact the factory for the master password.
From the Normal Display, press the
until ENABLES & PASSWORDS appears in the lower display line. If
PASSWORD appears in the lower display line, the correct "password" will need to be entered before access to
Enables & Passwords is allowed.
1. Press the
to display CHANGE ALL ENABLES.
CHANGE ALL ENABLES
NO
Press the
Selections
NO YES
to change, then
desired choice, then press the
, to
.
Choose YES to change all Enables at the same time.
If selection was NO, proceed to step 2.
If selection was YES:
CHANGE ALL TO
TOGGLE
Press the
Selections
DISABLED ENABLED
TOGGLE
,
to desired choice, then press
the
Section 9
to change, then
9-1
.
Edition 3
Rev G
2. Press the
to advance to the next parameter, ACTION TIME SETTINGS.
ACTION TIME SETTINGS
Selections
DISABLED ENABLED
3. Press the
Press the
to change, then
desired choice, then press the
, to
.
to advance to the next parameter, PROFILE ENTRY (Only on Profiles).
PROFILE ENTRY
(Only on Profilers)
Selections
DISABLED ENABLED
Press the
to change, then
desired choice, then press the
4. Press the
, to
.
to advance to the next parameter, PROFILE CONTROL (Only on Profiles).
PROFILE CONTROL
(Only on Profilers)
Selections
DISABLED ENABLED
Press the
to change, then
desired choice, then press the
Edition 3
Rev G
9-2
, to
.
Section 9
.
5. Press the
to advance to the next parameter, ALARM SETTINGS.
ALARM SETTINGS
Selections
DISABLED ENABLED
Press the
to change, then
desired choice, then press the
6. Press the
, to
.
to advance to the next parameter, TUNING PARAMETERS (only seen if CONTROLLER).
TUNING PARAMETERS
Selections
DISABLED ENABLED
7. Press the
Press the
to change, then
desired choice, then press the
, to
.
to advance to the next parameter, SETPOINT CHANGES (only seen if CONTROLLER).
SETPOINT CHANGES
Press the
Selections
DISABLED ENABLED
to change, then
desired choice, then press the
Section 9
9-3
, to
.
Edition 3
Rev G
8. Press the
to advance to the next parameter, CONFIGURATION.
CONFIGURATION
Selections
DISABLED ENABLED
Press the
to change, then
desired choice, then press the
9. Press the
, to
.
to advance to the next parameter, DERIVED ACTUATORS.
DERIVED ACTUATORS
Press the
Selections
DISABLED ENABLED
10. Press the
to change, then
desired choice, then press the
, to
.
to advance to the next parameter, OPERATOR INPUTS CONFIGURATION.
OPERATOR INPUTS CONF
Press the
Selections
DISABLED ENABLED
Edition 3
Rev G
to change, then
desired choice, then press the
9-4
, to
.
Section 9
11. Press the
to advance to the next parameter, OPERATOR MESSAGES.
OPERATOR MESSAGES
Press the
Selections
DISABLED ENABLED
12. Press the
to change, then
, to
desired choice, then press the
.
to advance to the next parameter, CHART MESSAGES.
CHART MESSAGES
Press the
Selections
DISABLED ENABLED
13. Press the
to change, then
desired choice, then press the
, to
.
to advance to the next parameter, SIMULATED VARIABLES.
SIMULATED VARIABLES
Press the
Selections
DISABLED ENABLED
Section 9
to change, then
desired choice, then press the
9-5
, to
.
Edition 3
Rev G
14. Press the
to advance to the next parameter, TEST.
TEST
Selections
DISABLED ENABLED
15. Press the
Press the
to change, then
desired choice, then press the
, to
.
to advance to the next parameter, CALIBRATION.
CALIBRATION
Selections
DISABLED ENABLED
16. Press the
Press the
to change, then
desired choice, then press the
, to
.
to advance to the next parameter, CHART PROMPTS.
CHART PROMPTS
Press the
Selections
DISABLED ENABLED
Edition 3
Rev G
to change, then
desired choice, then press the
9-6
, to
.
Section 9
17. Press the
to advance to the next parameter, CHART CONFIGURATION.
CHART CONFIGURATION
Press the
Selections
DISABLED ENABLED
18. Press the
to change, then
desired choice, then press the
, to
.
to advance to the next parameter, DISPLAY PROMPTS.
DISPLAY PROMPTS
Selections
DISABLED ENABLED
19. Press the
Press the
to change, then
desired choice, then press the
, to
.
to advance to the next parameter, OPERATOR INPUTS.
OPERATOR INPUTS
Press the
Selections
DISABLED ENABLED
Section 9
to change, then
desired choice, then press the
9-7
, to
.
Edition 3
Rev G
20. Press the
to advance to the next parameter, CONTROL STATE ACCESS (only seen if CONTROL-
LER)
CONTROL STATE ACCESS
Press the
Selections
DISABLED ENABLED
21. Press the
to change, then
, to
desired choice, then press the
.
to advance to the next parameter, SYSTEM PROMPTS PASSWORD.
SYSTEM PROMPTS
PASSWORD REQ.
Press the
Selections
0 to 999999
(0=No password protection)
22. Press the
0
to change, then
desired value, then press the
, to
.
to advance to the next parameter, ENABLES & PASSWORDS PASSWORD.
ENABLES & PASSWORDS
PASSWORD
Press the
to change, then
desired value, then press the
Edition 3
Rev G
0
, to
Selections
0 to 999999
(0=No password protection)
.
9-8
Section 9
23.Press the
to advance to the next parameter, CHART PROMPTS PASSWORD.
CHART PROMPTS
PASSWORD
Press the
to change, then
desired value, then press the
24. Press the
0
, to
Selections
0 to 999999
(0=No password protection)
.
to advance to the next parameter, DISPLAY PROMPTS PASSWORD.
DISPLAY PROMPTS
PASSWORD
Press the
to change, then
desired value, then press the
25. To exit, press the
Section 9
0
, to
Selections
0 to 999999
(0=No password protection)
.
.
9-9
Edition 3
Rev G
Section 10 - Test
Test describes all possible diagnostic tests built into the recorder.
From the Normal Display, depress the
until TESTS appears in the lower display line. If PASSWORD
appears in the lower display line, the correct "password" will need to be entered before access to Test is allowed.
If TESTS is not displayed, then Test has been disabled. Refer to Section 9, Enables and Passwords, for instructions to enable Test.
A list of available tests and their purpose are shown in Table 10-1.
TABLE 10-1 AVAILABLE TEST
Relays
Used to verify that all LEDs, Relays and/or Solid State Relay Drivers (SSRD) are
working correctly.
Display
Used to verify the display is functional.
Keypad
Used to verify that all keys are functional.
LEDs
Used to verify that the functionality of the LEDs.
Chart Demonstration
Used to demonstrate chart capabilites.
CAUTION: When this test is iniitated, any parameter values previously
programmed in Chart Configuration and Recorders are replaced with the
demonstration values.
A/D Reset Counter
Displays the number of times the A/D counter has been reset.
FACTORY USE ONLY!
A/D Raw Hex Counts
Displays raw counts for inputs and grounds. FACTORY USE ONLY!
Calibrated Input Values
Displays calibrated input values for inputs and grounds. FACTORY USE ONLY!
mA Output
Used to verify the mA Output is functional.
Section 10
10-1
Edition 3
Rev G
10.1 RELAY TEST
Allows the operator to verify that the LEDs, Relay and/or SSRD output(s) is/are working. A Volt/Ohm meter will be
required to test the output.
Step 1
With RELAY in the lower display line, depress the
and INITIATE RELAY TEST appears in the upper
display line and NO appears in the lower display line. Depress
, select YES, depress
to perform
the test.
Step 2
TEST IN PROCESS appears in the upper display line, LED 1 will be lit and Relay 1 will be energized or SSRD 1
will be on. For SPDT relays, connect the meter across the NO. and COM output terminals in the ohm scale. The
meter should read continuity with the relay on and infinitity when the relay is off. For SSRD outputs, connect the
meter across the output terminals in the Volt DC scale. The meter should read +5 VDC when the SSRD is on and
0 VDC when the SSRD is off.
Step 3
When each depression of the
advances through each available Relay and/or SSRD. All eight LEDs
should light, one after the other, as all 8 are always present.
Step 4
To exit the test, depress the
.
10.2 DISPLAY TEST
Allows the operator to verify that all dots in the VFD are working. No test equipment is required to perform this
test.
Step 1
With DISPLAY in the lower dipslay line, depress the
line and NO appears in the lower display line. Depress
test.
and INIT DISPLAY TEST appears in the upper display
, select YES, then depress
to perform the
Step 2
All dots in the vacuum fluorescent display will light. With each successive depression of the
show 2 lines of characters, then all dots being lit, then characters, etc..
Step 3
To exit the test, depress
normal display.
Edition 3
Rev G
, the display will
when the lines of characters are displayed. The instrument will return to the
10-2
Section 10
10.3 KEYPAD TEST
Allows the operator to verify that the keypad is functional. No test equipment is required to perform this test.
Step 1
With KEYPAD in the lower display line, depress the
and INITIATE KEYPAD TEST appears in the upper
display line and NO appears in the lower display line. Depress
, select YES, then depress
to start
the test.
Step 2
THE KEY PRESSED WAS appears in the upper display line and ENTER KEY appears in the lower display line.
With each depression of a key (EXCEPT ESC), the name of that key will appear in the lower display line. The
ESC key will exit this test.
Step 3
To exit this test, depress the
key and the instrument will return to the normal display.
10.4 LED TEST
Allows the operator to verify that the LEDs are functional. No test equipment is required to perform this test.
Step 1
With LED in the lower display line, depress the
and INITIATE LED TEST appears in the upper display line
and NO appears in the lower display line. Depress the
, select YES, then depress
to start the test.
Step 2
LED TEST PROCEDURE will appear in the upper display line and PRESS ENTER TO START will appear in the
lower display line. Depress
, and PRESS ENTER TO INDEX appears in the lower display line.
Step 3
Depress
and LED 1 should light. With each successive depression of
then OFF in order, 1 through 8, then all ON, then all OFF. If
again.
Step 4
To exit the test, depress the
Section 10
, the LEDs turn ON,
is depressed again, the sequence begins
and the instrument will return to the normal display.
10-3
Edition 3
Rev G
10.5 CHART DEMONSTRATION
Allows the user to demonstrate the chart capabilites. CAUTION: When this "TEST" is intiated, any parameter
values previously programmed will be replaced with the demonstration values.
Step 1
With CHART DEMONSTRATION in the lower display line, depress the
in the upper display line and NO appears in the lower display line.
, INITIATE CHART DEMO appears
Step 2
Depress
, select YES, depress
Step 3
Depress
, CHANGE CHART appears in the upper display line, select YES, select YES again for
. Instrument returns to Normal Display.
START NEW CHART.
Step 4
Chart demo begins.
Step 5
To exit or quit demo, depress
to CHART ROTATION and select OFF.
10.6 mA OUTPUT TEST
Allows the operator to verify that the current output(s) is/are functioning properly. A milliamp meter is required to
perform this test.
Step 1
With mA OUTPUT in the lower display line, depress the
and INITIATE mA OUT TEST appears in the upper
display line and NO appears in the lower display line. Depress
, select YES, then depress
to start
the test.
Step 2
SELECT mA OUTPUT will appear in the upper display line and 1 2 3 4 will appear in the lower display line. To
select output to be tested, depress the key directly under the desired output number.
Step 3
Connect the milliamp meter across the output terminals being tested. Be sure to observe proper polarity when
connecting the meter, terminal 1 is positive. Use the
to increase or decrease the current output in
1 mA steps, from 0 to 22 mA.
Edition 3
Rev G
10-4
Section 10
Step 4
The current output reading should be equal to the displayed value.
Step 5
To exit the test, depress the
Section 10
and the instrument will return to the normal display.
10-5
Edition 3
Rev G
Section 11 - Calibration
Calibration describes all possible field calibration procedures for the recorder as well as methods of invoking
default program and calibration values. The procedures described include the input and range calibration as well
as chart calibration.
From the Normal Display, press the
until CALIBRATION appears in the lower display line. If PASSWORD
appears in the lower display line, the correct "password" will need to be entered before access to Calibration is
allowed. If CALIBRATION is not displayed, then Calibration has been disabled. Refer to Section 9, Enables and
Passwords, for instructions to enable Calibration.
Press the
to display CALIBRATION in the upper display and SOLENOID ADJUSTMENT in the lower
display line. Press the
to advance the lower display to other calibrations available.
The table below (Table 11-1) lists the calibration routines. All instruments are calibrated prior to shipment from
the factory.
CAUTION: Do not attempt any calibration without the proper test equipment that meets or exceeds the
specifications listed below.
RTD Inputs:
CURRENT Inputs:
* TC or 0/25 mV Inputs:
*TC or 0/100 mV Inputs:
0 to 1 VOLT Inputs:
0 to 10 VOLT Inputs:
:
Decade box with 0.01% resolution or equivalent OR 100 ohm ± 0.01% AND 277
ohm ± 0.01%.
0.00 mA to 20.00 mA Source ± 0.01 mA DC
0.00 mV to 25.00 mV Source ± 0.01 mV DC
0.00 mV to 100.00 mV Source ± 0.01 mV DC
0.00 V to 1.00 V ± 0.01 V DC
0.00 V to 10.00 V ± 0.01 V DC
* For TC only - one (1) mercury thermometer ± .25 deg. C or equivalent and a Type X thermocouple; X = type of
TC input being calibrated.
TABLE 11-1 CALIBRATION ROUTINES
Input Calibration
Parameter Defaults
Chart Calibration
Milliamp Outputs
Solenoid Adjustment
Calibration Defaults
Section 11
Performs calibration of all input sources
Invokes the default values for all program parameters
Performs calibration of the pen to the chart. It is recommended that chart
calibration be performed whenever the chart size is changed.
Performs calibration of current outputs
Allows calibration of the current through the solenoid driver and is adjusted at the
factory to maximize life of the solenoid actuators. This procedure would not
normally need to be performed in the field.
Invokes the calibration default values.
11-1
Edition 3
Rev G
11.1 INPUT CALIBRATION
This routine allows for the calibration of all input channels and all input types.
Important Notes:
1. The calibration information is stored on each input board for all input types in an Electrically Erasable
Programmable Read Only Memory (EEPROM). The instrument and every input board supplied to the
field is shipped from the factory calibrated for each input type.
2. Recalibration should only be performed if it is determined that the Recorder is outside of the operating
specifications for the instrument itself (without considering the input source). Input Correction should be
used to correct for Input Signal inaccuracies.
3. If recalibration is necessary, it is only required for the particular input type and range that is being
used.
Step 1
With INPUT CALIBRATION in the lower display line, press the
to enter the Input Calibration. The upper
display line will display CALIBRATE INPUT and the lower display line will display IV1. If an input other than input
1 is to be calibrated, use the MOD, LEFT, SCROLL, UP or DOWN as required to select the proper input number,
then press the
.
Step 2
Press the
and the upper display line will display IVx CAL BOARD TYPE (x = input number selected) and
the lower display line will display TC/VOLT. If the input to be calibrated is TC/VOLT/mA, press the
to move
to the next step. If the input to be calibrated is RTD, press
, then F5, then
.
Step 3
IVX CAL WHAT RANGE should be in the upper display line and OFF - NO INPUT should be in the lower display
line. To calibrate, press the
, then UP, DOWN, LEFT, SCROLL as required to select the input range to be
calibrated per Table 11-2,
then press
.
TABLE 11-2 RANGE SELECT
Select
TC WIDE
TC NARROW
RTD
mA
25 mV
100 mV
1 VOLT
10 VOLT
Edition 3
Rev G
IF
Input Is
TC and not T, R, S, or B
TC and other than above
RTD
CURRENT
mV and maximum is 25 mV or less
mV and maximum is 100 mV or less
Volt and maximum is 1 Volt or less
Volt and maximum is 10 Volts or less
11-2
Section 11
Step 4
Be sure that the jumpers on the Input Board for the Input being calibrated are positioned as shown in Table 11-3,
and Figure 11-1 or Table 11-3A and Figure 11-1A, depending on which circuit board is fitted.
TABLE 11-3 INPUT BOARD JUMPER POSITIONS
TC NARROW
TC WIDE
RTD
mA
25 mV
100 mV
1 VOLT
10 VOLT
JU1
U
U
P
U
U
U
U
U
TC NARROW
TC WIDE
RTD
mA
25 mV
100 mV
1 VOLT P
10 VOLT
JU2
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
INPUT 1, 3, 5, 7
JU3
JU7
JU11
P
R
R
P
M
R
U
L
L
P
L
R
P
R
R
P
M
R
P
L
R
D
L
R
JU2
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
INPUT 1, 3, 5, 7
JU3
JU7
JU15
P
R
P
P
M
P
U
L
P
P
L
F
P
R
P
P
M
P
P
L
P
D
L
P
JU15
P
P
P
U
P
P
P
P
JU4
U
U
P
U
U
U
U
U
JU5
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
INPUT 2, 4, 6, 8
JU6
JU8
JU12
P
R
L
P
M
L
U
L
R
P
L
L
P
R
L
P
M
L
P
L
L
D
L
L
JU5
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
INPUT 2, 4, 6, 8
JU6
JU8
JU16
P
R
P
P
M
P
U
L
P
P
L
F
P
R
P
P
M
P
P
L
P
D
L
P
JU16
P
P
P
U
P
P
P
P
CODE: D - DOWN, L - LEFT, M - MIDDLE, P - PARKED, R - RIGHT, U - UP, F - FITTED
FIGURE 11-1
JU15
JU16
JU7
JU7
JU4
JU3 JU1
JU6
JU8
JU8
JU6
JU3
JU11
JU2
JU5
-
TB1
+
1
U6
+ 1
JU12
JU2
JU5
JU15
JU16
TB1
TB2
+
1
U1
+ 1
TB2
There are up to an additional 2 jumpers per Input Board that are used for BOARD ID. Location (Board 1 is the
bottom board) determines the position of JU13 and/or JU14.
Section 11
11-3
Edition 3
Rev G
SIDE
VIEW
Board 4
Board 3
Board 2
Board 1
FOR INPUTS
BOARD POSITION
1
1, 3, 5, 7
JU13
2, 4, 6, 8
JU14
2
3
4
When installing an Input Board for any reason, check the location (where this board is mounted), then verify the
position of JU13 and/or JU14. TC WIDE or TC NARROW were selected, go to Step 5, if not, go to Step 6.
Step 5
Depress the
and the upper display line will show IVx CAL CJC OR TC and the lower display line will show
TC, or CJC. Select TC by depressing the ,
then the
until TC is blinking, then depress the
.
Step 6
Depress the
and the upper display line will show IVx PERFORM CAL and the lower display line will show
NO. Select YES to perform the calibration. Connect the appropriate one of the following inputs to the input
terminals of the input being calibrated:
100 ohm resistor
RTD Inputs
0.0 mA DC
Current Inputs
0.0 mV DC
TC or mV DC Inputs
0.0 V DC
Volt Inputs
Wait one minute, then depress the
key.
Step 7
Connect the appropriate one of the following inputs to the input terminals of the input being calibrated:
277 ohm resistor
RTD Inputs
20.00 mA DC
Current Inputs
25.00 mV DC
TC or 0/25 mV DC Inputs
100.00 mV DC
TC or 0/25+ mV DC Inputs
1.00 V DC
1 V DC Inputs
10.00 V DC
10 V DC Inputs
Wait one minute, then depress the
Edition 3
Rev G
key.
11-4
Section 11
Step 8
Repeat steps 1 through 8 for each input to be calibrated.
11.2 COLD JUNCTION CALIBRATION
Step 1
With INPUT CALIBRATION on the lower display line, press the
to enter the Input Calibration. The upper
display will display CALIBRATE INPUT and the lower display line will display IV1. If other than IV1 or IV2 is to be
calibrated, depress
and select the input number for which it is desired to calibrate.
Note: There exists only one CJC sensor per input board or for every two input channels.
Step 2
Depress
and the upper display line will display IVx CAL BOARD TYPE (x=input number selected) and the
lower display line will display TC/VOLT or RTD. Select TC/VOLT.
Step 3
Depress
and IVx CAL WHAT RANGE should appear in the upper display line. Depress
then
,
until TC NARROW TC WIDE are displayed in the lower display line. Select which type
of TC used by depress-
then depress the
ing to alternately select TC NARROW or TC WIDE (see Table 11-2, page 11-2),
when the TC Range used is blinking.
Step 4
Be sure that the jumpers on the Input Board for the input being calibrated are positioned as shown in Table 11-3,
Page 11-3.
Step 5
Depress the
and IVx CAL CJC OR TC will appear in the upper display line, and TC or CJC will appear in
the lower display line. Select CJC by depressing the
, then the
until CJC is blinking, then depress
the
.
Step 6
IVx CJC TC TYPE will appear in the upper display line and J will appear in the lower display line. Depress the
, then UP, DOWN, LEFT and SCROLL as required to select the type of TC being used , then
depress the
Section 11
.
11-5
Edition 3
Rev G
Step 7
Connect the proper TC type up to the input being calibrated. Place the thermometer next to the HOT Junction
(sensor point) of the TC connected. Depress the
and the upper display line will display IVx CAL CJC and
lower display line will display CJC READS: 25.0 C. Depress the
, then use the UP/DOWN to change the
display to read what the mercury thermometer is reading, then depress the
.
Step 8
Depress the
and the upper display line will display IVx PERFORM CAL. Depress the
YES to perform calibration of the CJC.
Wait one minute, then depress the
and select
key.
Step 9
Repeat steps 1 through 8 for each input board to be calibrated.
11.3 PARAMETER DEFAULTS
This routine will invoke all of the default program parameter values. See Appendix C for the listing of default
values.
Step 1
With PARAMETER DEFAULTS in the lower display line, depress the
the upper display line and NO in the lower display line.
and SET DEFAULTS will appear in
Step 2
Depress then select YES to set the defaults.
11.4 CHART CALIBRATION
Step 1
With CHART CALIBRATION in the lower display line, depress
to enter the Chart Calibration. The upper
display line will display START CALIBRATION. To perform the chart calibration, depress
and select YES,
then depress the
. Press any key to continue.
Step 2
The upper display line will display INNER RING CALIBRATE and the lower display line will display SCROLL
TOGGLES RING. The keys will function as follows:
Edition 3
Rev G
11-6
Section 11
CHART
SCROLL
UP
DOWN
RESET
ESC
ENTER
Will place a dot on the inner or outer ring, whichever is selected for calibration
Will select either the inner or outer ring
Will move the selected (inner or outer) ring position to the left and print a dot in the new
position without moving the chart.
Will move the selected (inner or outer) ring position to the right and print a dot in the new
position without moving the chart.
Will move the chart 30 steps while not printing any dots
Will exit with no change to the calibration values
Will exit with the new values being stored
Step 3
With INNER RING CALIBRATE on the upper display line, depress the
to view the current location of the
inner ring zero point. Use UP/DOWN to position the dot accordingly, use RESET to move the chart.
Step 4
Depress
the to toggle the upper display line to read OUTER RING CALIBRATE.
Step 5
Depress
the to view the current location of the outer ring zero point. Use UP/DOWN to position the dot
accordingly, use RESET to move the chart.
Step 6
Depress
the to save calibration values.
11.5 MILLIAMP OUTPUT CALIBRATION
This routine is used to adjust the mA Output(s) for span. A milliamp meter is required to perform this calibration.
Step 1
With mA OUTPUTS in the lower display line, depress the
and CAL WHICH mA OUTPUT
appears in the upper display line and 1 appears in the lower display line. To
change,
depress the , then the to desired output number, then depress
.
Section 11
11-7
Edition 3
Rev G
Step 2
Connect the milliamp meter across the corresponding output terminals observing proper polarity, terminal 1 is
positive.
Step 3
Depress
and INITIATE mA CAL appears in the upper display line and NO appears in the lower display
line. Depress
select YES, then depress
.
Step 4
The display should be flashing the message: USE UP/DN TO ADJUST OUTPUT TO 20 mA ENTER WHEN
DONE. Depress
or
and HIT UP/DN OR ENTER appears in the upper display line and
OUTPUT TO 20 mA appears in the lower display line.
Step 5
Use the
as necessary to adjust the output to 20.00 on the milliamp meter. Depress
enter the new value or
to
to return to previous value. Depressing either ENTER or ESC exits the calibration.
11.6 SOLENOID CALIBRATION
CONSULT FACTORY.
This adjustment is made with an oscilloscope and a 10 ohm resistor. It should not have to be readjusted unless
the setting has been changed inadvertently.
11.7 CALIBRATION DEFAULTS
This routine will invoke a set of predetermined calibration values that are intended to emulate a "design center"
condition. In other words, the calibration values used would be the values derived for a unit whose critical components would be equal to the nominal values. These default values should be used only:
1. When it is known that the current calibration values are inaccurate and not acceptable and quick
action is needed to restore the recorder to some basic level of operation.
2. To initially calibrate a brand new input board (never before calibrated) as a starting point in the
calibration process. This is the procedure initially used to test the boards on start-up at the factory.
Edition 3
Rev G
11-8
Section 11
Step 1
With CALIBRATION DEFAULTS in the lower display line, depress the
the upper display line and NO appears in the lower display line.
Step 2
Depress
Section 11
and then select YES, then depress
. SET CAL DEFAULTS appears in
.
11-9
Edition 3
Rev G
SECTION 13 - CONTROLLERS
When the instrument is specified with the Controller option, in addition to the normal configuring required for the
Recorder functions, other parameters such as CONTROLLERS, SETPOINTS, and TUNING PARAMETERS will
need to be configured in order for the instrument to operate properly.
Along with the above, additional choices will appear in the selection list for certain prompts found elsewhere in
this manual.
The main part of the control capability is provided by the controller “functional block”. The controller “functional
block” is configured in the CONTROLLERS section of CONFIGURATION. The functional block provides the
following capabilities:
1) dual output ON/OFF and PID automatic and manual control,
2) bumpless and balanceless automatic/manual transfer,
3) auto/manual control switching, local/remote switching, and dual setpoint switching,
4) setpoint ramping,
5) “automatic transfer”,
6) slew rate (output ramping), and
7) setpoint selecting.
The main (first), second, and remote setpoint sources are selectable. The actuators for auto/manual control
switching, local/remote switching, and dual setpoint switching, are selectable.
The following items can be selected for display in the “normal display” mode: the “selected setpoint” (which is the
current setpoint value before ramping), the “ramped setpoint” (which is the internal setpoint value, after ramping is
applied, which is used as the control point), and the “% outputs”.
Besides the controller block itself, several other items can be configured, SETPOINTS, CONTROL STATE ACCESS, and TUNING. Located in the CONFIGURATION section, SETPOINTS, where setpoints are defined and
labeled, and CONTROL STATE ACCESS, used to configure prompting, accessed by the
key, providing
easy assess to the most often used control activities. TUNING PARAMETERS, included as a section of the
SYSTEM PROMPTS, is accessed via the
Section 13
key from the “normal display”.
13-1
Edition 3
Rev G
Up to 8 setpoints can be configured. Each has a variable text prompt, units, decimal position, limits, and “normal
display” display option. Whenever the PROMPT TEXT, as configured in SETPOINTS, is not blank, the setpoint
will be displayed in the
key prompts.
The setpoints are not inherently associated with a controller, so they can also be used for ratios, direct drive outs
(to a current output), or any other purposes. Setpoint changes can be inhibited via the ENABLES and PASSWORDS.
The SETPOINTS included in the
prompts are the operator changeable values. The setpoints included in
the “normal display” are for display purposes only, and both the currently selected setpoint and the internal
ramping setpoint can be displayed.
Control State Access provides an easy and quick way to change controller states (automatic to manual, local
setpoint to remote setpoint), via the Display key. When the default control actuator settings are used, they affect
the actuators which change the controller states. Note that although the default settings imply a one-to-one
correspondence between control state access numbers and controller numbers, this is not necessarily the case.
Up to four Control State Accesses may be configured and all four are initially set. If all four are not to be used, the
unused should be changed to “blank”.
EXAMPLE:
Let’s consider auto/manual for controller 1 (C1).
The first would be using a remote contact closure input to switch between auto and manual control. This method
requires that an input be used for Switch Contact. To configure, set an unused INPUT TYPE/RANGE to SWITCH
CONTACT (found in INPUTS part of CONFIGURATION), then set C1 MANUAL ACTUATOR to SWx (x= number
of Input Variable set earlier).
A second and possibly more convenient method of changing states would be the “CONTROL STATE ACCESS”
programming capability. The CONTROL STATE ACCESS capability is configured in CONFIGURATION and used
via the
key. To configure:
Set C1 MANUAL ACTUATOR, found in CONTROLLERS, to CA1F1. Next, set CA1 LINE 1 TEXT, found in
CONTROL STATE ACCESS, to CONTROLLER 1 (DEFAULT), CA1 LINE 2 TEXT to A/M (DEFAULT) and
CA1 F1 KEY USAGE to C1 AUTO/MANUAL (DEFAULT). NOTE: If only one control is being utilized, it is
suggested that the remaining prompts be blank, otherwise they will be displayed.
Edition 3
Rev G
13-2
Section 13
To utilize the CONTROL STATE ACCESS capability and select either AUTOMATIC or MANUAL control, proceed
as follows:
From the “Normal Display”, depress the
key, CONTROLLER 1 should be displayed on the upper
display line (or what was configured for CA1 LINE 1 TEXT above) and A/M should be displayed on the
lower display line (or what was configured for CA1 LINE 2 TEXT above). Depress the key directly below
A/M and the lower display line should display AUTOMATIC
MANUAL with the active selection blinking.
To select Manual, depress the key directly below the MANUAL in the display.
13.1 ENTERING CONTROLLERS
From the Normal Display, press the
key until CONFIGURATION is seen in the lower display line. If PASS-
WORD appears in the lower display line, the correct “password” will need to be entered before access to CONFIGURATION is allowed. If CONFIGURATION is not displayed, then Configuration has been disabled. Refer to
Section 9, Enables and Passwords, for instructions to enable Configuration.
Note: A Controller, although configured, will not operate unless the corresponding PROCESS VARIABLE (PV) is
properly configured.
With CONFIGURATION in the lower display line, press the
key, then the
key until CONTROLLERS
appears in the lower display line.
1. Press the
key to display CONTROLLER NUMBER.
CONTROLLER NUMBER
1
Selections
1-8
Press
to change, then
or
to
desired controller number, then press the
to store into menory.
Section 13
13-3
Edition 3
Rev G
2. Press the
to advance to the next parameter, COPY/INITIALIZE.
Cx COPY/INITIALIZE
NO
Selections
YES or NO
Press the
to change, then
to desired selection, then press
If selection is NO, see Step 3.
or
.
If selection is YES:
Cx COPY FROM CONTRLR
(0=INITIALIZE)
Input to be copied from
0=FACTORY DEFAULT
X
Press the
or
to change to the
control number to be copied from.
3. Press the
to advance to the next parameter, CONTROL TYPE.
Cx CONTROL TYPE
STANDARD
Selections
STANDARD
CASCADE
FEEDFORWARD
SP + PID
Edition 3
Rev G
Press the
to change, then
or
to desired choice, then press the
.
13-4
Section 13
CASCADE control uses two “control blocks”. The output of one controller is the setpoint of a second controller.
Ratio and bias (see Steps 20 & 21) need to be applied to the connecting setpoint. Because of the interaction
between controllers, cascade control will only apply to controllers 1 and 2, or 3 and 4, used in pairs, with 1 and 3
being the first controller.
FEEDFORWARD adds a 0-100% value to the PID output. When feedforward is used, the feedforward source
(Step 22) is scaled to provide a 0-100% value to work with the loop output of 0-100%. Depending on the limits of
the input, and the scaling, the FF-term may be limited to less than 100%.
SP + PID adds a term that makes the output primarily proportional to the setpoint, but with PID capability added.
This is used primarily for flow control.
4. Press the
to advance to the next parameter, OUTPUT 1 TYPE.
Cx OUTPUT 1 TYPE
NONE/OFF
Selections
NONE/OFF
ON/OFF DIRECT
ON/OFF REVERSE
PID DIRECT
PID REVERSE
5. Press the
Press the
to change, then
or
to desired choice, then press the
.
to advance to the next parameter, OUTPUT 2 TYPE.
Cx OUTPUT 2 TYPE
NONE/OFF
Selections
NONE/OFF
ON/OFF DIRECT
ON/OFF REVERSE
PID DIRECT
PID REVERSE
Section 13
Press the
to change, then
or
to desired choice, then press the
.
13-5
Edition 3
Rev G
6. Press the
to advance to the next parameter, OUTPUT 1 HYSTERESIS
(only seen if OUT 1 TYPE is ON/OFF).
Cx OUT 1 HYSTERESIS
NOTE: Units correspond to
Units configured in Process
Variables
Press the
3 UNITS
to change, then
Selections
0 to 999999
(decimal position = 0)
0 to 9.9999
(decimal position = 4)
or
to desired number, then press the
.
Note: Hysteresis centers on the control setpoint.
7. Press the
to advance to the next parameter, OUTPUT 2 HYSTERESIS (only seen if OUT 2 TYPE is ON/
OFF).
Cx OUT 2 HYSTERESIS
NOTE: Units correspond to
Units configured in Process
Variables
Press the
to change, then
to desired number, then press the
3 UNITS
Selections
0 to 999999
(decimal position = 0)
0 to 9.9999
(decimal position = 4)
or
.
Note: Hysteresis centers on the control setpoint.
8. Press the
to advance to the next parameter, OUTPUT 1 PERCENT UPPER LIMIT (only seen if OUT 1
TYPE is PID).
Cx OUT 1 PERCENT
UPPER LIMIT
Press the
100%
to change, then
or
to desired choice, then press the
.
Selections
1 to100
Edition 3
Rev G
13-6
Section 13
9. Press the
to advance to the next parameter, OUTPUT 2 PERCENT UPPER LIMIT (only seen if OUT 2
TYPE is PID).
Cx OUT 2 PERCENT
UPPER LIMIT
Press the
100%
to change, then
or
to desired choice, then press the
.
Selections
1 to100
10.Press the
to advance to the next parameter, OUTPUT 1 PERCENT ON ERROR (only seen if OUT 1
TYPE is PID).
Cx OUT 1 PERCENT
ON ERROR
Press the
0%
to change, then
or
to desired choice, then press the
.
Selections
1 to100
11.Press the
to advance to the next parameter, OUTPUT 2 PERCENT ON ERROR (only seen if OUT 2
TYPE is PID).
Press the
Cx OUT 2 PERCENT
ON ERROR
0%
to change, then
or
to desired choice, then press the
.
Selections
1 to100
Section 13
13-7
Edition 3
Rev G
12.Press the
to advance to the next parameter, OUTPUT SLEW RATE (only available with PID).
Cx OUTPUT SLEW RATE
Press the
0% / MIN
to change, then
or
to desired choice, then press the
.
Selections
0 to100%
0 = OFF
SLEW RATE allows the control to slowly ramp the output to avoid a rapid start up. Abrupt changes may set the
outputs to 0%. If the slew rate is programmed to 60%/MIN, the rate of change would be 1%/second.
Edition 3
Rev G
13-8
Section 13
13.Press the
to advance to the next parameter, MANUAL ACTUATOR (only if either output is proportional)
Cx MANUAL ACTUATOR
CAxF1
Selections
NONE/OFF
ON/CONTINUOUS
ANY ALARM
ANY PROCESS ALARM
A11 A12 A13 A14
A21 A22 A23 A24
A31 A32 A33 A34
A41 A42 A43 A44
INSTRUMENT ALARM
CHART FULL
OP INP 1 OP INP 2
OP INP 3 OP INP 4
OP INP 5 OP INP 6
OP INP 7 OP INP 8
OP INP 9
OP INP 10
OP INP 11 OP INP 12
CHART CHANGED
CHART ROTATION
TREND DATA COLLECTION
DA1 DA2 DA3
DA4 DA5 DA6
DA7 DA8 DA9
DA10 DA11 DA12
DA13 DA14 DA15
DA16 DA17 DA18
DA19 DA20 DA21
DA22 DA23 DA24
OUTPUT 11 OUTPUT 12
OUTPUT 21 OUTPUT 22
OUTPUT 31 OUTPUT 32
OUTPUT 41 OUTPUT 42
PRESET 1 PRESET 2
PRESET 3 PRESET 4
TOTAL PO 1 TOTAL PO 2
TOTAL PO 3 TOTAL PO 4
TIME 1 TIME/DATE 1
TIME 2 TIME/DATE 2
TIME 1 TO TIME 2
TIME/DATE 1 TO 2
TIMER 1 TIMER 2
TIMER 3 TIMER 4
SW 1 SW 2 SW 3 SW 4
SW 5 SW 6 SW 7 SW 8
COMM TRIGGER 1
COMM TRIGGER 2
COMM TRIGGER 3
COMM TRIGGER 4
F1 F2 F3 F4
RESET MOD ENTER
ON THE HOUR
DAY OF WEEK
DAY OF MONTH
RELAY 1 RELAY 2
RELAY 3 RELAY 4
RELAY 5 RELAY 6
RELAY 7 RELAY 8
CA1F1 CA1F2 CA1F3
CA1F5 CA1F5
CA2F1 CA2F2 CA2F3
CA2F5 CA2F5
CA3F1 CA3F2 CA3F3
CA3F5 CA3F5
CA4F1 CA4F2 CA4F3
CA4F5 CA4F5
CA5F1 CA5F2 CA5F3
CA5F5 CA5F5
Press the
to change, then
,
to desired choice, then press the
.
Cx Manual Actuator selects the actuator, when true, switches the instrument to the MANUAL mode of control, and
when false, switches back to AUTO mode.
Section 13
13-9
Edition 3
Rev G
14.Press the
to advance to the next parameter, AUTO MANUAL AUTO TRANSFER (only if MANUAL
ACTUATOR is not NONE/OFF).
Cx AUTO M/A TRANSFER
OFF
Selections
OFF ON
15.Press the
NOTE: If the process variable
reaches setpoint while in manual
mode, this parameter, when selected,
allows the controller to revert to
automatic mode without operator
intervention.
Press the
to change, then
or
to desired choice, then press the
.
to advance to the next parameter, MAIN SETPOINT SOURCE.
Cx MAIN SP SOURCE
NOTE: Whatever value is selected
as the source of the setpoint, the
decimal position and the units type
follow what was configured in
Process Variables.
SPx
Selections
NONE USED
IV1 IV2 IV3 IV4
IV5 IV6 IV7 IV8
PV1 PV2 PV3 PV4
DV1 DV2 DV3
DV4 DV5 DV6
DV7 DV8 DV9
DV10 DV11 DV12
CV1 CV2 CV3 CV4
CV5 CV6 CV7 CV8
CV9 CV10 CV11 CV12
TOTAL 1 TOTAL 2
TOTAL 3 TOTAL 4
SP1 SP2 SP3 SP4
SP5 SP6 SP7 SP8
OUTPUT 11 OUTPUT 12
OUTPUT 21 OUTPUT 22
OUTPUT 31 OUTPUT 32
OUTPUT 41 OUTPUT 42
SV1 SV2 SV3 SV4
Edition 3
Rev G
Press the
to change, then
to desired choice, then press the
13-10
,
.
Section 13
16.Press the
to advance to the next parameter, REMOTE SETPOINT ACTUATOR.
Cx REMOTE SP ACTUATR
CAxF5
Selections
NONE/OFF
ON/CONTINUOUS
ANY ALARM
ANY PROCESS ALARM
A11 A12 A13 A14
A21 A22 A23 A24
A31 A32 A33 A34
A41 A42 A43 A44
INSTRUMENT ALARM
CHART FULL
OP INP 1 OP INP 2
OP INP 3 OP INP 4
OP INP 5 OP INP 6
OP INP 7 OP INP 8
OP INP 9
OP INP 10
OP INP 11 OP INP 12
CHART CHANGED
CHART ROTATION
TREND DATA COLLECTION
DA1 DA2 DA3
DA4 DA5 DA6
DA7 DA8 DA9
DA10 DA11 DA12
DA13 DA14 DA15
DA16 DA17 DA18
DA19 DA20 DA21
DA22 DA23 DA24
OUTPUT 11 OUTPUT 12
OUTPUT 21 OUTPUT 22
OUTPUT 31 OUTPUT 32
OUTPUT 41 OUTPUT 42
PRESET 1 PRESET 2
PRESET 3 PRESET 4
TOTAL PO 1 TOTAL PO 2
TOTAL PO 3 TOTAL PO 4
TIME 1 TIME/DATE 1
TIME 2 TIME/DATE 2
TIME 1 TO TIME 2
TIME/DATE 1 TO 2
TIMER 1 TIMER 2
TIMER 3 TIMER 4
SW 1 SW 2 SW 3 SW 4
SW 5 SW 6 SW 7 SW 8
COMM TRIGGER 1
COMM TRIGGER 2
COMM TRIGGER 3
COMM TRIGGER 4
F1 F2 F3 F4
RESET MOD ENTER
ON THE HOUR
DAY OF WEEK
DAY OF MONTH
RELAY 1 RELAY 2
RELAY 3 RELAY 4
RELAY 5 RELAY 6
RELAY 7 RELAY 8
CA1F1 CA1F2 CA1F3
CA1F5 CA1F5
CA2F1 CA2F2 CA2F3
CA2F5 CA2F5
CA3F1 CA3F2 CA3F3
CA3F5 CA3F5
CA4F1 CA4F2 CA4F3
CA4F5 CA4F5
CA5F1 CA5F2 CA5F3
CA5F5 CA5F5
Press the
to change, then
,
to desired choice, then press the
.
Remote Actuator selects the actuator, when true, switches the instrument to the REMOTE SETPOINT mode of
control, and when false, switches back to LOCAL SETPOINT mode.
Section 13
13-11
Edition 3
Rev G
17.Press the
to advance to the next parameter, REMOTE SETPOINT SOURCE (only if REMOTE SP
ACTUATOR is not NONE/OFF).
Cx REMOTE SP SOURCE
NONE USED
Selections
NONE USED
IV1 IV2 IV3 IV4
IV5 IV6 IV7 IV8
PV1 PV2 PV3 PV4
DV1 DV2 DV3
DV4 DV5 DV6
DV7 DV8 DV9
DV10 DV11 DV12
CV1 CV2 CV3 CV4
CV5 CV6 CV7 CV8
CV9 CV10 CV11 CV12
TOTAL 1 TOTAL 2
TOTAL 3 TOTAL 4
SP1 SP2 SP3 SP4
SP5 SP6 SP7 SP8
OUTPUT 11 OUTPUT 12
OUTPUT 21 OUTPUT 22
OUTPUT 31 OUTPUT 32
OUTPUT 41 OUTPUT 42
SV1 SV2 SV3 SV4
Edition 3
Rev G
NOTE: Whatever value is selected
as the source of the setpoint, the
decimal position and the units type
follow what was configured in
Process Variables.
Press the
to change, then
to desired choice, then press the
13-12
,
.
Section 13
18.Press the
to advance to the next parameter, SECOND SETPOINT ACTUATOR.
Cx SECOND SP ACTUATR
CAxF3
Selections
NONE/OFF
ON/CONTINUOUS
ANY ALARM
ANY PROCESS ALARM
A11 A12 A13 A14
A21 A22 A23 A24
A31 A32 A33 A34
A41 A42 A43 A44
INSTRUMENT ALARM
CHART FULL
OP INP 1 OP INP 2
OP INP 3 OP INP 4
OP INP 5 OP INP 6
OP INP 7 OP INP 8
OP INP 9
OP INP 10
OP INP 11 OP INP 12
CHART CHANGED
CHART ROTATION
TREND DATA COLLECTION
DA1 DA2 DA3
DA4 DA5 DA6
DA7 DA8 DA9
DA10 DA11 DA12
DA13 DA14 DA15
DA16 DA17 DA18
DA19 DA20 DA21
DA22 DA23 DA24
OUTPUT 11 OUTPUT 12
OUTPUT 21 OUTPUT 22
OUTPUT 31 OUTPUT 32
OUTPUT 41 OUTPUT 42
PRESET 1 PRESET 2
PRESET 3 PRESET 4
TOTAL PO 1 TOTAL PO 2
TOTAL PO 3 TOTAL PO 4
TIME 1 TIME/DATE 1
TIME 2 TIME/DATE 2
TIME 1 TO TIME 2
TIME/DATE 1 TO 2
TIMER 1 TIMER 2
TIMER 3 TIMER 4
SW 1 SW 2 SW 3 SW 4
SW 5 SW 6 SW 7 SW 8
COMM TRIGGER 1
COMM TRIGGER 2
COMM TRIGGER 3
COMM TRIGGER 4
F1 F2 F3 F4
RESET MOD ENTER
ON THE HOUR
DAY OF WEEK
DAY OF MONTH
RELAY 1 RELAY 2
RELAY 3 RELAY 4
RELAY 5 RELAY 6
RELAY 7 RELAY 8
CA1F1 CA1F2 CA1F3
CA1F5 CA1F5
CA2F1 CA2F2 CA2F3
CA2F5 CA2F5
CA3F1 CA3F2 CA3F3
CA3F5 CA3F5
CA4F1 CA4F2 CA4F3
CA4F5 CA4F5
CA5F1 CA5F2 CA5F3
CA5F5 CA5F5
Section 13
Press the
to change, then
to desired choice, then press the
13-13
,
.
Edition 3
Rev G
19.Press the
to advance to the next parameter, SECOND SETPOINT SOURCE (only if SECOND SP
ACTUATOR is not NONE/OFF).
Cx SECOND SP SOURCE
NONE USED
Selections
NONE USED
IV1 IV2 IV3 IV4
IV5 IV6 IV7 IV8
PV1 PV2 PV3 PV4
DV1 DV2 DV3
DV4 DV5 DV6
DV7 DV8 DV9
DV10 DV11 DV12
CV1 CV2 CV3 CV4
CV5 CV6 CV7 CV8
CV9 CV10 CV11 CV12
TOTAL 1 TOTAL 2
TOTAL 3 TOTAL 4
SP1 SP2 SP3 SP4
SP5 SP6 SP7 SP8
OUTPUT 11 OUTPUT 12
OUTPUT 21 OUTPUT 22
OUTPUT 31 OUTPUT 32
OUTPUT 41 OUTPUT 42
SV1 SV2 SV3 SV4
20.Press the
NOTE: Whatever value is selected
as the source of the setpoint, the
decimal position and the units type
follow what was configured in
Process Variables.
Press the
to change, then
,
to desired choice, then press the
.
to advance to the next parameter, REMOTE SETPOINT RATIO.
NOTE: Ratio is applied to the remote
setpoint source before it is used, and
to the output of the first controller in
cascade mode before it is used as the
setpoint of the second controller.
Ratio is a multiplier applied to the
output. (Controller Output 1 *Ratio) =
Controller 2 Setpoint.
Cx REMOTE SP RATIO
1.000
Selections
.001 to 999.000
Press the
to change, then
desired number, then press the
Edition 3
Rev G
, to
.
13-14
Section 13
21.Press the
to advance to the next parameter, REMOTE SETPOINT BIAS.
NOTE: Bias is applied to the remote
setpoint before it is used, and to the
output of the first controller in cascade
mode, before it is used as the setpoint
of the second controller. Bias is an
offset added to the output. (Controller
Output 1 + Bias ) = Controller 2
Setpoint.
Press the
0
to change,then
desired number, then press the
22.Press the
Cx REMOTE SP BIAS
Selections
± 999999
(decimal position = 0)
±9.9999
(decimal position = 4)
, to
.
to advance to the next parameter, FEEDFORWARD SOURCE (only if FEEDFORWARD was
selected as CONTROL TYPE).
Cx FEEDFORWARD SOURCE
NONE USED
Selections
NONE USED
IV1 IV2 IV3 IV4
IV5 IV6 IV7 IV8
PV1 PV2 PV3 PV4
DV1 DV2 DV3
DV4 DV5 DV6
DV7 DV8 DV9
DV10 DV11 DV12
CV1 CV2 CV3 CV4
CV5 CV6 CV7 CV8
CV9 CV10 CV11 CV12
TOTAL 1 TOTAL 2
TOTAL 3 TOTAL 4
SP1 SP2 SP3 SP4
SP5 SP6 SP7 SP8
OUTPUT 11 OUTPUT 12
OUTPUT 21 OUTPUT 22
OUTPUT 31 OUTPUT 32
OUTPUT 41 OUTPUT 42
SV1 SV2 SV3 SV4
Section 13
NOTE: Whatever value is selected
as the source of the setpoint, the
decimal position and the units type
follow what was configured in
Process Variables.
Press the
to change,then
,
, to desired choice, then press the
13-15
.
Edition 3
Rev G
23.Press the
to advance to the next parameter, FEEDFORWARD HIGH (only if FEEDFORWARD was
selected as CONTROL TYPE).
Cx FEEDFORWARD HIGH
Press the
100
to change,then
desired number, then press the
, to
.
Selections
± 999999
(decimal position = 0)
±9.9999
(decimal position = 4)
24.Press the
to advance to the next parameter, FEEDFORWARD LOW (only if FEEDFORWARD was
selected as CONTROL TYPE).
Cx FEEDFORWARD LOW
Press the
0
to change,then
desired number, then press the
, to
.
Selections
± 999999
(decimal position = 0)
±9.9999
(decimal position = 4)
25.Press the
to advance to the next parameter, DISPLAY SELECTED SETPOINT.
Cx DISP. SELECTED SP
IN BOTH MODES
Selections
NOT DISPLAYED
IN CONTINOUS MODE
IN SEQUENTIAL MODE
IN BOTH MODES
Edition 3
Rev G
Press the
to change,then
desired choice, then press the
13-16
, to
.
Section 13
26.Press the
to advance to the next parameter, DISPLAY RAMPED SETPOINT.
Cx DISPLAY RAMPED SP
NOT DISPLAYED
Selections
NOT DISPLAYED
IN CONTINOUS MODE
IN SEQUENTIAL MODE
IN BOTH MODES
27.Press the
Press the
to change,then
desired choice, then press the
, to
.
to advance to the next parameter, DISPLAY % OUTPUTS (only if either output is propor-
tional).
Cx DISPLAY % OUTPUTS
NOT DISPLAYED
Selections
NOT DISPLAYED
IN CONTINOUS MODE
IN SEQUENTIAL MODE
IN BOTH MODES
28. Press the
Press the
to change,then
desired choice, then press the
, to
.
and the display advances to the next controller to be programmed. Refer to the beginning of
this section, page 13-3.
Section 13
13-17
Edition 3
Rev G
13.2 CONTROL SETPOINTS
There are 8 Control Setpoints that can be configured in the SETPOINTS section of CONFIGURATION. This
menu sets the text prompt for the setpoint, the unit type, decimal position, limits and the display option mode.
Setting and/or changing the setpoints is accomplished via the
prompt section.
If the PROMPT TEXT description for the setpoint is blank, the setpoint IS NOT ACTIVE and WILL NOT BE
DISPLAYED in the
prompt section.
From the Normal Display, press the
key until CONFIGURATION is seen in the lower display line. If PASS-
WORD appears in the lower display line, the correct “password” will need to be entered before access to CONFIGURATION is allowed. If CONFIGURATION is not displayed, then Configuration has been disabled. Refer to
Section9, Enables and Passwords, for instructions to enable Configuration.
With CONFIGURATION in the lower display line, press the
key, then the
key until SETPOINTS
appears in the lower display line.
1. Press the
key to display SETPOINT NUMBER.
SETPOINT NUMBER
1
Press the
to change, then
,
Selections
1-8
to desired setpoint number, then
press the
Edition 3
Rev G
.
13-18
Section 13
2. Press the
to advance to the next parameter, PROMPT TEXT.
SPx PROMPT TEXT
SETPOINT 1
Selections
TEXT
Refer to Section 3.4.2, Changing Text, for instructions.
Note: If PROMPT TEXT is blank, the corresponding setpoint will not be activated or appear in the prompts associated with the
3. Press the
key. Also, no other prompts are displayed for configuring the setpoint.
to advance to the next parameter, DISPLAY UNITS.
SPx DISPLAY UNITS
°F
Selections
°C °F OTHER
Press the
to change, then
choice, then press the
to desired
, or press the key directly
below the desired choice.
4. If DISPLAY UNITS selected was OTHER, press the
to advance to the next parameter, OTHER UNITS.
SPx OTHER UNITS
°F
Selections
TEXT
Refer to Section 3.4.2, Changing Text, for instructions.
Section 13
13-19
Edition 3
Rev G
5. Press the
to advance to the next parameter, DECIMAL POSITION.
SPx DECIMAL POSITION
0
Press the
to change, then
to desired number, then press the
6. Press the
Selections
0 to 4
.
to advance to the next parameter, UPPER LIMIT.
SPx UPPER LIMIT
100 UNITS
Units correspond to units
configured in Steps 3 or 4 above.
to change, then
Press the
desired value,or
then press the
7.Press the
, then
Selections
± -999999
(decimal position=0)
± -9.9999
(decimal position=4)
, to
,
.
to advance to the next parameter, LOWER LIMIT.
SPx LOWER LIMIT
0 UNITS
Units correspond to units
configured in Steps 3 or 4 above.
Press the
to change, then
desired value,or
then press the
Edition 3
Rev G
, then
, to
,
Selections
± -999999
(decimal position=0)
± -9.9999
(decimal position=4)
.
13-20
Section 13
8. Press the
to advance to the next parameter, DISPLAY OPTION.
SPx DISPLAY OPTION
NOT DISPLAYED
Selections
NOT DISPLAYED
IN CONTINUOUS MODE
IN SEQUENTIAL MODE
IN BOTH MODES
9. Press the
Press the
to change, then
to desired choice, then press the
.
and the display advances to the next setpoint to be programmed. Refer to the beginning of this
section, page 13-18.
Section 13
13-21
Edition 3
Rev G
13.3 CONTROL STATE ACCESS
CONTROL STATE ACCESS provides a quick and convenient method for changing states, such as AUTO to
MANUAL or LOCAL to REMOTE setpoint. If configured, when the
key is pressed, a two line prompt is
displayed and the Function Keys, as configured, perform these change state requirements. The two line prompt
which appears is fully configurable via the CONTROL STATE ACCESS section of CONFIGURATION.
From the Normal Display, press the
key until CONFIGURATION is seen in the lower display line. If PASS-
WORD appears in the lower display line, the correct “password” will need to be entered before access to CONFIGURATION is allowed. If CONFIGURATION is not displayed, then Configuration has been disabled. Refer to
Section 9, Enables and Passwords, for instructions to enable Configuration.
With CONFIGURATION in the lower display line, press the
key, then the
ACCESS appears in the lower display line. Press the
key until CONTROL STATE
key to display CONTROL STATE ACCESS on the
upper display line.
1. Press the
and LINE 1 TEXT appears in the upper display line and CONTROLLER x STATES appears in
the lower display line. This prompt defines the text that will appear in the upper display line when the
key is
pressed while in the Normal Display.
CA1 LINE TEXT
CONTROLLER x
Selections
TEXT
Refer to Section 3.4.2, Changing Text,
for instructions .
NOTE: If the CONTROL STATE ACCESS is not being used for Controller 1, it is suggested that this prompt be
blank.
Edition 3
Rev G
13-22
Section 13
2. Press the
to advance to the next parameter, LINE 2 TEXT.
CAx LINE 2 TEXT
A/M
SP1/SP2
L/R
Selections
TEXT
Refer to Section 3.4.2, Changing Text,
for instructions .
NOTE: If the CONTROL STATE ACCESS is not being used for Controller 1, OR, if SP1/SP2 AND/OR LOCAL
REMOTE (L/R), it is suggested that this prompt be blank.
3. Press the
to advance to the next parameter, F1 KEY USAGE.
CAx F1 KEY USAGE
Cx AUTO/MANUAL
Selections
NOT USED
C1 AUTO/MANUAL
C2 AUTO/MANUAL
C3 AUTO/MANUAL
C4 AUTO/MANUAL
LOCAL/REMOTE
SP1/SP2
CUSTOM
Section 13
Press the
to change, then
or
to desired choice, then press the
.
13-23
Edition 3
Rev G
4. Press the
to advance to the next parameter, F1 LINE 1 TEXT.
CAx F1 LINE 1 TEXT
CONTROLLER 1
Selections
TEXT
Refer to Section 3.4.2, Changing Text,
for instructions .
5. Press the
to advance to the next parameter, F1 OFF STATE TEXT (only seen if KEY USAGE selected
was CUSTOM).
CAx F1 OFF STATE TXT
AUTOMATIC
Selections
TEXT
Refer to Section 3.4.2, Changing Text,
for instructions .
6. Press the
to advance to the next parameter, F1 ON STATE TEXT (only seen if KEY USAGE selected
was CUSTOM).
CAx F1 ON STATE TEXT
MANUAL
Selections
TEXT
Refer to Section 3.4.2, Changing Text,
for instructions .
Edition 3
Rev G
13-24
Section 13
7. Press the
to advance to the next parameter, F2 KEY USAGE.
CAx F2 KEY USAGE
NOT USED
Selections
NOT USED
C1 AUTO/MANUAL
C2 AUTO/MANUAL
C3 AUTO/MANUAL
C4 AUTO/MANUAL
LOCAL/REMOTE
SP1/SP2
CUSTOM
8. Press the
Press the
to change, then
to desired choice, then press the
.
to advance to the next parameter, F2 LINE 1 TEXT (only seen if F2 KEY USAGE selected is
other than NOT USED).
CAx F2 LINE 1 TEXT
Selections
TEXT
Refer to Section 3.4.2, Changing Text,
for instructions .
9. Press the
to advance to the next parameter, F2 OFF STATE TEXT (only seen if KEY USAGE selected
was CUSTOM).
CAx F2 OFF STATE TXT
Selections
TEXT
Refer to Section 3.4.2, Changing Text,
for instructions .
Section 13
13-25
Edition 3
Rev G
10. Press the
to advance to the next parameter, F2 ON STATE TEXT (only seen if KEY USAGE selected
was CUSTOM).
CAx F2 ON STATE TEXT
Selections
TEXT
Refer to Section 3.4.2, Changing Text,
for instructions .
11. Press the
to advance to the next parameter, F3 KEY USAGE.
CAx F3 KEY USAGE
SP1/SP2
Selections
NOT USED
C1 AUTO/MANUAL
C2 AUTO/MANUAL
C3 AUTO/MANUAL
C4 AUTO/MANUAL
LOCAL/REMOTE
SP1/SP2
CUSTOM
12. Press the
Press the
to change, then
or
to desired choice, then press the
.
to advance to the next parameter, F3 LINE 1 TEXT.
CAx F3 LINE 1 TEXT
CONTROLLER 1
Selections
TEXT
Refer to Section 3.4.2, Changing Text,
for instructions .
Edition 3
Rev G
13-26
Section 13
13. Press the
to advance to the next parameter, F3 OFF STATE TEXT (only seen if KEY USAGE selected
was CUSTOM).
CAx F3 OFF STATE TXT
SP1
Selections
TEXT
Refer to Section 3.4.2, Changing Text,
for instructions .
14. Press the
to advance to the next parameter, F3 ON STATE TEXT (only seen if KEY USAGE selected
was CUSTOM).
CAx F3 ON STATE TEXT
SP2
Selections
TEXT
Refer to Section 3.4.2, Changing Text,
for instructions .
15. Press the
to advance to the next parameter, F4 KEY USAGE.
CAx F4 KEY USAGE
NOT USED
Selections
NOT USED
C1 AUTO/MANUAL
C2 AUTO/MANUAL
C3 AUTO/MANUAL
C4 AUTO/MANUAL
LOCAL/REMOTE
SP1/SP2
CUSTOM
Section 13
to change, then
or
to desired choice, then press the
.
Press the
13-27
Edition 3
Rev G
16. Press the
to advance to the next parameter, F4 LINE 1 TEXT (only seen if F4 KEY USAGE selected is
other than NOT USED).
CAx F4 LINE 1 TEXT
Selections
TEXT
Refer to Section 3.4.2, Changing Text,
for instructions .
17. Press the
to advance to the next parameter, F4 OFF STATE TEXT (only seen if KEY USAGE selected
was CUSTOM).
CAx F4 OFF STATE TXT
Selections
TEXT
Refer to Section 3.4.2, Changing Text,
for instructions .
18. Press the
to advance to the next parameter, F4 ON STATE TEXT (only seen if KEY USAGE selected
was CUSTOM).
CAx F4 ON STATE TEXT
Selections
TEXT
Refer to Section 3.4.2, Changing Text,
for instructions .
Edition 3
Rev G
13-28
Section 13
19. Press the
to advance to the next parameter, F5 KEY USAGE.
CAx F5 KEY USAGE
LOCAL/REMOTE
Selections
NOT USED
C1 AUTO/MANUAL
C2 AUTO/MANUAL
C3 AUTO/MANUAL
C4 AUTO/MANUAL
LOCAL/REMOTE
SP1/SP2
CUSTOM
20. Press the
Press the
to change, then
or
to desired choice, then press the
.
to advance to the next parameter, F5 LINE 1 TEXT.
CAx F5 LINE 1 TEXT
CONTROLLER 1
Selections
TEXT
Refer to Section 3.4.2, Changing Text,
for instructions .
21. Press the
to advance to the next parameter, F5 OFF STATE TEXT (only seen if KEY USAGE selected
was CUSTOM).
CAx F5 OFF STATE TXT
LOCAL
Selections
TEXT
Refer to Section 3.4.2, Changing Text,
for instructions .
Section 13
13-29
Edition 3
Rev G
22. Press the
to advance to the next parameter, F5 ON STATE TEXT (only seen if KEY USAGE selected
was CUSTOM).
CAx F5 ON STATE TEXT
REMOTE
Selections
TEXT
Refer to Section 3.4.2, Changing Text,
for instructions .
23.Press the
and the display advances to the next Control State Access to be programmed. Refer to the
beginning of this section, page 13-22 .
Edition 3
Rev G
13-30
Section 13
13.4 TUNING PARAMETERS
The Tuning parameters section is where adjustments to the proportional band, automatic reset (integral), and other
parameters for proper operation of proportional controls and/or first output/second output etc. for on/off controls are
made.
For illustration purposes, all available parameters have been listed. The parameters that will appear on the specific
instrument will depend upon the parameters previously selected in CONTROLLERS section.
To enter TUNING PARAMETERS, from the Normal Display, press the
key until TUNING PARAMETERS is
seen in the lower display line. If PASSWORD appears in the lower display line, the correct “password” will need to
be entered before access to TUNING PARAMETERS is allowed. If TUNING PARAMETERS is not displayed, then
Tuning Parmeters has been disabled. Refer to Section 9, Enables and Passwords, for instructions to enable Tuning
Parameters.
With TUNING PARAMETERS in the lower display line:
1. Press the
key to display CONTROLLER NUMBER.
Press the
CONTROLLER NUMBER
1
to change, then
or
to desired controller number, then press the
.
Selections
1-4
Section 13
13-31
Edition 3
Rev G
2. Press the
to advance to the next parameter, COPY/INITIALIZE.
Cx COPY/INITIALIZE
NO
Press the
Selections
YES or NO
to change, then
to desired selection, then press the
or
.
If selection is NO, see Step 3.
If selection is YES:
Cx COPY FROM CONTRLR
Press the
(0=INITIALIZE)
copied from
X
or
to the control number to be
Input to be copied from
0=FACTORY DEFAULT
3. Press the
to advance to the next parameter, SETPOINT RAMP RATE.
Cx SP RAMP RATE
0 units/HR
Note: Units correspond to Units
configured in Process Variables.
Press the
to change, then
to desired number, then press the
Selections
0 to 999999
(decimal position=0)
0 to 9.9999
(decimal position=4)
or
.
RAMP RATE dampens the rate at which the control algorithm will ramp to the control setpoint. If the setpoint
changes abruptly from one value to another, an internal setpoint will be ramping to the selected setpoint (SP1,
SP2, or Remote) at the rate selected in Cx SP RAMP RATE. The internal setpoint is viewable by setting the
ramped setpoint parameter, Cx DISPLAY RAMPED SP located in CONTROLLERS section to something other
than NOT DISPLAYED.
Edition 3
Rev G
13-32
Section 13
4. Press the
to advance to the next parameter, OUTPUT 1 PROPORTIONAL BAND (only if Output 1 Type in
CONTROLLERS was set to PID).
Cx OUT 1 PROP BAND
100 units
Note: Units correspond to Units
configured in Process Variables.
Press the
to change, then
Selections
0 to 999999
(decimal position=0)
0 to 9.9999
(decimal position=4)
or
to desired number, then press the
.
NOTE: When the Process Variable equals the Setpoint the unshifted proportional band provides 0% output.
5. Press the
to advance to the next parameter, OUTPUT 2 PROPORTIONAL BAND (only if Output 2 Type in
CONTROLLERS was set to PID).
Cx OUT 2 PROP BAND
100 units
Note: Units correspond to Units
configured in Process Variables.
Press the
to change, then
to desired number, then press the
Section 13
Selections
0 to 999999
(decimal position=0)
0 to 9.9999
(decimal position=4)
or
.
13-33
Edition 3
Rev G
6. Press the
to advance to the next parameter, OUTPUT 1 SHIFT.
Cx OUT 1 SHIFT
0 units
Note: Units correspond to Units
configured in Process Variables.
Press the
to change, then
to desired number, then press the
7. Press the
Selections
0 to 999999
(decimal position=0)
0 to 9.9999
(decimal position=4)
or
.
to advance to the next parameter, OUTPUT 2 SHIFT (only if Output 2 is used).
Cx OUT 2 SHIFT
0 units
Note: Units correspond to Units
configured in Process Variables.
Press the
to change, then
to desired number, then press the
Selections
0 to 999999
(decimal position=0)
0 to 9.9999
(decimal position=4)
or
.
OUTPUT SHIFT represents an offset of the on-off actuation points or proportional band relative to the normal
position. For example, if two on-off outputs are being used, one for heating and one for cooling, and a deadband
of 2∞ is desired between the two, set OUT 1 SHIFT to -1 and set OUT 2 SHIFT to +1.
Edition 3
Rev G
13-34
Section 13
8. Press the
to advance to the next parameter, INTEGRATION BAND (only if proportional output).
Cx INTEGRATION BAND
100 units
Note: Units correspond to Units
configured in Process Variables.
Press the
to change, then
Selections
0 to 999999
(decimal position=0)
0 to 9.9999
(decimal position=4)
or
to desired number, then press the
.
INTEGRATION BAND sets the range where integration of the error will occur, centered on the control setpoint.
9. Press the
to advance to the next parameter, INTEGRATION SHIFT (only if proportional output).
Cx INTEGRATION SHIFT
0 units
Note: Units correspond to Units
configured in Process Variables.
Press the
to change, then
to desired number, then press the
Selections
0 to 999999
(decimal position=0)
0 to 9.9999
(decimal position=4)
or
.
INTEGRATION SHIFT represents a shift or offset for the integration band from its normal operating position,
centered on the control setpoint.
Section 13
13-35
Edition 3
Rev G
10.Press the
to advance to the next parameter, OUTPUT 1 AUTO RESET (only if output 1 is proportional).
Cx OUT 1 AUTO RESET
0.00 REPEATS/MIN
Selections
0 to 100.00
Press the
to change, then
or
to desired number, then press the
11.Press the
.
to advance to the next parameter, OUTPUT 2 AUTO RESET (only if output 2 is proportional).
Cx OUT 2 AUTO RESET
0.00 REPEATS/MIN
Press the
Selections
0 to 100.00
to change, then
to desired number, then press the
or
.
AUTO RESET (Integration) compensates for process load variations which cause the process value to deviate
from setpoint. Integration will occur over the range defined by the INTEGRATION BAND. The value is defined in
repeats per minute.
Edition 3
Rev G
13-36
Section 13
12.Press the
to advance to the next parameter, OUTPUT 1 RATE (only if output 1 is proportional).
Cx OUT 1 RATE
0.00 MINUTES
Selections
0 to 100.00
Press the
to change, then
or
to desired number, then press the
13.Press the
.
to advance to the next parameter, OUTPUT 2 RATE (only if output 2 is proportional).
Cx OUT 2 RATE
0.00 MINUTES
Selections
0 to 100.00
Press the
to change, then
to desired number, then press the
or
.
RATE attempts to anticipate rapid changes in system response and compensates before overshoot occurs. Rate
can be applied at anytime, unlike auto reset which occurs within the integration band. The value is defined in
minutes.
14.Press the
and the display advances to the next controller to be tuned. Refer to the beginning of this
section, page 13-31 .
Section 13
13-37
Edition 3
Rev G
SECTION 14 - PROFILERS
The profiling capability basically consists of a functional block that modifies the setpoint(s) and event outputs over
time. The setpoint profiling is linked to the first four setpoints and the four process values. Event outputs are
merely actuators that can be used for any purpose, but typically drive relay outputs.
The Profile Settings section, included in CONFIGURATION, is used to specify some basic profile configuration
data that applies to every profile. The Profile Entry section, accessed via the SCROLL key, is used to enter profile
data; ramp and dwell times, setpoints, event outputs, and other associated data. A Profile Control section,
accessed via the DISP key, provides the means to initiate/abort a profile, change the run/hold state, and continue
an aborted profile.
A profile is made up of one to eight segments, with each segment consisting of a ramp and a dwell. The ramp will
change the setpoint value from its current value (or the current process value on the first ramp) to the value
specified over a designated time period (ramp time). The dwell maintains that setpoint for a designated time
period (dwell time). The event outputs will change state at the beginning of each ramp and dwell as specified.
Each setpoint is assumed to be tied to its respective PV (setpoint 1 used with process value 1). Since there are
four control loops and four process values, only the first four setpoints can be profiled.
14.1 PROFILE ENTRY
To enter the Profile Entry section, from the Normal Display, press the SCROLL key until PROFILE ENTRY is seen
in the lower display line. If PROFILE ENTRY is not displayed, then it has been disabled. Refer to Section 9,
Enables and Passwords, for instructions to enable Profile Entry.
1. With PROFILE ENTRY displayed, depress the DOWN key and PROFILE NUMBER will be displayed.
Selections 1-16. Press the MOD key to change, then UP/DOWN to desired profile number, then press
the ENTER key.
In the following paragraphs, the displayed prompts will begin with Pxx or PxxSy, where xx is the
profile number and y is the segment number.
2. Press the SCROLL key to advance to the next parameter, Pxx DESCRIPTION. Selections - Text.
Refer to Section 3.4.2, Changing Text, for instructions.
3. Press the SCROLL key to advance to the next parameter, Pxx SETPOINTS TO PROFILE. Selections
0-4. Press the MOD key to change, then UP/DOWN to desired number of setpoints to profile, then press
the ENTER key.
4. Press the SCROLL key to advance to the next parameter, Pxx NUMBER OF SEGMENTS.
Selections 1-8. Press the MOD key to change, then UP/DOWN to desired number of segments, then
press the ENTER key.
THE FOLLOWING ARE REPEATED FOR EACH SEGMENT.
5. Press the SCROLL key to advance to the next parameter, PxxSy RAMP TIME, displayed as hhh:mm:ss
where h is hours, m is minutes and s is seconds. Press the MOD key to change, then UP/DOWN to
desired number, then press the ENTER key. NOTE: ENTER must be pressed after changing
(as necessary) each unit of time; hours, minutes, and seconds.
6. Press the SCROLL key to advance to the next parameter, PxxSy SETPOINT 1. Press the MOD key to
change, then UP/DOWN to desired setpoint value, then press the ENTER key.
Section 14
14-1
Edition 3
Rev G
7. Press the SCROLL key to advance to the next parameter, PxxSy SETPOINT 2 (if setpoints > 1). Press
the MOD key to change, then UP/DOWN to desired setpoint value, then press the ENTER key.
8. Press the SCROLL key to advance to the next parameter, PxxSy SETPOINT 3 (if setpoints = 3 or 4).
Press the MOD key to change, then UP/DOWN to desired setpoint value, then press the ENTER key.
9. Press the SCROLL key to advance to the next parameter, PxxSy SETPOINT 4 (if setpoints = 4). Press
the MOD key to change, then UP/DOWN to desired setpoint value, then press the ENTER key.
10. Press the SCROLL key to advance to the next parameter, PxxSy EVENT OUTPUTS during the ramp.
Eight digits will be displayed, one for each event: 0 = inactive, 1 = active. To change, press the MOD key,
a cursor appears under the left most digit. Use the UP/DOWN key to change the state as necessary, then
the ENTER. The cursor will move one position to the right. Repeat this procedure for each event.
11. Press the SCROLL key to advance to the next parameter, PxxSy DWELL TIME, displayed as
hhh:mm:ss where h is hours, m is minutes and s is seconds. Press the MOD key to change. Changes
are made the same as for Ramp Time.
12. Press the SCROLL key to advance to the next parameter, PxxSy EVENT OUTPUTS during the dwell.
To change, press the MOD key.
AFTER THE SEGMENT DATA IS ENTERED, THE FOLLOWING ARE DISPLAYED FOR THE PROFILE.
13. Press the SCROLL key to advance to the next parameter, Pxx GUARANTEED SOAK. Selections NO
or YES. Press the MOD key to change, then press the key directly below choice to enter.
Guaranteed Soak - If selected, this feature advances the soak time only when the process value
is within the specified deviation from setpoint. Therefore it guarantees that the load is soaked at
the specified setpoint. Deviation after ramp up and deviation after ramp down provides separate
deviations for each direction of setpoint ramping.
14. Press the SCROLL key to advance to the next parameter, Pxx SP1 DEVIATION ON RAMP UP (only if
Guaranteed Soak is set to YES). Selections 0-9999999. Press the MOD key to change, then press the
LEFT/SCROLL, UP/DOWN as required to desired deviation value, then press the ENTER key.
15. Press the SCROLL key to advance to the next parameter, Pxx SP1 DEVIATION ON RAMP DOWN
(only if Guaranteed Soak is set to YES). Selections 0-9999999. Press the MOD key to change, then
press the LEFT/SCROLL, UP/DOWN as required to desired deviation value, then press the ENTER key.
Note: Repeated for each setpoint configured.
16. Press the SCROLL key to advance to the next parameter, Pxx SEGMENTS LOOP COUNT.
Selections 0-9999. Press the MOD key to change, then the LEFT/SCROLL, UP/DOWN as required to
desired loop count, then press the ENTER key.
Segment Loop Count - The unit will cycle through the segments the number of times specified by
segment loop count before proceeding to the next phase, which is specified by the next
parameter. One = execute the segments once.
17. Press the SCROLL key to advance to the next parameter, Pxx WHEN SEGS DONE (only seen when
more than one profile has been specified). Selections: END and JOIN X (X=1-16). Press the MOD key to
change, then press the LEFT/SCROLL,UP/DOWN as required to desired choice, then press the ENTER
key.
Edition 3
Rev G
14-2
Section 14
When Segs Done - Profiles may be joined together to increase the number of segments or to
make use of common profiling sequences. When all segments in the initiated profile have been
executed the specified number of loops, the WHEN SEGS DONE parameter can “join” another
profile. The instrument retains which profile was initiated, as well as which profile is currently
running or “joined. When one of the profiles ends with “END”, processing will revert back to the
initial profile where, if Profile Loop Count is greater than one, the unit will proceed through the
initial profile or terminate as specified in the initial profile.
18. Press the SCROLL key to advance to the next parameter, Pxx PROFILE LOOP COUNT. Selections
0-9999. Press the MOD key to change, then press the LEFT/SCROLL, UP/DOWN as required to desired
loop count, then press the ENTER key.
Profile Loop Count - The profile loop count will appear in all profiles but only the initial profile will
use the loop count. At the end of a profile the profile loop count will determine if the profile will
terminate or proceed through the profile again.
19. Press the SCROLL key to advance to the next parameter, Pxx END ACTION. Selections are: OFF,
EVENTS OFF (Unit turns all outputs off or 0% including the events; OFF, EVENTS SAME (Unit turns
control outputs off or 0% but keeps the events in the same condition they were - on remain on; off remain
off); or CONTROL, EVENTS SAME (Unit reverts to control with the events the same). Press the MOD
key to change, then UP/DOWN as required to desired choice, then press the ENTER key.
20. Press the SCROLL key to advance to the next parameter, Pxx ABORT ACTION. Selections are: OFF,
EVENTS OFF (Unit turns all outputs off or 0% including the events; OFF, EVENTS SAME (Unit turns
control outputs off or 0% but keeps the events in the same condition they were - on remain on; off remain
off); or CONTROL, EVENTS SAME (Unit reverts to control with the events the same). Press the MOD
key to change, then UP/DOWN as required to desired choice, then press the ENTER key.
21. Press the SCROLL key to advance to the next parameter, Pxx POWERFAIL ACTION. Selections are:
CONTINUE; HOLD; ABORT; or RESTART. Press the MOD key to change, then UP/DOWN as required to
desired choice, then press the ENTER key.
22. Press the SCROLL key to advance to the next parameter, Pxx RECOVERY TIME LIMIT, displayed as
hhh:mm:ss, where h is hours, m is minutes, and s is seconds. Press the MOD key to change, then UP/
DOWN to desired number, then press the ENTER key. NOTE: This procedure will need to be performed
for each segment of time; hours, minutes and seconds.
23. Press the SCROLL key to advance to the next parameter, Pxx RECOVERY ACTION. Selections are
CONTINUE, HOLD, ABORT, or RESTART. Press the MOD key to change, then LEFT/SCROLL, UP/
DOWN as required to desired choice, then press the ENTER key.
Power Failure - If power fails the unit will respond based upon the parameters specified by
POWER FAIL ACTION or RECOVERY ACTION, depending on the parameter specified by
RECOVERY TIME LIMIT. During profiling, the current time is saved in non-cleared memory every
second. During initialization, the last time saved while the profile was running is compared to the
current time. If the unit was off for a time period greater than specified by RECOVERY TIME
LIMIT, RECOVERY ACTION parameter applies. If the period of time is less than the RECOVERY
TIME LIMIT, POWER FAIL ACTION parameter applies.
POWER FAIL ACTION and RECOVERY ACTION specify what shall happen based upon the
choice selection made:
CONTINUE requires no action, the profile will continue at the point the profile was interrupted.
HOLD will place the profile in the HOLD condition and stop in the current segment (ramp or dwell)
with the time remaining for the segment held at the last value before placed into HOLD.
ABORT will terminate the current running profile.
RESTART will cause the instrument to begin the profile from the beginning.
24. Press the SCROLL key and the display advances to the next profile to be configured.
Section 14
14-3
Edition 3
Rev G
14.2 PROFILE SETTINGS
To enter the Profile Settings section, from the Normal Display, press the SCROLL key until CONFIGURATION
appears in the lower display line. With CONFIGURATION in the lower display line, press the DOWN key. Press
the SCROLL key until PROFILE SETTINGS appears in the lower display line.
1. With PROFILE SETTINGS in the lower display line, press the DOWN key, then the SCROLL key until
PROFILE ENTRY appears in the upper display line. Selections are: DISABLED DURING RUN or EN
ABLE DURING RUN. Press the MOD key to change, then UP/DOWN as required to desired choice, then
press the ENTER key.
Profile Entry - This parameter controls access to the PROFILE ENTRY section while the profile is
running; DISABLED prevents access while ENABLED allows access.
2. Press the SCROLL key to advance to the next parameter, PROFILE START ACTUATOR. See Actuator
List for selections. Press the MOD key to change, then LEFT/SCROLL, UP/DOWN as required to desired
choice, then press the ENTER key.
Profile Start Actuator - A transition from not active to active of the PROFILE START ACTUATOR
will initiate the selected profile.
3. Press the SCROLL key to advance to the next parameter, PROFILE SELECTOR. See Choice List for
selections. Press the MOD key to change, then LEFT/SCROLL, UP/DOWN as required to desired
choice, then press the ENTER key.
Profile Selector - Applies only when the PROFILE START ACTUATOR is used, and allows an
analog value, typically from an IV, to select the profile number to be initiated. Care must be taken
to insure that a valid value is provided. The value is automatically rounded to the nearest whole
number.
4. Press the SCROLL key to advance to the next parameter, PROFILE ABORT ACTUATOR. See Actua
tor List for selections. Press the MOD key to change, then LEFT/SCROLL, UP/DOWN as required to
desired choice, then press the ENTER key.
Profile Abort Actuator - If a transition is detected on the Profile Abort Actuator and a profile is
active, the profile is then aborted.
5. Press the SCROLL key to advance to the next parameter, PROFILE HOLD ACTUATOR. See Actuator
List for selections. Press the MOD key to change, then LEFT/SCROLL, UP/DOWN as required to desired
choice, then press the ENTER key.
Profile Hold Actuator - A positive transition of the Profile Hold Actuator places an active profile in
hold, while a negative transition places it in run. While in hold, the ramp/dwell timer stops.
6. Press the SCROLL key to advance to the next parameter, PROFILE ADVANCE ACTUATOR. See
Actuator List for selections. Press the MOD key to change, then LEFT/SCROLL, UP/DOWN as required
to desired choice, then press the ENTER key.
Profile Advance Actuator - A positive transition on the Profile Advance actuator will advance the
profile to the next step. The ramp time remaining or dwell time remaining will be set with a few
seconds so that the profile will step quickly to the next segment, yet do so without abruptly
changing the current segment or profile.
Edition 3
Rev G
14-4
Section 14
7. Press the SCROLL key to advance to the next parameter, PROFILE DISPLAY OPTION. Selections
are: NOT DISPLAYED; IN CONTINUOUS MODE; IN SEQUENTIAL MODE; or IN BOTH MODES. Press
the MOD key to change, then UP/DOWN to desired choice, then press the ENTER key.
If one of the DISPLAY option is selected, the parameters displayed are as follows:
START PROFILE number
description
CURRENT PROFILE number
description
status
status
CURRENT SEGMENT
NUMBER number
RAMP TIME hhh:mm:ss
DWELL
hhh:mm:ss
EVENT
OUTPUTS
12345678
ssssssss
setpoint description
setpoint value
(may be up to four and only if configured to be displayed in
SETPOINT Configuration.)
status - The top display line displays whether the profile is RUNNING, HOLDING, or AUTO
HOLDING. The bottom display line displays if the profile is RAMPING or in DWELL.
8. Press the SCROLL key and the display advances back to the beginning of Profile Settings.
ACTUATOR LIST
When Profiling is included in an instrument,
several actuators are added to the choice
list as indicated in bold in the list below.
NONE/OFF
ON/CONTINUOUS
ANY_ALARM
ANY_PROCESS_ALARM
A11 A12 A13 A14
A21 A22 A23 A24
A31 A32 A33 A34
A41 A42 A43 A44
INSTRUMENT_ALARM
CHART_FULL
OP_INP_1 OP_INP_2
OP_INP_3 OP_INP_4
OP_INP_5 OP_INP_6
OP_INP_7 OP_INP_8
OP_INP_9 OP_INP_10
OP_INP_11 OP_INP_12
CHART_CHANGED
CHART_ROTATION
TREND_DATA_COLLECT
DA1 DA2 DA3
Section 14
14-5
Edition 3
Rev G
DA4 DA5 DA6
DA7 DA8 DA9
DA10 DA11 DA12
DA13 DA14 DA15
DA16 DA17 DA18
DA19 DA20 DA21
DA22 DA23 DA24
OUTPUT_11 OUTPUT_12
OUTPUT_21 OUTPUT_22
OUTPUT_31 OUTPUT_32
OUTPUT_41 OUTPUT_42
EVENT 1
EVENT 2
EVENT 3
EVENT 4
EVENT 5
EVENT 6
EVENT 7
EVENT 8
PRESET_1 PRESET_2
PRESET_3 PRESET_4
TOTAL_PO1 TOTAL_PO2
TOTAL_PO3 TOTAL_PO4
TIME_1 TIME/DATE_1
TIME_2 TIME/DATE_2
TIME_1_TO_TIME_2
TIME/DATE_1_TO_2
TIMER_1
TIMER_2
TIMER_3
TIMER_4
SW1 SW2 SW3 SW4
SW5 SW6 SW7 SW8
COMM_TRIGGER_1
COMM_TRIGGER_2
COMM_TRIGGER_3
COMM_TRIGGER_4
F1 F2 F3 F4 F5
RESET MOD ENTER
ON_THE_HOUR
ON_THE_WEEK
DAY_OF_MONTH
RELAY_1
RELAY_2
RELAY_3
RELAY_4
RELAY_5
RELAY_6
RELAY_7
RELAY_8
CA1F1 CA1F2 CA1C3
CA1F4
CA1F5
CA2F1 CA2F2 CA2C3
CA2F4
CA2F5
CA3F1 CA3F2 CA3C3
CA3F4
CA3F5
CA4F1 CA4F2 CA4C3
CA4F4
CA4F5
POWER_FAILED
PROFILE_ACTIVE
PROFILE_COMPLETE
PROFILE_ABORTED
PROFILE_HOLDING
PROFILE_AUTO_HOLDING
PROFILE_OFF/CONTROL
Edition 3
Rev G
PROFILE ACTIVE is true whenever a profile is
running or holding; not aborted or complete. PROFILE COMPLETE is true when a
profile has run to completion. PROFILE
ABORTED is true whenever a profile has
been aborted. PROFILE HOLDING and (time
not advancing) and PROFILE AUTO HOLDING (holding due to deviation hold after
ramping) are self explanatory.
The PROFILE OFF/CONTROL actuator is
controlled by the END ACTION, ABORT
ACTION, and POWERFAIL ACTION choices,
whenever a profile completes, is aborted, or
power fails, respectively. When this capability is desired, the PROFILE OFF/CONTROL
actuator must be selected for the CONTROL
ON ACTUATOR, which is lcated in the Instrument Settings section.
14-6
Section 14
14.3 PROFILE CONTROL
To enter the Profile Control section, from the Normal Display, press the DISP key until SELECT appears in the
upper display line and PROFILE CONTROL appears in the lower display line. If PROFILE CONTROL is not
displayed, then Profile Control has been disabled. Refer to Section 9, Enables and Passwords, for instructions to
enable Profile Control.
1. With PROFILE CONTROL displayed, press the DOWN key and START PROFILE will be displayed.
Selections are PROF 1 through PROF 16 and CONTROL ON. To change, press the MOD key, then UP/
DOWN as required to desired choice, then press the ENTER key.
Start Profile - The profile to start can be derived from the result of the PROFILE START actuator
positive transition (See PROFILE START ACTUATOR in PROFILE SETTINGS) that takes the
value of the PROFILE SELECTOR value or the START PROFILE NUMBER entered above. Only
available if profile is not already running.
2. Press the SCROLL key to advance to the next parameter, START DESCRIPTION. This is a READ
ONLY parameter.
Start Description - Start description corresponds to the PROFILE DESCRIPTION under the
PROFILE ENTRY menu for the selected profile.
3. Press the SCROLL key to advance to the next parameter, PROFILE START/STOP. Displayed in
Automatic Modify Mode, AMM, selections are ABORT/STOP or RUN/START. Press the key directly
below the choice to enter.
4. Press the SCROLL key to advance to the next parameter, PROFILE RUN/HOLD (only seen if RUN/
START selected above). Displayed in AMM, selections are RUN or HOLD. Press the key directly below
the choice to enter.
Profile Run/Hold - A profile put into HOLD will stop the ramp or dwell segment currently running.
If the profiler is in HOLD no action is taken. If RUN is selected, a profile in HOLD will resume
from the current profile, segment and time selected. If the profiler is in RUN when RUN is
selected, no action is taken.
5. Press the SCROLL key to advance to the next parameter, CURRENT PROFILE.
Selections are 1 to 16. Press the MOD key to change, then press the UP/DOWN as required to desired
choice, then press the ENTER key.
Current Profile - If a profile is not running, this parameter can be modified to change the current
active profile. When RUN is selected under PROFILE RUN/HOLD, the profiler will begin running
the current profile selected.
6. Press the SCROLL key to advance to the next parameter, CURRENT DESCRIPTION. This is a READ
ONLY parameter.
Current Description - The current description corresponds to the profile description entered under
PROFILE ENTRY.
Section 14
14-7
Edition 3
Rev G
7. Press the SCROLL key to advance to the next parameter, CURRENT SEGMENT. Selections are 1-8.
Press the MOD key to change, then the UP/DOWN as required to the desired choice, then press the
ENTER key. Only modifiable if profile is presently not running.
Current Segment - This is the current active segment, which can be modified if the profile is not
active. When RUN is selected under PROFILE RUN/HOLD the profiler will begin running from
the current profile and the new current segment entered.
8. Press the SCROLL key to advance to the next parameter, RAMP TIME REMAINING. Only modifiable
if profile is presently not running.
9. Press the SCROLL key to advance to the next parameter, DWELL TIME REMAINING. Only modifiable
if profile is presently not running.
Ramp/Dwell Time Remaining - These parameters may be modified if the profile is not active.
When RUN is selected under PROFILE RUN/HOLD, the profiler will begin running from the
current profile, current segment using the new RAMP and/or DWELL time. If the profile is active
and updating the ramp or dwell time the value displayed when first entering the menu will be the
last value read.
10. Press the SCROLL key to advance to the next parameter, EVENT OUTPUTS. Under each event
number is the current state, 0 or 1. Selections are “0” or “1”; “0” is not active and “1” is active.
Event Outputs - Event Outputs can always be modified. Event outputs represent the current
active segment ramp or dwell.
11. Press the SCROLL key to advance to the next parameter, PROFILE STATUS ACTION (only seen if
profile has been aborted). Displayed in AMM, selections are ABORTED or CONTINUE. Press the key
directly below the choice to desired.
Profile Status/Action - If a profile has been aborted the profile can be continued using the choice
CONTINUE.
12. Press the SCROLL key and the display returns back to START PROFILE.
Edition 3
Rev G
14-8
Section 14
PROFILE NUMBER
Parameter
P1
P2
P3
P4
DESCRIPTION
SETPOINTS TO PROFILE
NUMBER OF SEGMENTS
SEGMENT 1
RAMP TIME hhh:mm:ss
SETPOINT 1
SETPOINT 2
SETPOINT 3
SETPOINT 4
EVENT OUTPUTS -RAMP
DWELL TIME hhh:mm:ss
EVENT OUTPUTS - DWELL
SEGMENT 2
RAMP TIME hhh:mm:ss
SETPOINT 1
SETPOINT 2
SETPOINT 3
SETPOINT 4
EVENT OUTPUTS - RAMP
DWELL TIME hhh:mm:ss
EVENT OUTPUTS - DWELL
SEGMENT 3
RAMP TIME hhh:mm:ss
SETPOINT 1
SETPOINT 2
SETPOINT 3
SETPOINT 4
EVENT OUTPUTS - RAMP
DWELL TIME hhh:mm:ss
EVENT OUTPUTS - DWELL
SEGMENT 4
RAMP TIME hhh:mm:ss
SETPOINT 1
SETPOINT 2
SETPOINT 3
SETPOINT 4
EVENT OUTPUTS - RAMP
DWELL TIME hhh:mm:ss
EVENT OUTPUTS - DWELL
SEGMENT 5
RAMP TIME hhh:mm:ss
SETPOINT 1
SETPOINT 2
SETPOINT 3
SETPOINT 4
EVENT OUTPUTS - RAMP
DWELL TIME hhh:mm:ss
EVENT OUTPUTS - DWELL
Section 14
14-9
Edition 3
Rev G
PROFILE NUMBER
Parameter
P1
P2
P3
P4
P3
P4
SEGMENT 6
RAMP TIME hhh:mm:ss
SETPOINT 1
SETPOINT 2
SETPOINT 3
SETPOINT 4
EVENT OUTPUTS - RAMP
DWELL TIME hhh:mm:ss
EVENT OUTPUTS - DWELL
SEGMENT 7
RAMP TIME hhh:mm:ss
SETPOINT 1
SETPOINT 2
SETPOINT 3
SETPOINT 4
EVENT OUTPUTS - RAMP
DWELL TIME hhh:mm:ss
EVENT OUTPUTS - DWELL
SEGMENT 8
RAMP TIME hhh:mm:ss
SETPOINT 1
SETPOINT 2
SETPOINT 3
SETPOINT 4
EVENT OUTPUTS - RAMP
DWELL TIME hhh:mm:ss
EVENT OUTPUTS - DWELL
GUARANTEED SOAK
SP1 DEVIATION RAMP UP
SP1 DEVIATION RAMP DN
SP2 DEVIATION RAMP UP
SP2 DEVIATION RAMP DN
SP3 DEVIATION RAMP UP
SP3 DEVIATION RAMP DN
SP4 DEVIATION RAMP UP
SP4 DEVIATION RAMP DN
SEGMENTS LOOP COUNT
WHEN SEGMENTS DONE
PROFILE LOOP COUNT
END ACTION
PROFILE NUMBER
Parameter
P1
P2
ABORT ACTION
POWER FAIL ACTION
RECOVERY TIME LIMIT
RECOVERY ACTION
Edition 3
Rev G
14-10
Section 14
PROFILE NUMBER
Parameter
P5
P6
P7
P8
DESCRIPTION
SETPOINTS TO PROFILE
NUMBER OF SEGMENTS
SEGMENT 1
RAMP TIME hhh:mm:ss
SETPOINT 1
SETPOINT 2
SETPOINT 3
SETPOINT 4
EVENT OUTPUTS -RAMP
DWELL TIME hhh:mm:ss
EVENT OUTPUTS - DWELL
SEGMENT 2
RAMP TIME hhh:mm:ss
SETPOINT 1
SETPOINT 2
SETPOINT 3
SETPOINT 4
EVENT OUTPUTS - RAMP
DWELL TIME hhh:mm:ss
EVENT OUTPUTS - DWELL
SEGMENT 3
RAMP TIME hhh:mm:ss
SETPOINT 1
SETPOINT 2
SETPOINT 3
SETPOINT 4
EVENT OUTPUTS - RAMP
DWELL TIME hhh:mm:ss
EVENT OUTPUTS - DWELL
SEGMENT 4
RAMP TIME hhh:mm:ss
SETPOINT 1
SETPOINT 2
SETPOINT 3
SETPOINT 4
EVENT OUTPUTS - RAMP
DWELL TIME hhh:mm:ss
EVENT OUTPUTS - DWELL
SEGMENT 5
RAMP TIME hhh:mm:ss
SETPOINT 1
SETPOINT 2
SETPOINT 3
SETPOINT 4
EVENT OUTPUTS - RAMP
DWELL TIME hhh:mm:ss
EVENT OUTPUTS - DWELL
Section 14
14-11
Edition 3
Rev G
PROFILE NUMBER
Parameter
P5
P6
P7
P8
P7
P8
SEGMENT 6
RAMP TIME hhh:mm:ss
SETPOINT 1
SETPOINT 2
SETPOINT 3
SETPOINT 4
EVENT OUTPUTS - RAMP
DWELL TIME hhh:mm:ss
EVENT OUTPUTS - DWELL
SEGMENT 7
RAMP TIME hhh:mm:ss
SETPOINT 1
SETPOINT 2
SETPOINT 3
SETPOINT 4
EVENT OUTPUTS - RAMP
DWELL TIME hhh:mm:ss
EVENT OUTPUTS - DWELL
SEGMENT 8
RAMP TIME hhh:mm:ss
SETPOINT 1
SETPOINT 2
SETPOINT 3
SETPOINT 4
EVENT OUTPUTS - RAMP
DWELL TIME hhh:mm:ss
EVENT OUTPUTS - DWELL
GUARANTEED SOAK
SP1 DEVIATION RAMP UP
SP1 DEVIATION RAMP DN
SP2 DEVIATION RAMP UP
SP2 DEVIATION RAMP DN
SP3 DEVIATION RAMP UP
SP3 DEVIATION RAMP DN
SP4 DEVIATION RAMP UP
SP4 DEVIATION RAMP DN
SEGMENTS LOOP COUNT
WHEN SEGMENTS DONE
PROFILE LOOP COUNT
END ACTION
PROFILE NUMBER
Parameter
P5
P6
ABORT ACTION
POWER FAIL ACTION
RECOVERY TIME LIMIT
RECOVERY ACTION
Edition 3
Rev G
14-12
Section 14
PROFILE NUMBER
Parameter
P9
P 10
P 11
P 12
DESCRIPTION
SETPOINTS TO PROFILE
NUMBER OF SEGMENTS
SEGMENT 1
RAMP TIME hhh:mm:ss
SETPOINT 1
SETPOINT 2
SETPOINT 3
SETPOINT 4
EVENT OUTPUTS -RAMP
DWELL TIME hhh:mm:ss
EVENT OUTPUTS - DWELL
SEGMENT 2
RAMP TIME hhh:mm:ss
SETPOINT 1
SETPOINT 2
SETPOINT 3
SETPOINT 4
EVENT OUTPUTS - RAMP
DWELL TIME hhh:mm:ss
EVENT OUTPUTS - DWELL
SEGMENT 3
RAMP TIME hhh:mm:ss
SETPOINT 1
SETPOINT 2
SETPOINT 3
SETPOINT 4
EVENT OUTPUTS - RAMP
DWELL TIME hhh:mm:ss
EVENT OUTPUTS - DWELL
SEGMENT 4
RAMP TIME hhh:mm:ss
SETPOINT 1
SETPOINT 2
SETPOINT 3
SETPOINT 4
EVENT OUTPUTS - RAMP
DWELL TIME hhh:mm:ss
EVENT OUTPUTS - DWELL
SEGMENT 5
RAMP TIME hhh:mm:ss
SETPOINT 1
SETPOINT 2
SETPOINT 3
SETPOINT 4
EVENT OUTPUTS - RAMP
DWELL TIME hhh:mm:ss
EVENT OUTPUTS - DWELL
Section 14
14-13
Edition 3
Rev G
PROFILE NUMBER
Parameter
P9
P 10
P 11
P 12
P 11
P 12
SEGMENT 6
RAMP TIME hhh:mm:ss
SETPOINT 1
SETPOINT 2
SETPOINT 3
SETPOINT 4
EVENT OUTPUTS - RAMP
DWELL TIME hhh:mm:ss
EVENT OUTPUTS - DWELL
SEGMENT 7
RAMP TIME hhh:mm:ss
SETPOINT 1
SETPOINT 2
SETPOINT 3
SETPOINT 4
EVENT OUTPUTS - RAMP
DWELL TIME hhh:mm:ss
EVENT OUTPUTS - DWELL
SEGMENT 8
RAMP TIME hhh:mm:ss
SETPOINT 1
SETPOINT 2
SETPOINT 3
SETPOINT 4
EVENT OUTPUTS - RAMP
DWELL TIME hhh:mm:ss
EVENT OUTPUTS - DWELL
GUARANTEED SOAK
SP1 DEVIATION RAMP UP
SP1 DEVIATION RAMP DN
SP2 DEVIATION RAMP UP
SP2 DEVIATION RAMP DN
SP3 DEVIATION RAMP UP
SP3 DEVIATION RAMP DN
SP4 DEVIATION RAMP UP
SP4 DEVIATION RAMP DN
SEGMENTS LOOP COUNT
WHEN SEGMENTS DONE
PROFILE LOOP COUNT
END ACTION
PROFILE NUMBER
Parameter
P9
P 10
ABORT ACTION
POWER FAIL ACTION
RECOVERY TIME LIMIT
RECOVERY ACTION
Edition 3
Rev G
14-14
Section 14
PROFILE NUMBER
Parameter
P 13
P 14
P 15
P 16
DESCRIPTION
SETPOINTS TO PROFILE
NUMBER OF SEGMENTS
SEGMENT 1
RAMP TIME hhh:mm:ss
SETPOINT 1
SETPOINT 2
SETPOINT 3
SETPOINT 4
EVENT OUTPUTS -RAMP
DWELL TIME hhh:mm:ss
EVENT OUTPUTS - DWELL
SEGMENT 2
RAMP TIME hhh:mm:ss
SETPOINT 1
SETPOINT 2
SETPOINT 3
SETPOINT 4
EVENT OUTPUTS - RAMP
DWELL TIME hhh:mm:ss
EVENT OUTPUTS - DWELL
SEGMENT 3
RAMP TIME hhh:mm:ss
SETPOINT 1
SETPOINT 2
SETPOINT 3
SETPOINT 4
EVENT OUTPUTS - RAMP
DWELL TIME hhh:mm:ss
EVENT OUTPUTS - DWELL
SEGMENT 4
RAMP TIME hhh:mm:ss
SETPOINT 1
SETPOINT 2
SETPOINT 3
SETPOINT 4
EVENT OUTPUTS - RAMP
DWELL TIME hhh:mm:ss
EVENT OUTPUTS - DWELL
SEGMENT 5
RAMP TIME hhh:mm:ss
SETPOINT 1
SETPOINT 2
SETPOINT 3
SETPOINT 4
EVENT OUTPUTS - RAMP
DWELL TIME hhh:mm:ss
EVENT OUTPUTS - DWELL
Section 14
14-15
Edition 3
Rev G
PROFILE NUMBER
Parameter
P 13
P 14
P 15
P 16
P 15
P 16
SEGMENT 6
RAMP TIME hhh:mm:ss
SETPOINT 1
SETPOINT 2
SETPOINT 3
SETPOINT 4
EVENT OUTPUTS - RAMP
DWELL TIME hhh:mm:ss
EVENT OUTPUTS - DWELL
SEGMENT 7
RAMP TIME hhh:mm:ss
SETPOINT 1
SETPOINT 2
SETPOINT 3
SETPOINT 4
EVENT OUTPUTS - RAMP
DWELL TIME hhh:mm:ss
EVENT OUTPUTS - DWELL
SEGMENT 8
RAMP TIME hhh:mm:ss
SETPOINT 1
SETPOINT 2
SETPOINT 3
SETPOINT 4
EVENT OUTPUTS - RAMP
DWELL TIME hhh:mm:ss
EVENT OUTPUTS - DWELL
GUARANTEED SOAK
SP1 DEVIATION RAMP UP
SP1 DEVIATION RAMP DN
SP2 DEVIATION RAMP UP
SP2 DEVIATION RAMP DN
SP3 DEVIATION RAMP UP
SP3 DEVIATION RAMP DN
SP4 DEVIATION RAMP UP
SP4 DEVIATION RAMP DN
SEGMENTS LOOP COUNT
WHEN SEGMENTS DONE
PROFILE LOOP COUNT
END ACTION
PROFILE NUMBER
Parameter
P 13
P 14
ABORT ACTION
POWER FAIL ACTION
RECOVERY TIME LIMIT
RECOVERY ACTION
Edition 3
Rev G
14-16
Section 14
Parameter
PROFILE ENTRY
DISABLED DURING RUN
ENABLED DURING RUN
PROF START ACTUATOR
PROFILE SELECTOR
PROF ABORT ACTUATOR
PROF HOLD ACTUATOR
PROF ADVANCE ACTUATR
PROF DISPLAY OPTION
Section 14
14-17
Edition 3
Rev G
Appendix A - Board Layouts
FIGURE A-1 POWER SUPPLY BOARD
P3
P2
P1
G
N
L
Appendix A
A-1
Edition 3
Rev G
FIGURE A-2 MOTHER BOARD
J3
J1
J4
J6
J5
J7
Edition 3
Rev G
A-2
Appendix A
FIGURE A-3 RELAY/SSR BOARD
1
+
TB4
2
–
3
RELAY 4
J7B
J7A
RELAY 3
TB3
RELAY 2
TB1
RELAY 1
Appendix A
A-3
1 2 3
NO C NC
TB2
Edition 3
Rev G
FIGURE A-4 INPUT BOARD
JU13
JU3
JU15
JU16
JU14
JU6
JU7
JU8
JU1
JU11
JU4
JU2
JU5
JU12
U6
1
1
TB1
Edition 3
Rev G
TB2
A-4
Appendix A
FIGURE A-5 MOTOR DRIVER BOARD
J4B
J4A
J3
J2
J5
J1
J6
Appendix A
A-5
J7
Edition 3
Rev G
FIGURE A-6 CURRENT OUTPUT BOARD
NON-ISOLATED
J5B
TB1
+
ISOLATED
J5B
TB2
+
TB1
+
Edition 3
Rev G
A-6
Appendix A
FIGURE A-7 TRANSMITTER POWER SUPPLY BOARD
J3
TB1
+
TB2
+
TB3
+
TB4
Appendix A
A-7
+
Edition 3
Rev G
FIGURE A-8 COMMS BOARD
TB3
TB4
TB2
TB1
U1
J1
J2
TB1 - 232 Main
TB2 - 232 Aux
Edition 3
Rev G
TB3 - 485 Main
TB4 - 485 Aux
A-8
Appendix A
Appendix B - Ranges
THERMOCOUPLE
JU7/JU8 POSITION
TYPE
OPERATING RANGE
Wide
J
-200°C to 760°C
-328°F to 1400°F
Narrow
J
-200°C to 450°C
-328°F to 842°F
Wide
K
-250°C to 1370°C
-418°F to 2498°F
Narrow
K
-250°C to 600°C
418°F to 1112°F
Wide
E
-250°C to 1000°C
-418°F to 1832°F
Narrow
E
-250°C to 350°C
-418°F to 663°F
Wide
N
-270°C to 1300°C
-441°F to 2373°F
Narrow
N
-270°C to 700°C
-441°F to 1292°F
Wide
G
0°C to 2300°C
32°F to 4172°F
Wide
C
0°C to 2300°C
32°F to 4172°F
Wide
D
0°C to 2300°C
32°F to 4172°F
Wide
NNM
0°C to 1400°C
32°F to 2552°F
Wide
PLII
0°C to 1400°C
32°F to 2552°F
Narrow
T
-250°C to 400°C
-421°F to 753°F
Narrow
R
*200°C to 1750°C
400°F to 3128°F
Narrow
S
*200°C to 1750°C
400°F to 3182°F
Narrow
B
*200°C to 1800°C
400°F to 3272°F
*Actual minimum of span is 0°C to prevent "LO" error condition during initial start-up at room ambient.
Appendix B
B-1
Edition 3
Rev G
RTD
JU7/JU8 POSITION
TYPE
OPERATING RANGE
Low
Platinum 100 ohm
.00385 Din
-200°C to 480°C
-328°F to 896°F
Low
Platinum 100 Ohm
.00392 USA
-100°C to 450°C
-148°F to 842°F
Low
Platinum 100 Ohm
.00392 SAMA
-200°C to 560°C
-328°F to 1040°F
Low
Nickel 100 Ohm
-40°C to 200°C
-40°F to 392°F
Edition 3
Rev G
B-2
Appendix B
Appendix C - Reference Section
Next to each term is the prompt section it appears in, as appropriate, and the applicable section or page of this
manual. Terms that are printed in all upper case letters appear in the instruments display, or are keypad designations . In some cases, additional words are inserted for readability.
While many of the terms listed are actually the prompt shown on the first line, the definition refers to the corresponding parameter value, choice, or text. Some prompts appear multiple times in a section or in multiple sections, with each occurrence having a separate value associated with it.
ACTION ON NEW CHART - Chart Configuration - Page 6-11
Specifies the action the recorder takes when a new chart is installed; NONE - JUST CONTINUE trending, PRINT
a RANGE LIST first, or PRINT a set of SCALES for each pen first.
ACTION TIME SETTINGS - System Prompts - Section 8
Prompt section where values are entered in Time and Date parameters which are used to generate the following
actuators: TIME 1, TIME/DATE 1, TIME 2, TIME/DATE 2,TIME1 TO TIME 2, and TIME/DATE 1 TO 2. The TIME1
and TIME 2 actuators are true when the time is equal to or greater than the time values during each 24 hour day,
and false between midnight and the time specified. The TIME/DATE 1 and TIME/DATE 2 actuators are true when
the time and date are equal to or greater than the time and date values specified, and remain true into the future.
TIME 1 TO TIME 2 is true when the time is equal to or greater than the TIME 1 parameter and less than or equal
to TIME 2 parameter during the next 24 hour period.
Examples:
If TIME 1 is set to 8 AM and TIME 2 is set to 4 PM,
then TIME 1 TO TIME 2 is true for 8 hours during the day.
If TIME 1 is set to 10 PM and TIME 2 is set to 6 AM,
then TIME 1 TO TIME 2 is true for 8 hours running through midnight.
Actuators
Digital values (considered to be 1 or 0, true or false, active or inactive) available as choice selections for various
parameters, used to cause some action to occur. For example, A23 is the designation for third alarm on PV2
(Process Variable 2). When PV2 is in alarm, A23 will be 1, true, or active, and if a relay has been configured to be
activated by A23, the relay would be energized.
ALARM SETTINGS - System Prompts - Section 7
Prompt section containing parameters which specify the setpoint of each alarm configured within the Process
Variables section of Configuration.
ALARMS ON ACTUATOR - System Prompts - Configuration - Instrument Settings - Page 4-74
Parameter that selects an actuator which controls whether process alarming is active. When inactive, all process
alarms (A11 through A44) are reset and ignored.
ALARM TYPE - System Prompts - Configuration - Process Variables - Page 4-36
Parameter that specifies the type of alarm: PROCESS HIGH, PROCESS LOW, RATE RAISING, etc.
ALT SPEED ACTUATOR - Chart Prompts - Chart Configuration - Page 6-6
Parameter that specifies an actuator that, when active, switches the chart speed from the NORMAL SPEED to the
ALTERNATE SPEED.
AT VALUE - System Prompts - Configuration - Inputs - Page 4-10
One of the choices for CUTOFF TYPE which specifies that the resultant IV (Input Value) is set to the CUTOFF
VALUE whenever the input valve is less than the CUTOFF VALUE. The CUTOFF VALUE may be positive or
negative, allowing cutoff to occur at any point.
Appendix C
C-1
Edition 3
Rev G
AVERAGE VALUES - System Prompts - Configuration - Recorders - Page 4-46
The choice for the parameter RECORDING METHOD that prints a single dot corresponding to the average of the
trended value during the “print interval”. This method records a series of dots which may not form a continuous
trend line.
BACKGROUND - System Prompts - Configuration - Operator Messages - Page 4-88
A choice for the parameter DISPLAY MODE. It specifies that the message does not override the display of values,
but is included in the Display Sequence in both the Continuous and Sequential Display modes, like any other
display or value.
BLANK MAJOR PERIODS - Chart Prompts - Chart Configuration - Page 6-5
Parameters that specifies the number of major time lines to print between sets of scales, or said another way, the
number of major time divisions to leave between sets of major time divisions which include scales. This is used to
reduce the clutter on the chart if every time line included a scale line and the scale values. For example, if three
trend lines are being recorded on a 24 hour chart, setting BLANK MAJOR LINES to 5 would yield a completed
chart with 3 sets of scales (3 time lines, scale lines, and scale values in each set) evenly spaced around the chart
with 5 major time lines between each set of scales.
CALIBRATION - System Prompts - Section 11
Prompt section where routines for performing various calibrations are located.
CHANGE ALL ENABLES - System Prompts - Enables & Passwords - Page 9-1
Prompt which provides ability to change all enable settings at once, rather than one at a time. When YES is
selected, the next prompt will be CHANGE ALL TO. See CHANGE ALL TO.
CHANGE ALL TO - System Prompts - Enables & Passwords - Page 9-1
Prompt at which the choice changes all enable settings. The choices are DISABLED, ENABLED, and TOGGLE.
The TOGGLE choice causes all sections that are enabled to be disabled, and vice versa. This prompt is accessed
only by selecting YES for CHANGE ALL ENABLES.
CHANGE CHART - Chart Prompts - Page 6-1
Prompt which provides selection of NO or YES - when first viewed, NO is blinking. To change the chart, select
YES. Chart will stop and the instrument will display the next prompt. When stopped in this manner, it can only be
started by selecting YES at the START NEW CHART prompt.
CHART CONFIGURATION - Chart Prompts - Page 6-2
Prompt section containing parameters which configure the chart in a general sense. The parameters include:
chart size, speed, time periods, time line colors, etc. The configuration of the trend recording is done in the
RECORDERS section under CONFIGURATION.
CHART Key
The CHART key is used to enter the Chart Prompts and to advance through the individual chart prompts.
CHART MESSAGES - System Prompts - Configuration - Page 4-92
Prompt section containing parameters which configure Chart Messages. A Chart Message consists of a text
message, four values, and a time and date stamp. The message is recorded on the chart when triggered by the
transition of an actuator. The text is recorded unless it is blank, and the values and time/date stamp are optional,
so the message could be one to six “lines”. Missing lines cause the remaining lines to be moved up. The message overwrites the scale data (as opposed to being “ored” with it) in order to insure readability. Trend and time
lines are not overwritten or lost.
Chart Prompts - Page 6-1
One of three main prompt sections used to provide access to all chart related configuration functions and provide
access to change the chart when required.
Edition 3
Rev G
C-2
Appendix C
CHART ROTATION (Actuator)
Actuator that is controlled by the selected state for the CHART ROTATION prompt found in the Chart Prompts
section. See ROTATE CHART ACTUATR.
CHART ROTATION (Prompt) - Chart Prompts - Page 6-2
Parameter that controls the CHART ROTATION actuator. This parameter is like a special Operator Input which is
pre-configured, but located in the Chart Prompts, as it causes no action directly, but merely changes the state of
the CHART ROTATION actuator. For some applications it may be desirable to control chart rotation with a
prompt, so this was included in the Chart Prompts.
CHART SIZE - Chart Prompts - Chart Configuration - Page 6-2
Parameter that specifies the chart size: 10, 11, or 12 inches.
CHART SPEED - Chart Prompts - Page 6-1
This prompt only appears if ALTERNATE SPEED USED is set to YES. The choices of NORMAL or ALTERNATE
control the ALT CHART SPEED actuator, which is typically selected for the ALT SPEED ACTUATOR parameter in
the CHART CONFIGURATION section.
Chart Speed - Chart Prompts - Chart Configuration - Page 6-3
Configured at the NORMAL SPEED prompt, provides user selectable chart speeds.
CHART TAG - Chart Prompts - Chart Configuration - Page 6-3
Parameter used to specify a description or designation that can be printed on the edge of the chart.
CHART TYPE USED - Chart Prompts - Chart Configuration - Page 6-2
Parameter that specifies the type of chart being used. The choices are: RINGS ONLY, RINGS AND TIME LINES,
and RINGS/LINES/SCALES. RINGS ONLY corresponds to charts that only have preprinted rings, and this is
what is typically used, as it takes full advantage of the recorder’s ability to annotate the chart. In some cases,
customers may prefer preprinted lines to be used for time lines and scale lines, which corresponds to RINGS
AND TIME LINES, or preprinted scale values as well, which corresponds to RINGS/LINES/SCALES.
Choice
A general term which refers to a parameter that is configured by selecting one of several descriptions that appears in the lower display, rather than a value or number. Choices vary from the simple YES and NO, to one of a
list of over 100 actuators.
COLLECT DATA ACTUATR - Chart Prompts - Chart Configuration - Page 6-13
Parameter that specifies the actuator that controls whether data is “collected”. “Collected” means that it is captured or retained for recording on the chart. If the chart is “rotating”, the trend data will be recorded immediately.
If the chart is not “rotating” the data will be retained until the chart begins rotating for normal recording. Data can
be retained for a limited time, before the oldest data is discarded to make room for the newest data.
CONFIGURATION - System Prompts - Section 4
A section of the System Prompts which provides access to INPUTS, PROCESS VARIABLES, RECORDERS,
RELAYS, and other sections to configure the various functions of the instrument.
Configure Chart - See CHART CONFIGURATION
CONNECT THE AVERAGES - System Prompts - Configuration - Recorders - Page 4-46
The recording method that is the same as AVERAGE VALUES, but prints a line between successive averages to
form a continuous trend line.
CONNECT THE VALUES - System Prompts - Configuration - Recorders - Page 4-46
The recording method that is the same as INSTANTANEOUS VALUES, but prints a line between successive
values to form a continuous trend line.
Appendix C
C-3
Edition 3
Rev G
CONSTANTS - System Prompts - Configuration - Page 4-14
Prompt section containing parameters used as fixed values which are typically used for scaling constants in
Derived Variables.
CONTINUOUS (ACTUATION) - System Prompts - Configuration - Operator Inputs - Page 4-83
A choice for the parameter ACTUATION STYLE which specifies that the actuator associated with an Operator
Input will remain in the selected state continuously, rather than momentarily. See MOMENTARY.
CONTINUOUS (DISPLAY MODE) - Display Prompts - Page 5-1
A choice for the parameter DISPLAY MODE which specifies that the instrument will continuously display a single
step of the Display Sequence, and will not automatically advance. The UP or DOWN keys can be used to step
backward or forward through the list or series of displays.
CONTINUOUS (TOTAL) - System Prompts - Configuration - Totalizers - Page 4-56
A choice for the parameter TOTALIZER TYPE which specifies that the total counts to 999,999,999 and then rollsover. The corresponding actuator (TOTAL 1 through TOTAL 4) is true whenever the total is equal to or greater
than the TOTALIZER PRESET value. The RESET ACTUATOR resets the total to zero.
COUNT DOWN PRESET - System Prompts - Configuration - Totalizers - Page 4-56
A choice for the parameter TOTALIZER TYPE which specifies that the total counts down to zero from a preset
value. The corresponding actuator (TOTAL 1 through TOTAL 4) is true whenever the total is equal to zero. The
RESET ACTUATOR resets the total to the TOTALIZER PRESET value.
COUNT TO PRESET - System Prompts - Configuration - Totalizers - Page 4-56
A choice for the parameter TOTALIZER TYPE which specifies that the total counts to or just above the preset
value and stops. The corresponding actuator (TOTAL 1 through TOTAL 4) is true whenever the total is equal to or
greater than the TOTALIZER PRESET. The RESET ACTUATOR resets the total to zero.
CURRENT OUTPUT RANGE - System Prompts - Configuration - Current Outputs - Page 4-70
Parameter that specifies the range of the current output; 0-20mA or 4-20mA.
CURRENT OUTPUTS - System Prompts - Configuration - Page 4-69
Prompt section containing parameters which configure the sources and ranges for the current (4-20mA) type
outputs.
CUSTOM CURVES - System Prompts - Configuration - Page 4-15
Prompt section containing parameters which specify the characteristics of custom curves. Each of 4 curves can
have up to 20 point pairs. The curve is applied by selecting a CUSTOM CURVE choice as a Derived Variable
function. The curves can be used to perform non-linear engineering value translations, or perform piece-wise
correction to a value.
CUTOFF TYPE - System Prompts - Configuration - Inputs -Page 4-10
Parameter that specifies the optional cutoff or lower boundary condition to be established and applied to an IV
(Input Value).
CUTOFF VALUE - System Prompts - Configuration - Inputs -Page 4-10
Parameter that specifies the value to be used in conjunction with CUTOFF TYPE.
CYCLIC - System Prompts - Configuration - Operator Messages - Page 4-88
One of the choices for DISPLAY MODE that specifies that the Operator Messages will appear “cyclically”. In
Continuous Display Mode, “cyclically” means that the display will alternate between the normal selected value or
message display and the highest priority Operator Message. Message priority is in order of message number,
with Operator Message 1 being the highest priority. The UP and DOWN keys can be used to change the selected
value or message, as they normally would. In Sequential Display Mode, “cyclically” means that the display will
sequence through all normal value displays and then all active Operator Messages.
Edition 3
Rev G
C-4
Appendix C
DAxx ITEM xx - System Prompts - Configuration - Derived Actuators - Page 4-80
One of a list of choices that is used to configure a Derived Actuator. The list includes actuators and logical
operators that are combined to form a logic equation.
Data collection - See Trend data collection
DATE FORMAT - System Prompts - Configuration - Instrument Settings - Page 4-75
Parameter that specifies the format used to display dates; MM/DD/YY, DD/MM/YY, or DD/MMM/YY.
DEGREES C/F - System Prompts - Configuration - Inputs - Page 4-4
Parameter that specifies whether to convert a thermocouple or RTD input to a value corresponding to degrees C
or F. This is not the same as UNITS, which is the text displayed for engineering units.
DERIVED ACTUATORS - System Prompts - Configuration - Page 4-80
Prompt section to configure Derived Actuators, which are the logical combination of individual actuators. Up to 24
can be configured.
DERIVED VARIABLES - System Prompts - Configuration - Page 4-18
Prompt section containing parameters which configure Derived Variables, which are the mathematical result of
other variables and constants.
DISABLED - System Prompts - Enables & Passwords - Section 9
Choice which causes the corresponding prompt section to be inaccessible by the operator.
DISP Key
The DISP (Display) key is used to enter the Display Prompts section and to step through the individual Display
Prompts.
DISPLAY FILTER - System Prompts - Configuration - Inputs, Process Variable, Derived Variable
Parameter that specifies the filtering to be applied to the value for display purposes only. This filter does not affect
the IV, PV, DV, etc. as it is used for alarming, recording or any other purpose. Zero specifies no filtering. A value
of 1 to 9999 specifies the number of seconds over which values will be accumulated prior to calculating a new
average for display. Note: When Value Filter is used, its value will affect the displayed value. See VALUE FILTER.
DISPLAY FORMAT - Display Prompts - Page 5-2
Parameter that specifies the desired display formats; 1 value at a time, 2 values at a time, or 4 process variables
at time, with the displayed choices being 1 VAL, 2 VALS, and 4 PVS. Refer to Section 5 of this manual for details.
DISPLAY FORMAT - System Prompts - Configuration - Totalizers - Page 4-56
Parameter that specifies the display format for the total; DIGITS - NO COMMAS or DIGITS WITH COMMAS.
DISPLAY MODE - Display Prompts - Page 5-1
Parameter that specifies the CONTINUOUS or sequential (SEQUENCE) display mode.
See OM DISPLAY MODE for Operator Messages.
DISPLAY OPTION - System Prompts - Configuration
Parameter that specifies the display option for the corresponding value or message. The choices are NOT
DISPLAYED, IN CONTINUOUS MODE, IN SEQUENTIAL MODE, and IN BOTH MODES.
Display Prompts - Section 5
One of the three main prompt sections, accessed by the DISP key, in which all display format parameters and
Operator Prompts are located.
Display Sequence
The list or series of value and message displays that appears in the Normal Display mode.
Appendix C
C-5
Edition 3
Rev G
DISPLAY TAG - System Prompts - Configuration
Parameter used to specify a description or designation that can be displayed with the Input Value, Process
Variable, or Derived Variable when they are included in the Display Sequence in the 1 VAL (1 value at a time)
Display Mode. The tags do not appear in the other display modes, as there is no space for them.
DISPLAY UNITS - System Prompts - Configuration
Parameter that specifies the units for the corresponding value; degrees C, F, or OTHER. If OTHER is selected,
the next prompt will allow the user to enter up to six characters to be used or displayed as the engineering units.
DIVISION - System Prompts - Configuration - Recorders
Units for ZONE parameters that specify location relative to the CHART DIVISIONS parameter. Divisions means
the same as rings. Division 0 is the inner ring.
DRAG - MIN TO MAX - System Prompts - Configuration - Recorders - Page 4-46
The recording method that prints a line between the minimum and maximum values of the trended value during
the “print interval”.
DV FUNCTION - System Prompts - Configuration - Derived Variables - Page 4-19
Parameter used to select type of math function to perform derived variable calculations.
DV INPUT ACTUATOR - System Prompts - Configuration - Derived Variables - Page 4-23
Parameter that selects an actuator used as an input to a Derived Variable Function that determines what the
output from that function will be.
DV RESET ACTUATOR - System Prompts - Configuration - Derived Variables - Page 4-24
Parameter that selects an actuator used as an input to a Derived Variable Function that causes the respective
reset action, which may vary with each DV function
ENABLED - System Prompts - Enables & Passwords - Section 9
Choice which causes the corresponding prompt section to be accessible by the operator.
ENABLES & PASSWORDS - System Prompts - Section 9
Prompt section where prompt sections are enabled or disabled and passwords are configured.
HYSTERESIS - System Prompts - Configuration - Process Variables - Page 4-37
Parameter used to specify the deadband for an alarm. Deadbands are one sided below the setpoint.
INPUT - System Prompts - Configuration - Page 4-1
Parameters found in various sections, used to specify the source of the value to be used by that functional block.
For example, IV2 (Input Value 2) may be the INPUT to PV2 (Process Variable 2). That means that PV2 uses,
displays, and alarms on the value from IV2, which could be determining the value from a thermocouple sensor.
INPUT CORRECTION - System Prompts - Configuration - Inputs - Page 4-11
Parameters used to specify a correction at two selected points, thus providing a slope/intercept correction over the
entire input span. The entered values specify the amount of correction at each point, not the desired value.
INPUT RANGE HIGH - System Prompts - Configuration - Inputs - Page 4-6
Parameter to specify upper range of the analog input signal when the input is volts or current. Example: 100mV, 5
VOLTS, 20mA
INPUT RANGE LOW - System Prompts - Configuration - Inputs - Page 4-5
Parameter to specify lower range of the analog input signal when the input is volts or current. Example: 0mV, 1
VOLTS, 4mA
Edition 3
Rev G
C-6
Appendix C
INPUTS - System Prompts - Configuration - Page 4-1
Prompts section that configures how hardware inputs are processes to provide the desired engineering values,
decimal position, and units, for the sensor type and range used. Other characteristics are also configured for outof-range checking, cutoff, input correction, filtering.
INPUT TYPE/RANGE - System Prompts - Configuration - Inputs - Page 4-3
Specifies whether the input type is thermocouple, RTD, volts, milliamps, millivolts, pulse, switch, or not used (OFF
- NO INPUT).
INSTANTANEOUS VALUES - System Prompts - Configuration - Recorders - Page 4-46
The choice for the parameter RECORDING METHOD that prints a single dot corresponding to the instantaneous
value of the trended value at the end of the “print interval”. This method records a series of dots which may not
form a continuous trend line.
INSTR. ON ACTUATOR - System Prompts - Configuration - Instrument Settings - Page 4-73
Parameter used to specify an actuator which controls whether the instrument’s outputs are active. When inactive,
all outputs (relays, mA, LEDs) are reset, totalizing is stopped and the instrument displays the Instrument Tag and
“INSTRUMENT OFF”. The instrument continues to scan and process inputs, derived variables, process variables, alarms (but with no relay outputs), times and dates, actuators, derived variables, records and collects data.
INSTRUMENT SETTINGS - System Prompts - Configuration - Page 4-72
Prompts section that configures various instrument wide parameters, such as instrument tag, time and date
formats, the current date and time, and some special actuator selections.
INSTRUMENT TAG - System Prompts - Configuration - Instrument Settings - Page 4-72
Parameter used to specify a description or designation that can be displayed with the current time and date in the
Display Sequence.
LED ACTUATOR - System Prompts - Configuration - LEDs - Page 4-65
Parameter that selects an actuator, which, when true, causes the specified LED, 1-8, to be lit.
LEDS - System Prompts - Configuration - Page 4-64
Prompts section that configures actuators for the LEDs.
LOW FLOW CUTOFF - System Prompts - Configuration - Totalizers - Page 4-57
Parameter that specifies the value below which the flow will not be added to the total. If the flow rate is negative,
the flow will be subtracted if the value is more negative than the magnitude of the LOW FLOW CUTOFF value
specified. If negative flow totalization (subtraction) is not desired, the negative flow rate must be cutoff at the
input using CUTOFF TYPE and CUTOFF VALUE. For example, if LOW FLOW CUTOFF is 100 GAL/HR, positive
flow of 0 to 99 GAL/HR will not be totalized, but negative flow of -101 or more negative would be totalized (subtracted).
Major time lines
Major time lines are printed as a series of dots, with noticeable spacing, and extend from the inner chart ring to
the outer chart ring. The number of major time lines printed on the chart is determined by the MAJOR TIME
PERIODS parameter in the Chart Configuration. The color of the major time lines is programmable.
MAJOR TIME PERIODS - Chart Prompts - Chart Configuration - Page 6-4
Parameter that specifies the number of periods or sections the chart shall be divided into. This also corresponds
to the number of “major time lines” printed, and indirectly, the time between them.
MATCH/SELECT - Chart Prompts - Chart Configuration - Page 6-8
Parameters which specify whether time lines, times, and dates and chart tags should be in the same color as the
scale just printed, or always be a fixed color.
Appendix C
C-7
Edition 3
Rev G
MATCH SCALE COLOR - Chart Prompts - Chart Configuration - Page 6-8
A choice for MATCH/SELECT prompts which specifies that the corresponding time line, time, or date and chart
tag should be in the same color as the scale, as the chart is being printed.
Minor time lines
Minor time lines are printed as a series of dots, with spacing greater than major time lines and extend from the
inner chart ring to the outer chart ring. Minor time lines are printed between major time lines, and the number of
minor time lines is one less than the number of MINOR TIME PERIODS specified in Chart Configuration.
MINOR TIME PERIODS - Chart Prompts - Chart Configuration - Page 6-8
Parameter that specifies the number of periods or sections each major time period shall be divided into. This also
corresponds to one less than the number of “minor time lines” printed, and indirectly, the time between them.
MOMENTARY - System Prompts - Configuration - Operator Inputs - Page 4-83
One of two choices for ACTUATION STYLE where the state must be active only momentarily, rather than continuously. For example, for an Operator Input used to reset a totalizer: MOMENTARY would cause the total to be
reset when the ON/YES/1 choice was selected, but it would then begin to totalize again, as the actuator would
only reset it momentarily. CONTINUOUS, the other choice, would cause the total to be reset when the ON/YES/1
choice was selected, but it would remain reset until the OFF/NO/0 choice was selected, as the actuator would be
keeping it reset continuously.
NONE - JUST CONTINUE - Chart Prompts - Chart Configuration - Page 6-11
The choice for the parameter ACTION ON NEW CHART that does not print a range list or set of scales before it
begins recording trend data.
NONE/OFF
One of the list of actuators which is effectively no selection. This is the default or initial configuration for most
actuator parameters. It evaluates to false or 0.
Normal Display mode
The state the unit is in, relative to what’s in the display, when it is not in the Display Prompts, Chart Prompts, or
System Prompts. In this state, values and/or messages are being displayed, rather than prompts.
OFF STATE TEXT - System Prompts - Configuration - Operator Inputs - Page 4-83
Parameter that specifies the text that will be displayed at the left of the lower display when the Operator Input is
shown in the Display Prompts. When this choice is selected, the corresponding actuator (OP INP 1 through OP
INP 12) will be set to false. Typical text may be OFF, NO, STOP, STOPPED, HOLD, etc.
OMxx ACTUATOR - System Prompts - Configuration - Operator Messages - Page 4-87
Parameter that selects an actuator, which, when true, causes the specified Operator Message (1 through 12), to
be displayed per the Operator Message Display Mode setting.
OMxx DISPLAY MODE - System Prompts - Configuration - Operator Messages - Page 4-88
Parameter that specifies the method of displaying the operator message when it is actuated. The choices are
PREEMPT, PREEMPT TO CYCLIC, PREEMPT TO OFF, CYCLIC, and BACKGROUND.
ON STATE TEXT - System Prompts - Configuration - Operator Inputs - Page 4-83
Parameter that specifies the text that will be displayed at the right of the lower display when the Operator Input is
shown in the Display Prompts. When this choice is selected, the corresponding actuator (OP INP 1 through OP
INP 12) will be set to true. Typical text may be ON, YES, RUN, etc.
ON/CONTINUOUS
One of the list of actuators which is effectively no selection, but this choice evaluates to true, active or 1. This is
the default or initial configuration for a few actuator parameters, such as INSTR. ON ACTUATOR and ALARMS
ON ACTUATOR.
Edition 3
Rev G
C-8
Appendix C
OPERATOR INPUTS - System Prompts - Configuration - Page 4-84
Prompts section that configures the text for the message and states and actuation type associated with each
Operator Input. The corresponding actuators can then be changed in the Display Prompts.
OPERATOR MESSAGES - System Prompts - Configuration - Page 4-88
Prompts section that configures the two lines of text and DISPLAY MODE for each Operator Message. They are
displayed only if their actuator is active and appear during Normal Display as specified by the DISPLAY MODE
parameter. They can provide a variety of functions from preemptive critical alarm messages to continuous display
of reference information such as what each LED represents.
Out-of range - See Sensor break
PEN/COLOR - System Prompts - Configuration - Recorders - Page 4-45
Parameter used to specify the pen or color to be used.
POWER UP STATE - System Prompts - Configuration - Operator Inputs - Page 4-84
Parameter that specifies what the state of the actuator should be if power to the instrument is removed and
reapplied. The choices are: OFF, ON, and SAME. For most applications SAME would be the choice, so the
actuator doesn’t change over a power interruption.
PREEMPT - System Prompts - Configuration - Operator Messages - Page 4-88
One of the choices for DISPLAY MODE which specifies that the message continuously overrides the display of
values.
PREEMPT TO CYCLIC - System Prompts - Configuration - Operator Messages - Page 4-88
One of the choices for DISPLAY MODE which specifies that the message overrides the display of values until any
key is pressed, after which the message will appear “cyclically”.
PREEMPT TO OFF - System Prompts - Configuration - Operator Messages - Page 4-88
One of the choices for DISPLAY MODE which specifies that the message overrides the display of values until any
key is pressed, after which it will not appear until the actuator goes inactive then active again.
PRELOAD - System Prompts - Configuration - Totalizers - Page 4-56
One of the choices for TOTALIZER TYPE which specifies that the total counts to 999,999,999 and then rolls over
to zero. The corresponding preset actuator is true whenever the total is equal to or greater than the TOTALIZER
PRESET value. The RESET ACTUATOR resets the total to the TOTALIZER PRESET value.
Print interval
The time between each print cycle, when the pen actuator/cartridge assembly passes over the chart to record
trend and other data. The print interval is equal to the value of the chart rotation speed (expressed in hours)
expressed in seconds. For example, with a chart speed of 12 hours, the print interval is 12 seconds.
PRINT RANGE LIST - Chart Prompts - Chart Configuration - Page 6-11
The choice for the parameter ACTION ON NEW CHART that prints a list of the scale range, units, and recorder
tag for each “Recorder” configured. If the Recorder is using two zones or does not use 100% of the printable
chart span, the designation NL (for Non-Linear) will be included.
PRINT SCALES - Chart Prompts - Chart Configuration - Page 6-11
The choice for the parameter ACTION ON NEW CHART that prints a set of scales for each Recorder configured.
PROCESS VARIABLES - System Prompts - Configuration - Page 4-32
Prompts section that configures up to four Process Variables, which can be used for alarming or to take advantage of the 4 PVS Display Format.
Appendix C
C-9
Edition 3
Rev G
Prompt
A message that is displayed in the upper line, while a prompt section name or parameter (value, choice, or text) is
displayed in the lower line. During normal operation, the instrument is either displaying a value(s), a message, or
a prompt.
Prompt section
A general term for a group of prompts, such as Display Prompts, Configuration, or Inputs.
PULSE EVERY - System Prompts - Configuration - Totalizers - Page 4-60
Parameter used to specify the number of incremental units between each output pulse. See PULSED OUTPUT.
PULSED OUTPUT (Relays) - System Prompts - Configuration - Relays - Page 4-66
One of the choices for RELAY x USAGE which specifies that the relay will be energized momentarily (about 60
milliseconds), typically used in conjunction with a totalizer pulsed output.
PULSED OUTPUT (Totals) - System Prompts - Configuration - Totalizers - Page 4-60
Parameter used to specify whether a pulsed output is configured, which generates a “contact closure” each time
the total reaches a multiple of the PULSE EVERY value.
PULSES - System Prompts - Configuration - Totalizers - Page 4-54
One total time base, making the totalizer a transition counter, counting the number of times the value makes a
transition from zero.
RANGE LIMIT HIGH/LOW - System Prompts - Configuration - Inputs - Page 4-9
Parameters that specify the normal engineering unit conversion range on inputs other than TC and RTD types and
provide values for the “out-of-range” testing. The RANGE LIMIT HIGH (LOW) value corresponds to the engineering unit value when the analog input is at the respective INPUT RANGE HIGH (LOW) value. If the resultant IV
(Input Value) is 5% above the high value or below the low value, the unit will drive the corresponding IV to +99999
or -99999, depending upon whether UPSCALE or DOWNSCALE was selected for SENSOR BREAK. The input
value will also be “flagged” as being in error. If the 5% allowed is insufficient for a particular application, the band
can be widened by widening the INPUT RANGE and RANGE LIMIT values. RANGE LIMIT HIGH/LOW are not
needed for the conversion of TC and RTD input types, but are included for the “out-of-range” testing. When the
INPUT TYPE is changed to TC or RTD, or when the TC TYPE or RTD TYPE is changed, the high and low values
will be set to the limits of the respective input, after which they may be modified.
Rate alarm hysteresis - System Prompts - Configuration - Process Variables - Page 4-37
When the ALARM TYPE selected is RATE RAISING or FALLING, hysteresis applies to the rate of change. For
example, for an alarm setpoint of 10 degrees C/MIN, HYSTERESIS of 1 degree C/MIN, the unit will alarm at 10
degrees C/MIN, and reset the alarm at 9 degrees C/MIN (RATE RISING), and alarm at 10 degrees C/MIN, and
reset the alarm at 11 degrees C/MIN (RATE FALLING)..
RECORDER
In this instrument, RECORDER applies to an entity that provides the trend recording function on one of the four
pens. Each RECORDER is not inherently associated with any particular input, process variable, pen or color, but
rather is fully configurable to work with any of these.
RECORDERS - System Prompts - Configuration - Page 4-43
Prompts section that configures recording method, scales, zones, colors, etc., for each RECORDER.
RECORDING METHOD - System Prompts - Configuration - Recorders - Page 4-46
Parameter specifying one of five methods of trend recording: INSTANTANEOUS VALUES, CONNECT THE
VALUES, DRAG - MIN TO MAX, AVERAGE VALUES, and CONNECT THE AVERAGES.
RELAY ACTUATOR - System Prompts - Configuration - Relays - Page 4-67
Parameter that selects an actuator, which, when true, causes the specified relay, 1-8, to be energized.
Edition 3
Rev G
C-10
Appendix C
RELAYS - System Prompts - Configuration - Page 4-66
Prompts section that configures actuators and other parameters associated with relay and/or solid state relay
driver outputs.
RELAY x USAGE - System Prompts - Configuration - Relays - Page 4-66
Parameter that specifies the type of output the relay is to provide, or how it is to be used: STATE OR ON-OFF,
TIME PROPORTIONING, or PULSED OUTPUT.
RINGS AND TIME LINES - See CHART TYPE USED
RINGS/LINES/SCALES - See CHART TYPE USED
RINGS ONLY - Chart Prompts - Chart Configuration - Page 6-2
A choice for the parameter CHART TYPE which specifies that the charts only has preprinted rings. This is what is
typically used, as it takes full advantage of the recorder’s ability to annotate the chart, by adding time lines, scale
lines, and scale values.
ROTATE CHART ACTUATR - Chart Prompts - Chart Configuration - Page 6-12
Parameter which specifies an actuator, which, when true, causes the chart to “rotate” for normal trending. When
YES is selected for START NEW CHART, the chart will be initialized per ACTION ON NEW CHART, and then the
chart is ready for trending. If the chart is not “rotating”, trend data recording is suspended, but “trend data collection” may continue. If it were collected, when the chart began to “rotate”, the collected data would be recorded
first, then the current real time data.
RTD TYPE - System Prompts - Configuration - Inputs - Page 4-4
Parameter that specifies the type of RTD: PT 100 ohm .00385 DIN, .00392 USA, .00392 SAMA, or NI 100 ohm.
SAMPLE PERIOD - System Prompts - Configuration - Process Variables - Page 4-37
Parameter that specifies the time period between samples for calculation of the rate of change of the Process
Variable for Rate Alarms. If the time between samples is too short, one second for example, a slight but quick
change may erroneously trigger the alarm. Conversely, too long of a period may delay the recognition of an
alarm condition. The period is dependent upon the application.
SCALE INTERVAL - System Prompts - Configuration - Recorders - Page 4-49
Parameters that specifies the number of divisions or rings between printed scale values. The values printed are
calculated by the instrument. If the SCALE INTERVAL parameter is zero, no scale values are printed, but the
RECORDER TAG will be printed. If the SCALE INTERVAL parameter value equals the number of divisions in the
zone, scale values will be printed at each end only.
Scale lines
Scale lines are printed as a series of dots, closely spaced to form a solid line, and are printed only in the area of
the chart (zone or portion of chart span) used for the respective trend line. The scale lines are printed on top of
major time lines. The number of scale lines printed on the chart is determined by the MAJOR TIME PERIODS
parameter, the number of BLANK MAJOR TIME PERIODS, and the number of trend lines being recorded. The
color of the scale line is the same as the respective trend line.
Scale values
The set of values printed next to the scale line which identify the engineering values corresponding to the respective rings on the chart, usually evenly spaced at multiples of 10 divisions or rings.
SELECT A COLOR - Chart Prompts - Chart Configuration - Page 6-8
A choice for MATCH/SELECT prompts which specifies that the corresponding time line, time, or date and chart
tag should always be printed in a fixed color. The color is selected at the next prompt.
Appendix C
C-11
Edition 3
Rev G
Sensor break
While there are sensor break jumpers, JU1 and JU4, sensor break and out-of-range conditions are actually
determined and handled by the software. When either occurs, the software will drive the input value to +99999 or
-99999 based upon whether SENSOR BREAK is software configured for UPSCALE or DOWN SCALE. Any
outputs will react accordingly. Out-of-range is defined as being more than 5% out of the span established by
RANGE LIMIT LOW and RANGE LIMIT HIGH.
For 5 or 10 volt and current inputs, the analog signal goes to zero when there is a sensor break, due to voltage
divider or shunt resistors. For sensor break detection to work on these input types, the INPUT RANGE LOW
(analog signal low) and/or RANGE LIMIT LOW (engineering units low) parameters must be set high enough such
that at zero volts/mA, the resultant value will be at least 5% below the span established by RANGE LIMIT LOW
and RANGE LIMIT HIGH.
SIMULATED VARIABLES - System Prompts - Configuration - Page 4-98
Prompts section that configures up to four SVs (Simulated Variables) that can be used to simulate an input,
primarily for demonstration purposes. The functions available are: sin wave, square wave, spikes, or sawtooth.
SPAN 1 HIGH - System Prompts - Configuration - Recorders - Page 4-48
Parameter that specifies the trend value corresponding to the “top” of zone 1.
This parameter also specifies the “bottom” of zone 2, if two zones are used.
SPAN 1 LOW - System Prompts - Configuration - Recorders - Pag 4-48e
Parameter that specifies the trend value corresponding to the “bottom” of zone 1.
SPAN 2 HIGH - System Prompts - Configuration - Recorders - Page 4-50
Parameter that specifies the trend value corresponding to the “top” of zone 2.
START NEW CHART - Chart Prompts - Page 6-1
When YES is selected, the unit will initialize itself for a new chart and automatically return to the Normal Display
mode. This prompt appears only after the chart has been stopped by selecting YES at the CHANGE CHART
prompt.
STATE OR ON-OFF - System Prompts - Configuration - Relays - Page 4-66
One of the choices for RELAY x USAGE which specifies that the relay output will be energized whenever the
selected actuator is active. This is used for most applications.
STOP AFTER 1 REV - Chart Prompts - Chart Configuration - Page 6-11
Parameter which controls whether the chart stops recording after one revolution (360 degrees of rotation). If YES
is selected, trend data would typically continue to be collected and would be recorded after a new chart is installed.
SWITCH CONTACT - System Prompts - Configuration - Inputs - Page 4-3
One of the choices for INPUT TYPE which specifies that it is used as a contact-closure sensing the input.
Tx HOLD ACTUATOR - System Prompts - Configuration - Totalizers - Page 4-59
Parameter that selects an actuator which can suspend totalization when active.
Tx RESET ACTUATOR - System Prompts - Configuration - Totalizers - Page 4-58
Parameter that selects an actuator that will reset the total when active.
Tag
A general term which refers to a description or designation that is displayed or recorded. There are tags for the
instrument, chart, and each input, process variable, recorder, etc. Tags are text parameters.
TC TYPE - System Prompts - Configuration - Inputs - Page 4-3
Parameter which specifies the thermocouple type to be used.
Edition 3
Rev G
C-12
Appendix C
TEST - System Prompts - Section 10
Prompt section which provides access to various test routines.
Text
A general term which refers to a parameter that is a series of characters, such as a display tag, units, or contents
of a configurable message.
TIME BASE - System Prompts - Configuration - Totalizers - Page 4-54
Parameter that specifies the time base of the flow rate, so the instrument can calculate the total. The choices are
units: PER SEC, PER MIN, PER HOUR, PER DAY, and PULSES.
Time between print cycles - see Print interval
TIME FORMAT - System Prompts - Configuration - Instrument Settings - Page 4-75
Parameter that specifies the format for displaying time; AM/PM or 24 HOUR.
TIME FORMAT - System Prompts - Configuration - Timers - Page 4-62
Parameter that specifies the time format for timers; SECONDS, MINUTES:SECONDS, or
HOURS:MINUTES:SECONDS.
TIMER TYPE - System Prompts - Configuration - Timers - Page 4-62
Parameter that specifies the type of timer; OFF, COUNT UP, or COUNT DOWN.
TIMERS - System Prompts - Configuration - Page 4-61
Prompts section that configures periodic actuators that can control instrument activities. Timers can count up to a
terminal value or count down from a value to zero. At the end of the timing function, their respective actuators are
set true. Each timer has a reset actuator, which when true, causes the timer value to be set to its initial value.
TMx RESET ACTUATOR - System Prompts - Confiugration - Timers - Page 4-63
Parameter that selects an actuator, which when true, causes the specified timer value to be set to its initial value
(zero or the Timer Period value), depending on whether the Timer Type is Count Up or Count Down.
TOTAL IS FLOW - System Prompts - Configuration - Totalizers - Page 4-55
Parameter used to specify what scaling factor the flow value should be multiplied by in calculating the total value.
If the choice TIMES 1,000,000 is selected, and the flow was 0.3 MGD (Million Gallons per Day), at the end of a
day the total would be 0.3 million gallons, but the totalizer would display a value of 300,000 (0.3 times 1,000,000)
and the total would correspond to gallons, maybe displayed as GAL.
TOTALIZER GENERAL FORMULA
The general formula for the totals, calculated each second is:
TOTAL = TOTAL + (VALUE / TTB) * FACTOR
Where:
VALUE is the once a second value or one second average for the
selected input source.
TTB is
1
for TOTAL TIME BASE - PER SECOND
60
for TOTAL TIME BASE - PER MINUTE
3600
for TOTAL TIME BASE - PER HOUR
86400
for TOTAL TIME BASE - PER DAY
FACTOR is the selected factor (.0001 to 100000)
TOTALIZER TYPE - System Prompts - Configuration - Totalizers - Page 4-56
Parameter that specifies one of four types of totalizing; CONTINUOUS, PRE-LOAD, COUNT TO PRESET, or
COUNT DOWN PRESET.
Appendix C
C-13
Edition 3
Rev G
TO ZERO BELOW VALUE - System Prompts - Configuration - Inputs - Page 4-10
One of the choices for CUTOFF TYPE which specifies that the resultant IV (Input Value) is set to zero whenever
the input value is less than the CUTOFF VALUE. Consequently negative values are set to zero. The CUTOFF
VALUE must be positive.
TO ZERO NEAR ZERO - System Prompts - Configuration - Inputs - Page 4-10
One of the choices for One method of input cutoff type, when selected, sets the input value to zero whenever the
absolute value is less than the specified value, thus allowing negative values, but zeroing small positive or negative values. The CUTOFF VALUE must be positive.
TREND DATA COLLECT (Actuator)
Actuator that is controlled by the selected state at the TREND DATA COLLECT prompt found in the Chart Prompts
section.
TREND DATA COLLECT (Prompt) - Chart Prompts - Page 6-14
Parameter that controls the TREND DATA COLLECT actuator. This parameter is like a special Operator Input
which is pre-configured, but located in the Chart Prompts, as it causes no action directly, but merely changes the
state of the TREND DATA COLLECT actuator. For some applications it may be desirable to control trend data
collection with a prompt, so this was included in the Chart Prompts.
Trend data collection
A general term which refers to the instruments ability to collect trend data to be recorded when the chart is
rotating for normal recording (which excludes initializing a new chart). If data collection remains on while the chart
is not rotating or is being initialized, when rotation resumes, collected data will be recorded prior to recording
current real time data. The instrument can collect up to 360 trend values. If an instrument is configured with 4
Recorders and a 24 hour chart speed, it could collect data for 36 minutes before it began to loose the oldest data.
[(360 values / 4 Recorders) = 90 print cycles, times 24 seconds per print cycle (print interval), results in 2160
seconds or 36 minutes]
Value
A general term referring to a number or a parameter that is a number.
VALUE FILTER - System Prompts - Configuration
Parameter found in various sections that specifies the filtering to be applied to the value for all purposes. This
filter affects the IV, PV, DV, etc. as it is used for alarming, recording or any other purpose. Zero specifies no
filtering. A value of 1 to 9999 specifies the number of seconds over which values will be accumulated prior to
calculating a new average for display. See DISPLAY FILTER.
V/MA CONV - System Prompts - Configuration - Inputs - Page 4-7
Parameter that specifies the type of conversion for the input. The choices are: LINEAR, SQRT, and EXP, for linear,
square root, and exponential. If EXP is selected, the next parameter will be the exponential value.
WHEN DISPLAYED - System Prompts - Configuration - Operator Inputs - Page 4-84
Parameter that specifies when an Operator Input is displayed, ALWAYS or WHEN ENABLED.
If the WHEN ENABLED choice is selected, that Operator Input is not shown when OPERATOR INPUTS is DISABLED in ENABLES & PASSWORDS.
Zone
The portion of the chart over which a trend line is to be recorded. The zone may be less than the maximum area
available for recording. Trends can be recorded in two adjacent zones to allow for higher resolution on one end of
the recorded span. Zones are established with respect to the number of rings or divisions on the chart, typically
70, 100, or 120 rings or divisions. Division 0 is the inner ring.
ZONE 1 HIGH - System Prompts - Configuration - Recorders - Page 4-47
Parameter that specifies the DIVISION or ring corresponding to the “top” end of the zone.
This parameter also specifies the “bottom” of zone 2, if two zones are used.
Edition 3
Rev G
C-14
Appendix C
ZONE 1 LOW - System Prompts - Configuration - Recorders - Page 4-47
Parameter that specifies the DIVISION or ring corresponding to the “bottom” end of the zone.
For reverse ranges (lower engineering value at the outer portion), either the two ZONE parameters or the two
SPAN parameters can be reversed.
ZONE 2 HIGH - System Prompts - Configuration - Recorders - Page 4-49
Parameter that specifies the DIVISION or ring corresponding to the “top” end of the second zone. Setting it to
zero specifies that only one zone is being used. ZONE 1 HIGH specifies the “bottom” of zone 2 if two zones are
used.
Appendix C
C-15
Edition 3
Rev G
Appendix D - Examples
EXAMPLE 1
Application:
Palmer-Bowlus Flume Height/Flow
Given: Transmitter output linear in distance (4mA=0.0", 20mA=2.85")
Configuration:
Inputs: As required
Custom Curves: See below
Derived Variables: See below
Process Variables (if alarming required): As required
Recorders: See below
Totalizers (if Totals required): As required
Instrument Settings: As required
LEDs/Relays: As required
Chart: As required
Custom Curves:
Custom Curves Number
CC1 Decimal Position of Input
CC1 Decimal Position of Output
CC1 Number of Points
CC1 Point Pair 1
CC1 Point Pair 2
CC1 Point Pair 3
l
l
CC1 Point Pair 20
1
2
2
20
0.00 --> 0.00
0.15 --> 0.30
0.30 --> 1.00
2.85 --> 50.20
Derived Variables:
DV Number
DV1 Display Tag
DV1 Function
DV1 Input
DV1 Display Units
DV1 Units Description
DV1 Decimal Position
1
GPM
Custom Curve 1
IV1 (Input configured)
Other
CPM
2
Recorders:
Recorder Number
R1 Recorder Tag
R1 Recording Method
R1 Value to Record
R1 Decimal Position
R1 Chart Divisions
R1 Zone 1 Low
R1 Zone 1 High
R1 Span 1 Low
R1 Span 1 High
R1 Scale Interval
1
Flow
Drag - Min to Max
DV1
2
100
Division 0
Division 100
0.00 GPM
50.20 GPM
10 Divisions
Appendix D
D-1
Edition 3
Rev G
EXAMPLE 2
Application:
User would like to combine logically 3 alarms to create an AND situation.
Configuration:
Derived Actuators:
Derived Actuator
DA1 Item 1
DA1 Item 2
DA1 Item 3
DA1 Item 4
DA1 Item 5
DA1 Item 6
1
A11 (Alarm 1 Process Value 1 Active)
AND
A12 (Alarm 2 Process Value 1 Active)
AND
A13 (Alarm 3 Process Value 1 Active)
END
If Alarm 1 on Process Value 1 is Active AND Alarm 2 on Process Value 1 is Active AND Alarm 3 on Process Value
1 is Active, THEN DA1 (Derived Actuator 1) will be TRUE.
EXAMPLE 3
Operator Inputs
Operator Inputs are prompts the end user may program into the instrument that allow these prompts to turn on or
off actuators that control some other function within the instrument.
Application:
A user would like to turn an exhaust fan on or off as required by an operator via the keypad.
Configuration:
Operator Inputs:
Operator Input
OI1 Prompt Text
OI1 Off/No/0 Choice
OI1 On/Yes/1 Choice
OI1 Actuation Style
OI1 Power Up State
OI1 When Displayed
1
EXHAUST FAN
FAN OFF
FAN ON
CONTINUOUS
SAME
ALWAYS
To complete configuring, configure Relay X Actuator OP INP 1 and connect Relay X to the exhaust fan.
Operation:
From the Normal Display, depress the DISP key until EXHAUST FAN appears in the top display line and
FAN OFF FAN ON appears in the bottom display line, one of these should be blinking indicating the current
state of the fan. Depress the key located directly below the choice that is not blinking (F1 FAN OFF & F5 FAN
ON). IF FAN ON was selected, a relay should energize corresponding to the relay assigned above. If FAN OFF
was selected, a relay should de-energize corresponding to the relay assigned above.
Edition 3
Rev G
D-2
Appendix D
EXAMPLE 4
Operator Messages
Operator Messages are user defined messages to advise, or provide information, via the display, that selected
actuators are active. The messages are displayed as specified by the Operator Message Display Mode parameter
setting.
Application:
A user would like a visual indication whenever the total exceeds the preset along with instructions for an operator.
Configuration:
Operator Message:
Operator Message
OM1 Actuator
OM1 Line 1 Text
OM1 Line 2 Text
OM1 DISPLAY Mode*
1
PRESET 1
TOTAL EXCEED PRESET
PHONE 908 6666
PREEMPT TO OFF
*PREEMPT TO OFF - Specifies that the message overrides the display of values until any key is pressed, after
which it will not appear until the actuator goes inactive then active again.
EXAMPLE 5
Chart Messages
Chart Messages allow user defined text, up to 4 values, and a time/date stamp to be recorded on the chart,
triggered on the transition of an actuator, not its state. The message can be one to six lines with missing lines
causing the remaining line to be moved up. The message is recorded on the six outermost "lines" within the trend
area. Trend and time lines will not be overwritten or lost.
Since it may take considerable time for the instrument to record a message, three messages will be queued with a
fourth queue providing a QUEUE OVERFLOW message. All messages actuated while the queue is full are lost.
Application:
A user would like to print a message indicating that Alarm 1 on Process Value 2 has tripped.
Configuration:
Chart Message:
Chart Message
CM2 Actuator
CM2 Message Text
CM2 Value 1
CM2 Value 2
CM2 Time/Date Stamp
2
A21 (Alarm 1 Process Value 2)
ALARM 1 PRESSURE HI
IV2 (Input Value for Pressure)
PV2 (Process Value for Alarm)
YES
Operation:
During Normal Operation, if the pressure exceeds the alarm setpoint, the alarm (A21) will go on and at the same
time the actuator, A21, will trigger the chart message, ALARM 1 PRESSURE HI, and print the value of IV2, the
actual pressure, and PV2, the process value used to trigger the alarm.
Appendix D
D-3
Edition 3
Rev G
EXAMPLE 6
Latching Alarm
Configuration:
Process Variables:
Process Variable
PV1 Display Tag
PV1 Input
A11 Alarm Type
A11 Hysteresis
1
users choice
IV1
Process - High
3
LEDs:
LED Number
LED 8 Actuator
8
DA1
Relays:
Relay Number
Relay 4 Usage
Relay 4 Actuator
4
State or On-Off
DA1
Derived Actuators:
Derived Actuator
DA1 Item 1
DA1 Item 2
DA1 Item 3
DA1 Item 4
DA1 Item 5
DA1 Item 6
DA1 Item 7
1
Not
Reset
And
DA1
Or
A11
End
Derived Actuator 1 will be true when A11 is true OR when DA 1 is true AND the Reset Key is not true. To cause
Derived Actuator 1 to be false, press the Reset key, providing the process has gone below the alarm set point.
Note: The LED 8 and Relay 4 will remain latched until the Reset Key is pressed although the display will no longer
display the "H" or the "g" (global indicator).
Edition 3
Rev G
D-4
Appendix D
EXAMPLE 7
Latching High Alarm - Latched Open
Configuration:
Process Variables:
Process Variable
PV1 Display Tag
PV1 Input
A11 Alarm Type
users choice
users choice
users choice
Process - High
LEDs
LED Number
LED # Actuator
users choice
A11
Relay
Relay Number
Relay # Usage
Relay # Actuator
users choice
State or On/Off
DA2
Derived Actuators
Derived Actuator
DA1 Item 1
DA1 Item 2
DA1 Item 3
DA1 Item 4
DA1 Item 5
DA1 Item 6
DA1 Item 7
1
NOT
RESET
AND
DA1
OR
A11
END
Derived Actuator
DA2 Item 1
DA2 Item 2
DA2 Item 3
2
NOT
DA1
END
Appendix D
D-5
Edition 3
Rev G
Appendix E - Accuracy Tables
J T/C
WIDE
°C
0/1200
-200/0
1
REF
ACC'Y
°C
0.43
0.63
J T/C
NARROW
0/400
-200/0
0.11
0.16
0.05
0.08
0.33
0.56
0.50
0.80
0.04
0.02
0.017
0.024
K T/C
WIDE
0/1370
-250/0
0.62
1.05
0.26
0.30
0.40
0.78
1.28
2.13
0.14
0.03
0.095
0.159
K T/C
NARROW
0/500
-250/0
0.15
0.26
0.08
0.30
0.39
0.78
0.62
1.35
0.05
0.03
0.023
0.040
E T/C
WIDE
0/1000
-250/0
0.33
0.66
0.19
0.42
0.28
0.62
0.80
1.71
0.10
0.03
0.050
0.101
E T/C
NARROW
0/300
-250/0
0.09
0.17
0.19
0.42
0.29
0.62
0.57
1.21
0.03
0.03
0.014
0.025
N T/C
WIDE
0/1300
-250/0
0.68
1.44
0.21
0.60
0.42
0.93
1.32
2.97
0.13
0.03
0.104
0.220
N T/C
NARROW
0/600
-200/0
-250/-200
0.18
0.31
0.93
0.11
0.20
0.60
0.44
0.81
2.15
0.73
1.32
3.68
0.06
0.02
0.01
0.028
0.048
0.142
INPUT
TYPE
See Note:
RANGE
2
LIN.
ACC'Y
°C
0.20
0.08
3
FACTORY
CAL
°C
0.32
0.56
4
REF+LIN
+CAL
°C
0.95
1.28
5
DEVIATION
ACC'Y
°C
0.12
0.02
6
RESOL
°C/bit
0.066
0.097
TO ACHIEVE STATED RESULTS, THE FOLLOWING THERMOCOUPLES MUST BE USED WITH THE TC NARROW INPUT TYPE
1.59
0.05
0.54
0.79
2.92
0.243
1800/2300
G T/C
1.23
0.10
0.43
0.64
2.30
0.188
800/1800
1.38
0.03
0.25
0.70
2.33
0.210
500/800
1.79
0.02
0.25
0.87
2.91
0.274
300/500
3.65
0.03
0.58
1.61
5.84
0.557
0/300
C T/C
1800/2300
1200/1800
300/1200
0/300
2.14
1.62
1.33
1.54
0.54
0.43
0.28
0.12
1.01
0.80
0.68
0.77
3.68
2.85
2.29
2.43
0.05
0.06
0.09
0.03
0.326
0.247
0.202
0.235
D T/C
1800/2300
300/1800
0/300
1.88
1.32
1.75
0.38
0.40
0.26
0.90
0.68
0.85
3.26
2.40
2.86
0.05
0.15
0.03
0.287
0.201
0.267
NNM
450/1370
0/450
0.44
0.56
0.33
0.13
0.33
0.37
1.10
1.06
0.09
0.05
0.067
0.085
PLII
1000/1400
500/1000
0/500
0.72
0.59
0.62
0.28
0.20
0.10
0.44
0.38
0.40
1.44
1.17
1.12
0.04
0.05
0.05
0.110
0.089
0.095
Appendix E
E-1
Edition 3
Rev G
THE FOLLOWING THERMOCOUPLES ARE AVAILABLE AS NARROW ONLY
2
LIN.
ACC''Y
°C
0.09
0.19
0.36
3
FACTORY
CAL
°C
0.34
0.70
1.90
4
REF+LIN
+CAL
°C
0.55
1.12
2.98
5
DEVIATION
ACC'Y
°C
0.04
0.02
0.00
6
RESOL
°C
0/400
-220/0
-250/-220
01
REF
ACC'Y
°C
0.12
0.23
0.73
R T/C
800/1700
200/800
0.43
0.58
0.19
0.25
0.83
1.08
1.45
1.90
0.09
0.06
0.065
0.088
S T/C
250/1750
0.56
0.25
1.05
1.87
0.15
0.086
B T/C
200/1800
0.74
0.31
1.34
2.39
0.16
0.113
See Note:
RANGE
2
LIN.
ACC'Y
°C
0.03
0.20
3
FACTORY
CAL
°C
0.13
0.12
4
REF+LIN
+CAL
°C
0.33
0.46
5
DEVIATION
ACC'Y
°C/°C
0.06
0.00
6
RESOL
°C
-160/480
-200/-160
1
REF.
ACC'Y
°C
0.16
0.14
392
RTD
-100/450
0.16
0.03
0.13
0.32
0.05
0.025
392
SAMA
-200/560
0.29
0.13
0.24
0.66
0.06
0.044
100 ohm
Nickel
-40/200
0.09
0.05
0.07
0.21
0.02
0.013
INPUT
TYPE
T T/C
INPUT
TYPE
385
RTD
Edition 3
Rev G
See Note:
RANGE
E-2
°C/bit
0.018
0.036
0.111
°C/bit
0.025
0.022
Appendix E
3
FACTORY
CAL
uV
1000
4
REF+LIN
+CAL
uV
3500
5
DEVIATION
ACC'Y
uV/°C
1000
6
RESOL
10V
mV
0/10000
1
REF
ACC'Y
uV
2500
1V
0/1000
250
100
350
100.0
38.1
100mV
0/100
25
20
45
10.0
3.81
25mV
0/25
6
20
26
2.5
0.954
See Note:
SPAN
1
REF.
ACC'Y
uA
5
5
3
FACTORY
CAL
uA
2
2
4
REF+CAL
5
DEVIATION
ACC'Y
uA/°C
2.0
2.0
6
RESOL.
LINEAR
RANGES
LINEAR
RANGES
mA
See Note:
SPAN
mA
4/20
0/20
uA
7
7
uV/bit
381
uA/bit
0.763
0.763
NOTES: The Table attempts to show the effect of each significant factor which contributes to the overall measurement error. See the enumerated items below for more specific explainations of each column of data.
1. Reference Acc'y based on 0.025% (250ppm) of input voltage span.
2. Linearization Acc'y is based on conformance to NIST Monograph 175 (based on the ITS-90) for
letter-designated thermocouple types, or other industry standards for non letter-designated type T/Cs and all
RTDs.
3. Factory Cal is defined by limits of repeatability in a manufacturing environment of ±10uV for zero and span
calibrations on thermocouples, as stated or other inputs, and ±0.15°C for thermocouple cold junction
calibrations.
4. The REF + LIN + CAL column represents the total "static" error allowed for an instrument as produced by the
manufacturing process.
5. Deviation Acc'y is derived from a temperature coefficient of .01%/°C or ±100ppm/°C expressed in units of the
corresponding range.
6. Resolution on thermocouples and RTDs is derived as a function of the input voltage Range and dV/dT.
Appendix E
E-3
Edition 3
Rev G